DVN V5.

Reference
Guide

345 Victoria Avenue, Suite 300, Westmount, Quebec, Canada H3Z 2N2
Toll Free: 1 888 742 1306 • Phone: (+1) 514 486 1306 • Fax: (+1) 514 486 0694
E-Mail: [email protected] • Internet: www.stellate.com
Copyright
2002 Stellate Systems. All rights reserved.
Stellate Systems
345 Victoria Avenue, Suite 300
Montreal, Quebec
Canada H3Z 2N2
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Stellate Systems assumes no
responsibility for any errors, omissions or inaccuracies whatsoever. The software described in this
document is furnished under a software license agreement. The software may be used only in
accordance with the terms of this agreement. Except as permitted by the software license agreement,
no part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system,
or translated into any language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic,
optical, chemical, or manual, including photocopying, anywhere in the world without the written
permission of Stellate Systems.

Trademarks
HARMONIE, SENSA, and LUNA are registered trademarks of Stellate Systems.
Microsoft Office, Access, Word, Excel, and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
DirectCD is a trademark of Adaptec, Inc.
BiPAP is a registered trademark of Respironics, Inc.
Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their representative
holders.

Disclaimer
EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED IN THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT AND TO THE MAXIMUM
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, STELLATE SYSTEMS MAKES NO OTHER
WARRANTIES AS TO THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Stellate HARMONIE DVN V5.2 Reference Guide
Printed in Canada
May, 2002
Part No. DOC-RG-H012-1
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 Introduction 1-1
Using this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Help System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Starting the Help System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Using the Help Button or F1 Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Using the Help Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Help System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Minimum System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

CHAPTER 2 Installation 2-1

Software Licenses and Hardware Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Installing the Hardware Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Installing HARMONIE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Selecting HARMONIE Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Installing the DAO Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

CHAPTER 3 HARMONIE Basics 3-1

Starting HARMONIE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Desktop Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
HARMONIE Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
HARMONIE Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Patients View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Patients View in List Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Patients View in Files/Reports Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Patients View in Detail Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Patients View in Montages Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Staff View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Staff View in List Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Staff View in Files/Reports Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Staff View in Detail Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Volumes View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Volumes View in List Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Volumes View in Files/Reports Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Global Montages View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
File Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Files to Backup View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Files to Assign View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Files to Review View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Files to Archive View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide i

 Files to Verify View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
User Defined Views 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Showing Different Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Customizing the Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Storage Status Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
HARMONIE Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

CHAPTER 4 Setting Up the Database 4-1

Introduction to the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Setting up a Central Database on the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Configuring the Central Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Creating the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Working with Files and Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Configuring Storage Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Creating Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Deleting Volumes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Patient Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Finding Patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Staff Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Creating Electrode Sets and Montages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Channel Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Using Channel Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
No Channel Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Electrode Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Electrode Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Creating Electrode Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Global Montages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Recording Montages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Creating Recording Montages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Reformatting Montages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Creating Reformatting Montages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Creating Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Average Reference Reformatting Montages . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Laplacian Reformatting Montages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Copying Electrode Sets and Montages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Making Patient-Specific Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

CHAPTER 5 Recording EEG Files 5-1

Introduction to Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Connection to the Central Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Before You Begin Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Starting the Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Creating or Editing Recording Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Calibrating Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
About Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
HARMONIE Calibration Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Programming Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

ii HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide

 Photic Stimulator Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Manual Sample Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Push Button Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Automatic Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Restart New Recording Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Timecode Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Special Digitizing Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Traces as Observed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Appending Recordings to Existing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

CHAPTER 6 Observer 6-1

Introduction to Observer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Other Ways to Start Observer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Scroll and Sweep Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
LookBack Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Moving Around the LookBack Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Changing Settings from the Channel Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Observer Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Measuring Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Recording to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Trace Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Automatic Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Push Button Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Placing Annotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Marking Hyperventilation Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Photic Stimulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Electrode Switching for Electrical Stimulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Reformatting Montages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Connecting to Other Recording Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Viewing the Recording Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Viewing the Recorder Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Generating Reports Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Recovering from System Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Exiting the Observer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Exiting the Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

CHAPTER 7 Observer and Reviewer Tools 7-1

Observer Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Digital Readout Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Stop Watch Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Time and Status Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Inline Pulse Oximeter Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Observer/Reviewer Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Displaying Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Observer/Reviewer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Time Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide iii

 Time Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Clip Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Applying Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
About Digital Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Creating Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Traces as Observed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Recording Traces as Observed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Viewing Traces as Observed in Reviewer . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Traces as Observed Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Traces as Observed Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Amplitude-Time Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Overlay Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Reviewer Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Duration Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Statistics Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Bookmark Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

CHAPTER 8 Reviewing Files 8-1

Starting the Reviewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Opening Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Read-Only Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Calibrating Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Reviewing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Moving Around the Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Scroll Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Goto Menu or Keyboard Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Automatic Pagination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Trace Drawing Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Splitting the Window into Two Panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Moving Around the Window Panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Changing the Read Status of Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Reformatting Montages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Copying Reformatting Montages to Reviewer . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Working with Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Viewing Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Finding Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Marking Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
About Event Groups and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Viewing Event Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Adding Names to an Event Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Deleting Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Defining Event Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Deleting Event Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Printing and Saving Selected Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Working with Selected Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Marking Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30

iv HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide

 Erasing Marked Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Finding Marked Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Printing EEG Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
PrintScreen Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Saving EEG Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Exporting Sections of Data to a Text File . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Viewing File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Reviewing Patient Analog Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Analog Video Synchronization Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Starting Analog Video Synchronization Mode . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Following Analog Video Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Show Analog Video at EEG Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Reviewing Stellate DOS Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Importing Montage Information from DOS Files . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Importing Events from DOS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Importing Calibration Factors from DOS Files . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Converting a DOS File into a HARMONIE File . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Converting a HARMONIE File into a DOS File . . . . . . . . . . 8-50

CHAPTER 9 File Management 9-1

Understanding the Database and Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Using the File Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Backing Up Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Assigning and Reviewing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Reassigning and Renaming Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Archiving Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Using DirectCD to Archive Files to CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Verifying the CD-ROM Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Deleting the Original Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Modifying the CD-ROM Volume Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Archiving to CD-ROM Without DirectCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Undo Archive Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
File Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Importing Files into the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Deleting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

CHAPTER 10 Processors 10-1

Introduction to Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Using Processors Online and Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
General Settings Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Activating, Configuring and Starting Processors. . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Scheduled Section Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Scheduled Section Processor Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Event Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Digital or Analog Trigger Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Digital or Analog Trigger Detection Methods. . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Method 1: Detection of Analog Triggers. . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide v

 Method 2 - Digital Triggers in List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Method 3 - Non-Zero Digital Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Digital or Analog Trigger Detector Parameters . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Configuring the Digital and Analog Trigger Detector . . . . . . . 10-19
Signal Averaging Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Signal Averaging Processor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

CHAPTER 11 DIVA 11-1

Introduction to Digital Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Digital Video File Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Hardware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Recording Digital Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
ATI Player and Matrox PC-VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
ATI Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
ATI Player - Button Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Matrox PC-VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Observing Recording Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Reviewing Digital Video Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Saving Digital Video Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Marking Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Saving Digital Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16

CHAPTER 12 Database Management 12-1

Backing up the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Exiting HARMONIE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Extracting and Merging the Mobile Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Performing Portable Recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Merge With Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Repairing the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Compacting the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Troubleshooting Volume Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Recovering Volume Information Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16

APPENDIX A Hardware Setup A-1

Screen Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Hardware Setup Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Setting Up the Recording Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Setting Up the Digital Input Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Setting Up the Digital Output Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Setting Up the Photic Stimulator Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Setting Up the Time Code Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Setting Up the PlayBack VCR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Setting Up the Digital Video Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Testing the Recording Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Testing the Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Testing the Photic Stimulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Enabling/Disabling the Digital Readout Display . . . . . . . . . . A-15

vi HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide

 Changing the Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
TCP/IP Network Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
About Observer and Network Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20

APPENDIX B BMSI Board B-1

Jumper Settings for BMSI-519 Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2

APPENDIX C National Instruments Boards C-1

National Instruments 64-ch A/D Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

APPENDIX D LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards D-1

Jumper Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
LA MONT HXAT-32 Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Push Button Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Push Button Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
LA MONT HXAT-32/64 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Cardinal-I Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
LA MONT EMERALD Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
LA MONT EMERALD PCMCIA Interface Cards . . . . . . . . D-12
LA MONT Patient Amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
LA MONT Amplifier Extension Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
LA MONT HXAT 32/64 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
Cardinal-I Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
Clock Polarity Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19
LA MONT WARATAH 128 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19
LA MONT EMERALD Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20
Setting Up the Host PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-21
Windows 95/98 Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-21
Configuring the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22
Amplifier Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-23
LA MONT WARATAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-23
Working with Mapping Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-24
LA MONT 2x32 and 4x32 Channel Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . D-29
About the G2 Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-33
Creating the Electrode Set and Recording Montage. . . . . . . . D-35
Electrode Set Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-36
Gain and Filter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-37

APPENDIX E Photic Stimulator E-1

PCI-6601 I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-2
PCI-6601 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-2
PCI-6601 Installation and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-3
PC-TIO-10 I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-4
PC-TIO-10 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-4

HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide vii

 Windows NT Hardware and Software Installation . . . . . . . . . E-5
Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Operating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Windows 95/98 Hardware and Software Installation . . . . . . . . E-6
Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Operating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
PC-TIO-10 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
HPS95 I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
Description of the Two Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
MODE 1: Computer Control of Flash Rate . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
MODE 2: Stimulator Control of Flash Rate . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
Connections for MODE 1: Computer Control of Flash Rate . . . . E-10
Connections for MODE 2: Stimulator Control of Flash Rate . . . . E-11
HPS95 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
Reset State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
Tracking State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
Compatibility Issues with Commercial Stimulators . . . . . . . . . E-13

APPENDIX F MULTIM Video Print Screen F-1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
RS-232 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Transmission Protocol During Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4

APPENDIX G Using HARMONIE with the EEG-2100 System G-1

Installing and Running the NK Configuration Program . . . . . . . . G-2
Reviewing EEG Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
Relabelling Electrode Names Using the NKMTG.CFG File . . . . G-3
Information Imported into the HARMONIE STS File . . . . . . . . G-5
“Referential” Montages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
“Sleep” Reformatted Montages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5

APPENDIX H BCD Time Code Generator and Reader H-1

Recording Workstation Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2
Configuring VCRs for 24-hour Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-4
Picture in Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-6
Recording/Reviewing Workstation Configuration. . . . . . . . . . H-7
Video Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-7

APPENDIX I Synthetic Data Generator I-1

Configuring the Synthetic Data Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-2

viii HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide

APPENDIX J Video Boards J-1
Optibase MovieMaker XPress PCI Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
Installation and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
Optibase MovieMaker 100S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-3
Installation and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-3
Darim MPEGator MPG1 Encoder Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-4
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-4
Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-5
Matrox G450eTV Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-6

HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide ix

x HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide
CHAPTER 1: Introduction

Welcome to Stellate HARMONIE.

HARMONIE is a software program that is intended to be used by qualified
physicians, clinical electroencephalographers, or EEG technologists with
special training in operating EEG systems.
Familiarity with the technical aspects of digital data recording, storage, and
retrieval is strongly recommended.
HARMONIE can be used:
• To assist in the scientific analysis of the electroencephalogram (EEG), in
the field of human and animal neurophysiology.
• To offer digital EEG recording through a personal computer, and PC based
data acquisition boards.
• To assist in selecting EEG sections of potential interest, and offer a variety
of display and review capabilities.
• To complement the conventional continuous EEG recording, not replace it.
The software does not judge the normality or abnormality of the displayed EEG,
or the results of an analysis. It is not intended for extended EEG monitoring
used in critical care or intraoperative settings. In no way is the software or its
function represented as being diagnostic.
When interpreting data, you must verify the information before using the results,
because data entries are not validated by HARMONIE (i.e. calibration signals,
montage channels, or patient information such as age, height, or weight).
HARMONIE’s graphical user interface is easy to use. Since the software runs
under Windows NT/2000, you also get the benefits of these popular
operating systems.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 1-1

Chapter 1: Introduction

Using this manual, you can learn how to use all of HARMONIE’s features.
Some of these features are:
• Integrated networking for remote station monitoring and network-wide
real-time access to the central database.
• Sampling rates that can be different for each channel.
• Flexible recording parameters (in both automatic and manual modes).
• A LookBack window during recording.
• Event marking during and after recording (with preprogrammed and
free-text annotations).
• Archiving of sections of a recording (or the complete recording).
• Montage reformatting and digital filtering during review.
• Analysis tools for reviewing specific sections of signals.
• High-speed and high-resolution printing.
Stellate Systems also provides powerful signal analysis with SENSA and
LUNA. These add-on modules are not described in this manual.

Using this Manual

The Stellate HARMONIE Reference Guide is organized into twelve chapters:
• Chapter 1 explains how the HARMONIE program, manual, and help
system can be used.
• Chapter 2 explains how to install the software needed to run HARMONIE.
• Chapter 3 introduces HARMONIE and describes the user interface.
• Chapter 4 introduces the database and the EEG files, and explains the
types of information stored in the database.
• Chapter 5 explains how to record EEG files.
• Chapter 6 explains how to use Observer to view and annotate ongoing
sessions.
• Chapter 7 explains how to use Observer and Reviewer tools.
• Chapter 8 explains the key concepts for managing database files.
• Chapter 8 explains how to review the stored EEG files using the reviewing
features.
• Chapter 10 explains how to use the processors online and offline.
• Chapter 11 explains how to use HARMONIE’s DIVA module for
recording, reviewing, and saving digital video files.
• Chapter 12 explains the key concepts for managing the database as you
use HARMONIE each day.

1-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Using this Manual

If you are learning how to use the software on a system that is already set up,
you can skip Chapter 2. Everyone should read Chapters 3 to 6, because the
database concepts are fundamental for the next two chapters. Users that
record EEG files do not necessarily review them (and vice versa), so you
should read Chapters 7 and 8 according to what you want to do in
HARMONIE. Read Chapter 9 if you want to use the Scheduled Section
Processor or any of the LUNA or SENSA processors. Read Chapter 10 for an
overview of the Digital Video features, including recording digital video,
monitoring digital video on screen, reviewing recorded digital video files,
and saving digital video.
While you use HARMONIE, you can always refer to this manual for
information. Shortcuts allow you to access the most recent releases of the
HARMONIE, LUNA, and SENSA manuals, which are in PDF format. You can
also access the context-sensitive help system when you need assistance with
specific tasks and topics.

Document Conventions
This manual uses several conventions to highlight text:

Style Usage
Bold Menu names and commands, and window titles,
buttons and options
Italics When a new term is introduced with its
definition

Symbols
Notes are used to emphasize fairly important information.

Warnings are used when you may damage equipment, or accidentally lose
important information.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 1-3

Chapter 1: Introduction

Terminology
The following table lists the terms used in this guide that relate to the mouse
and keyboard.

Term Action
Choose Use your mouse or a key combination to pick a
menu command that will begin an action in
HARMONIE.
Select Mark an item by highlighting it or by clicking it
with the mouse.
Click Quickly press and release the left mouse button.
Used to select options and commands in dialog
boxes and windows, and to access pull-down
menus.
Also used to select window and toolbar buttons.
Right-click Quickly press and release the right mouse button.
Used to access pop-up menus.
Double-click Click the left mouse twice in rapid succession.
Menu name > Select a command from a menu. For example,
Command name Window > Close would mean to open the
Window menu and choose the Close command.

Help System
The help system is a quick and convenient way to view information about a
task you are performing, or a feature you would like to know more about.
With the help system, you can:
• Locate a help topic in the Contents.
• Search for a word in the Index and then jump to a help topic (or list the
related topics).
• Use the Find feature to perform an extensive word-search of the Help
System.
In the Help window, you can view the help information and jump between
topics by clicking on a hyperlink:
• Click a Text Jump.
• Click a Text Popup.
• Click the Back button.

Starting the Help System

You can start the help system from any of the HARMONIE components (the
main HARMONIE database, Recorder, Observer, and Reviewer).

1-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Help System

To start the help Click Help in any dialog box.

system OR
Choose Help > Help Topics.
OR
Press the F1 key.

Using the Help Button or F1 Key

When you start the help system by clicking Help or pressing the F1 key, the
system will automatically display the online manual at the section connected
to the dialog box or window currently displayed. For more information about
using the Help window, see “Using the Help Window” on page 1-6.
When you start the help system from the Help menu, the help topics window
is displayed. From this window, you open a help topic using the Contents,
Index, or Find tabs.

To use the 1 Click the Contents tab to display help topics organized by category.
Contents

2 Double-click a book icon to see what topics (and other books) are in that
category.
You can also close a book by double-clicking it.
3 To see a topic, double-click the heading.
The selected topic displays in the help window.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 1-5

Chapter 1: Introduction

To use the Index 1 Click the Index tab to display the help index.

2 Enter the topic you are looking for, or scroll through the list of index
entries.
3 Select the index entry you want, then click Display.
A window displays the titles of the help topics associated with the selected
index entry.
4 To view a topic, double-click it.
The selected topic displays in the help window.
The first time you use the Find tab, you must use a Windows wizard to
generate a word list. Follow the wizard directions. The Find tab allows you to
perform an extensive word-search of the help system.

Using the Help Window

The topic you selected in the help topics window is displayed in the Help
window. This is where you view the help information.

1-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Help System

Figure 1.1 Help Window

You can return to the help topics window by clicking Help Topics. You can
also stay in the help window and jump between topics. There are three ways
to jump between topics:
1 Click a Text Jump: A word or phrase that is colored and underlined has a
related topic. If you click it, you jump to the topic.
2 Click a Text Popup: A word or phrase that is colored and dash-underlined
has a related topic. If you click it, the topic is displayed in small popup
window. Click it again to return to the original topic.
3 Click the Back button: The Help System keeps a list of the topics you have
looked at. If you click Back, you jump to the previous topic.

Help System Options

You can change several options in the Help window. When you click
Options, a popup menu displays:
• To add your own notes to a help topic, select Annotate.
• To copy help text (not graphics) to the Windows clipboard, select Copy.
• To print the current topic, select Print Topic. You can also print from the
help topics window.
• To change the font size in the Help window (Small, Normal, or Large),
select Font.
• To set the Help window to stay on top of all other windows, select Keep
Help On Top.
• To use Windows help colors instead of HARMONIE Help System colors,
select Use System Colors.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 1-7

Chapter 1: Introduction

Minimum System Requirements

Basic System: 166 MHz, 64 MB RAM, 16 bit color (1024x768)

System supporting Digital Video & Smooth Scrolling: 450 MHz, 8 MB

RAM Video Card, 128 MB RAM, 16 bit color (1024x768)

1-8 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

CHAPTER 2: Installation

This chapter describes how HARMONIE is installed. The following topics are
covered:
• Software Licenses and Hardware Keys
• Installing HARMONIE
• Installing the DAO Drivers
• Frequently Asked Questions

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 2-1

Chapter 2: Installation

Software Licenses and Hardware Keys

The hardware key is programmed to allow access to HARMONIE according
to the software license. Access rights are determined by the following
settings:
• The software that is accessible: HARMONIE can run alone, or in
combination with SENSA, LUNA, and DIVA.
• The maximum number of EEG channels that can be recorded: 16, 32, 64, or
128.
• Software licenses for 16, 32, and 64 channels contain 4 additional input
channels that can be used. Therefore, if you have a 16-ch license, 16 EEG
and 4 input channels are available. Typically, the 4 input channels are used
as photic or pressure channels for EEG studies, or as pressure, body
position, SpO2, or heart rate channels for sleep studies.
• Full/Reader license: A full license permits recording and reviewing. A
reader license permits reviewing only.
A parallel or USB Sentinel SuperPro hardware key is issued with your
software license. Each key is labelled with the corresponding software license
number.
For example, a key is labelled Lic. No. H+S+L+V 1234 (64 Ch). This means that
license number 1234 allows you to run HARMONIE, SENSA, LUNA, and
DIVA, and record up to 64 channels. A key labelled Lic. No. H+S+L 1235 (32
Ch) R allows you to review HARMONIE, SENSA, and LUNA files with up to
32 channels.

Installing the Hardware Key

HARMONIE only operates when the hardware key is attached to your
computer.
HARMONIE must be installed before the USB key is installed.

To install the 1 Install the hardware key on the computer parallel printer port (e.g. LPT1).
parallel hardware (The pin side of the key is inserted into the port).
key 2 If a printer is connected to the port, install the key between the port and
the printer cable. The key does not interfere with normal printer operation.
3 If the computer has two parallel printer ports, you should install the key
and the printer cable on separate ports. For example, you can install the
key on LPT1 and the printer cable on LPT2.

To install the USB 1 Install the hardware key on the USB port.
hardware key The Found New Hardware dialog box displays.
2 Click Finish, then click Yes at the dialog boxes that display.
The installation is finished and the computer restarts.

2-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Installing HARMONIE

Installing HARMONIE
To install HARMONIE, you require:
• Stellate HARMONIE CD-ROM
• Hardware key
• Microsoft Office 97/2000 Standard or Professional Edition (to generate
reports).
If necessary, you can copy the HARMONIE installation files to floppy disks. To do
this, run the HARMDISK batch file from a DOS session. For details, see the
Readme.txt file on the Stellate HARMONIE CD-ROM.
The Stellate HARMONIE CD-ROM includes all HARMONIE, SENSA,
LUNA, and DIVA files, the Data Access Objects (DAO) drivers, all available
SDKs, and Microsoft Media Player. It is used for all types of HARMONIE
installations.
The installation should be done in the following order.
1 If you are installing HARMONIE on Windows NT, you must log on as
Administrator.
2 Install the hardware key on the parallel printer port.
3 For more information, see“Installing the Hardware Key” on page 2-2.
4 Install Microsoft Office 97/2000 with the Microsoft Word and Excel
components. (The Typical Install option will install these components).
5 Install the DAO drivers from the Stellate HARMONIE CD-ROM.
See “To install the DAO drivers:” on page 2-8.
6 Install the HARMONIE files.
See “To install the HARMONIE files” on page 2-3.
7 Restart the computer.
Microsoft Office 97/2000 is required for generating reports. HARMONIE reports
require Microsoft Word, and LUNA reports require Microsoft Word and Excel.
Microsoft MediaPlayer and Internet Explorer 4.0 (or higher) are required for
reviewing digital video files.

If you are upgrading from a previous version of HARMONIE, read the Stellate
Upgrading Instructions document before installing HARMONIE.

To install the 1 Exit all Windows programs before running the Setup program.
HARMONIE files 2 Insert the Stellate HARMONIE CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
3 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Run.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 2-3

Chapter 2: Installation

4 The Run window displays.

5 To start the Setup program, type e:\HARMONIE\disk1\setup in the Open

box.
(Your CD-ROM drive may be assigned a letter other than e).
6 Click OK.
The Setup window displays.

The Welcome window displays.

7 Click Next.
If a version of HARMONIE is installed on your computer, the message,
“Setup has detected an installed version of HARMONIE. It must be
removed in order to proceed with this new installation. Do you want to
continue?”
8 Click Yes to continue the installation.
The Choose Destination Location window displays.
This manual assumes that HARMONIE is installed in the default folder,
C:\HARMONIE. (Your hard disk drive may be assigned a letter other than
c).
9 Click Next.

2-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Installing HARMONIE

The Select Components window displays.

10 You can safely select all five components, although the last two
components are only required if you intend to read files recorded by BMSI
or Nihon-Kohden digital EEG recording equipment.
For more information, see “Selecting HARMONIE Components” on
page 2-6.
11 Click Next.
The Start Copying Files window displays.
12 Click Next.
After the HARMONIE files are copied to your hard disk drive, the Setup
Complete window displays. Before you can use HARMONIE, you must
restart your computer.
13 Click Finish.
The Stellate HARMONIE program group is added to the Programs folder
of the Windows Start menu.
For more information, see Chapter 3, “HARMONIE Basics”.

To install the 1 Exit all Windows programs before running the Setup program.
HARMONIE 2 Insert the Stellate HARMONIE CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
manuals 3 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Run.
4 The Run window displays.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 2-5

Chapter 2: Installation

5 To start the Setup program, type e:\manuals\disk1\setup in the Open box.

(Your CD-ROM drive may be assigned a letter other than e).
6 Click OK.
The Setup window displays.

The Welcome window displays.

7 Click Next.
If a version of any HARMONIE manual is installed on your computer, the
message, “Setup has detected an installed version of the Stellate
HARMONIE Manuals. It should be removed in order to proceed with this
new installation. Do you want to continue?”
8 Click Yes to continue the installation.
The message, “Are you sure you want to completely remove ‘Stellate
HARMONIE Manuals’ and all of its components?”
9 Click Yes to remove the installed manual(s).
OR
Click No if you want to have both versions of the manuals.
The Choose Destination Location window displays.
This manual assumes that the HARMONIE manuals are installed in the
default folder, C:\HARMONIE\MANUALS. (Your hard disk drive may
be assigned a letter other than c).
10 Click Next.
The Start Copying Files window displays.
11 Click Next.
After the files are copied to your hard disk drive, the Setup Complete
window displays.
12 Click Finish.
Manuals is added to the Stellate HARMONIE program group in the
Programs folder of the Windows Start menu.

Selecting HARMONIE Components

All HARMONIE files are installed with every installation. The Select
Components window only controls the shortcuts that are added to the
Stellate HARMONIE program group.

2-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Installing HARMONIE

During the installation, you can safely select all five components.
The five HARMONIE components are:
• LUNA module
• SENSA module
• RHYTHM and MONITOR Configuration program
• Nihon Kohden Configuration program
• BMSI Configuration program
If you select all of the components, you can delete unused shortcuts from the
program group later. If you clear components, you can create the shortcuts
later. For more information, see “Desktop Shortcuts” on page 3-2.
For example, your computer has an H+L hardware key, so you cannot use
SENSA features. You do not have EEG files recorded with the Rhythm,
Monitor, Nihon Kohden or Nicolet BMSI 3000/4000/5000 programs. In this
case, the only component you need to select is LUNA module. After you
install HARMONIE, the following shortcuts will be in the Stellate
HARMONIE program group:
• BMSI Configuration
• CSA Reviewer
• Extract from Master
• Hardware Setup
• HARMONIE
• Merge with Master
• Nihon Kohden Configuration
• Observer
• PrintScreen Utility
• Recover
• Reviewer
• RHYTHM and MONITOR Configuration
• Spectra
• Temporal Distribution
• Trends
RHYTHYM and MONITOR are Stellate Systems DOS programs. For more
information, see “Reviewing Stellate DOS Files” on page 8-46.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 2-7

Chapter 2: Installation

Installing the DAO Drivers

Data Access Objects (DAO) drivers are programs that handle database
functions. The drivers must be installed with the Microsoft Jet components.
Microsoft Jet is a database management system that stores and retrieves data
in HARMONIE’s Microsoft Access database.
You do not have to install Microsoft Access to run HARMONIE.

To install the DAO 1 Exit all Windows programs before running the Setup program.
drivers: 2 Insert the Stellate HARMONIE CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
3 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Run.
The Run dialog box displays.

4 To start the Setup program, enter e:\dao\disk1\setup in the Open box.

5 (Your CD-ROM drive may be assigned a letter other than e).
6 Click OK.
The DAO Setup window displays.

7 Click Next.
The Select Components window displays.
8 Select only the Jet 3.5 check box, then click Next.

2-8 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Frequently Asked Questions

Another Select Components window displays.

9 Do not select any optional components. Click Next.
10 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.
11 When all of the files are copied, the Information window displays the
message, “Data Access Objects (DAO) successfully installed”.
12 Click OK.

Frequently Asked Questions

1 I am upgrading from a previous version of HARMONIE. Do I automatically get
SENSA, LUNA, and DIVA?
Although the SENSA, LUNA, and DIVA files are included on the Stellate
HARMONIE CD-ROM, you cannot use these add-on modules unless they
are included in your HARMONIE software license. For more information,
see “Software Licenses and Hardware Keys” on page 2-2.
2 Can I install SENSA, LUNA, or DIVA without installing HARMONIE?
No, the Setup program always installs HARMONIE.
3 Should I install the hardware key before the software?
You should install the key before you install the software so that you do
not forget to do it afterwards. However, the Setup program does not
require the hardware key.
4 What happens if the hardware key is removed while HARMONIE is running?
When you start HARMONIE, the program checks that the hardware key is
installed. Then, it checks every five minutes to ensure that the key is still
there. If the hardware key is removed while HARMONIE is running, a
warning is displayed and then the program is stopped.
For example, if the key is removed while Recorder is running, a warning is
displayed at the end of the five minute interval. Before the Recorder stops,
the EEG file (i.e. the EEG signals up to the end of the interval) is registered
in the database.
5 When I install HARMONIE, does the Setup program affect my database?
All of the program files are stored in the C:\HARMONIE folder. Since the
database is usually stored in the C:\HarmDb folder, the database is not
affected by the installation. (Usually, the C:\HarmEEG folder stores the
EEG files, so the installation does not affect your recordings either).
6 Is there any difference between the procedure for upgrading to a new version of
HARMONIE and installing HARMONIE for the first time?
The basic installation of HARMONIE is the same in both cases. However,
after you upgrade, certain HARMONIE settings are cleared. It is important
that you refer to the Upgrading Instructions document before upgrading
to a new version of HARMONIE, since this document contains
information about the settings, filters, customized reports, etc.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 2-9

Chapter 2: Installation

For more information on configuring your system, see Appendix A,

“Hardware Setup”.

2-10 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

CHAPTER 3: HARMONIE Basics

This chapter introduces you to HARMONIE, and describes the user interface.
This chapter covers:
• Starting HARMONIE
• Desktop Shortcuts
• HARMONIE Window
• HARMONIE Views
• Storage Status Types
• HARMONIE Overview

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 3-1

Chapter 3: HARMONIE Basics

Starting HARMONIE
After you install HARMONIE and restart your computer, you can start the
HARMONIE program.

To start 1 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Programs > Stellate HARMONIE
HARMONIE > HARMONIE.
2 The first time you start HARMONIE after the program is installed, you
must open the existing database because its location is unknown.
Subsequently, the program automatically connects to the database that
was used during the previous session.
At the Open dialog box, locate the database and click Open. (The database
is usually stored in the HarmDb folder on the central workstation).
If there is no database, create a new one. See “Creating the Database” on
page 4-4.
The HARMONIE window displays.
You work with the database from the HARMONIE window. The four
standard functions in HARMONIE are: Recorder, Observer, Reviewer, and
Hardware Setup. These functions can be started from the HARMONIE
window.
After you start the HARMONIE program, a button appears on the taskbar. To
switch from one running program to another, click its taskbar button.

Desktop Shortcuts
You can place a shortcut to HARMONIE, or one of the HARMONIE functions
on the desktop. Shortcuts are quick ways to get to the items you use often.
If you deselected components during the installation, the corresponding
shortcuts are not in the Stellate HARMONIE program group. In this case, you can
create the shortcut from the program in the C:\HARMONIE folder.

To create a 1 Use My Computer or Windows Explorer to display the Stellate

shortcut on the HARMONIE program group.
desktop Go to one of the following locations:
[Windows] C:\Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Stellate HARMONIE.
[WinNT] C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Start Menu\Stellate
HARMONIE.
2 Select the item you want to create a shortcut for.
3 Choose File > Create Shortcut.

3-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 HARMONIE Window

4 Drag the shortcut icon onto the desktop.

To delete a Drag the shortcut to the Recycle Bin.

shortcut The original file will still exist on the disk where it is stored.

HARMONIE Window
From the HARMONIE window:
• Information in the database can be viewed and modified.
• There are database functions for backing up, assigning, reviewing,
archiving, and verifying files.
• A recording session can be started using Recorder.
• You can observe ongoing recording sessions with Observer.
• You can review files using Reviewer.
• Your recording device can be configured using Hardware Setup.
You work with the database directly from the HARMONIE window. Specific
toolbars display according to the view being displayed. The only toolbars that
are available in every view are the Main View and File View toolbars. The
Patient toolbar (Patient view), Staff toolbar (Staff view), Volume toolbar
(Volume view), and the Montages toolbar (Montages view) are only available
in specific views.
While a file is being recorded, it is displayed in the database. The file type is
“REC”, the icon is red, and the size is 0 Bytes to indicate the recording status.
While recording, the file cannot be deleted or opened, and the current status
cannot be changed.
Two customizable user views are available. These views can be designed
using the View Design wizard. This wizard enables you to select and set file

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 3-3

Chapter 3: HARMONIE Basics

filters, show/hide columns in the file list, and show/hide the report and
statistics lists.
The other four functions (Recorder, Observer, Reviewer, and Hardware Setup)
open their own windows. Each of these windows has different menus and
toolbars.

Toolbars
Toolbars make working with HARMONIE easier and faster. They contain
buttons you can use to execute commands found in the menus.
You can control whether to display a toolbar. If you display a toolbar, you can
choose where to display it.

To display a Choose a toolbar from the View menu.

toolbar in A check mark appears next to the name when the toolbar is displayed.
HARMONIE Since the Observer includes ten toolbars, their names are listed in the Toolbar
List dialog box instead of the View menu. Therefore, the steps to display a
toolbar are different.

To display a 1 Choose View > Select Toolbars.

toolbar in The Toolbar List dialog box displays.
Observer

2 Select the appropriate check boxes.

3 Click OK.
The toolbar(s) is displayed in the Observer window.
The Hypnogram toolbar can only be used if your software license includes the
LUNA add-on module.
By default, toolbars are displayed below the menus (as fixed toolbars). You
can change how they are arranged, or move them elsewhere in the window
(as floating toolbars) to suit your working habits. For example, you may want
to arrange them next to each other in one row to maximize screen space.
When the new location is not on an edge of the window, it becomes a floating
toolbar. Fixed toolbars do not overlap–if the new location is over another
toolbar, they are automatically arranged next to each other. Similarly, floating
toolbars are joined together when they overlap.

3-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 HARMONIE Views

The Status Bar is not a toolbar; it is the area at the bottom of the window that
provides status information.

To move a toolbar Click anywhere on the toolbar’s background (not on the buttons) and drag it
to a new location. On a floating toolbar, you can also click the title bar and
drag it.

To change from a Double-click anywhere on the toolbar’s background (not on the buttons) to
fixed to a floating switch between its fixed and floating positions.
toolbar

HARMONIE Views
A view shows a type of information from the database. In the HARMONIE
window, there are four views that can be displayed in various formats:
• Patients (in List, Detail, Montages, or Files/Reports format)
• Staff (in List, Detail, or Files/Reports format)
• Volumes (in List or Files/Reports format)
• Global Montages
These views contain the global toolbars and a specific toolbar.
The Patients, Staff and Volumes views can be displayed in List or Files/
Reports format. For example, you can display a list of all staff members. The
Files/Reports format displays the files and reports specific to the selected
patient, staff member, or volume. You can also display a list of all volumes, or
the EEG files belonging to one specific volume.
The Patients and Staff views can also be displayed in Detail format. This
format displays the demographic information of one specific person.
In addition, the Patients view can be displayed in Montages format. This
format displays the electrode sets and montages specific to the selected
patient.
In all of the file views, columns can be shown/hidden or sorted in ascending/
descending order by choosing a command from the View menu, or by right-
clicking the column header and choosing a command from the menu that
appears. Columns can also be resized and moved around. Right-clicking on a
file, report, or statistic entry displays a popup menu. The reports and statistics
of a selected file are displayed in the Reports and Statistics lists, below the File
list.
When resizing columns, make sure that your cursor is a single bar, not a double
bar. A double bar cursor shows a hidden column, while a single bar cursor
widens a column.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 3-5

Chapter 3: HARMONIE Basics

Filters in the file views can affect the information that is displayed. When the
display differs from what you expect to see, verify the view you are in. Also,
make sure that the file filters are set to the appropriate variables and then
click Apply.

Patients View
The Patients view can be displayed in List, Detail, Montages, or Files/Reports
format.

Patients View in List Format

The Patients View in List format contains a list of all the patients in the
database. You can sort the list to view the patients by name or ID.
• From this list you can access information about a particular patient
(displayed in the Patient Files/Reports view) by double-clicking the
patient’s name.
• You can start a recording for a patient by selecting their name from the list,
and choosing Start > Recorder, or clicking Record.
• To create a new patient in the database, you can double-click the gray bar
at the bottom of the patient list.

3-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 HARMONIE Views

Patients View in Files/Reports Format

The Patients view in Files/Reports format contains a list of all the files in the
database that are related to the patient. These include EEG files, spectral files,
and digital video files. The type, size, date, and location of each file is
indicated.
When a file is being recorded, its file type is REC, the icon is red, and the size
is 0 Bytes. During recording, the file cannot be deleted or opened, and the
current status cannot be changed.
When a file is selected, a list of any reports and statistics linked to that file
appears below.
You can open a file in Reviewer by double-clicking it. To open a file in a
specific function (Reviewer, Temporal Distribution, Compressed Spectral
Array, Spectra, or Trends), select the file, then choose the function from the
Start menu. Only functions that are appropriate to the selected file are
enabled.
Right-clicking on a file name opens a popup menu. You can choose Open,
Delete, or Properties from this menu. Right-clicking on a report or statistics
name also opens a popup menu. You can choose New, Edit, Delete, or
Properties from this menu.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 3-7

Chapter 3: HARMONIE Basics

To sort files in 1 In the HARMONIE window, show the Patients or Staff view in Files/
ascending/ Reports format.
descending order 2 Right-click any column header, and choose Sort Ascending or Sort
Descending from the popup menu.
OR

Click on any column header. If the files are in ascending order, they will be
sorted in descending order and the arrow will appear beside the title. If


the files are in descending order, they will be sorted in ascending order
and the arrow will appear.

To show/hide 1 In the HARMONIE window, show the Patients or Staff view in Files/
columns Reports format.
2 To hide a column, right-click on a column header, and choose Hide
Column from the popup menu.
OR
Choose View > Show/Hide Columns, and select a column name that has a
check mark beside it. (Displayed columns have check marks beside them).
3 To show a column, right-click on any column header. Choose Show
Columns and select from the menu that appears. (The menu only lists
hidden columns).
OR
Choose View > Show/Hide Columns, and select a column name that does
not have a check mark beside it. (Hidden columns do not have check
marks beside them).
The default view does not show the backup files, although you can configure
a filter to show the backup files.

3-8 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 HARMONIE Views

Patients View in Detail Format

The Patients view in Detail format contains personal information about the
patient, including their full name, address, telephone numbers, date of birth,
ID numbers, sex, height and weight, doctor’s name, and additional
comments.

Patients View in Montages Format

The Patients view in Montages format contains information about a particular
patient in the database. It shows the patient’s name, date of birth, ID number,
and sex.
It lists the patient-specific electrode sets, recording montages, and
reformatting montages for a particular patient.
You can create new patient-specific electrode sets, recording montages, and
reformatting montages by double-clicking the gray bar at the bottom of the
respective lists.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 3-9

Chapter 3: HARMONIE Basics

To edit a patient specific electrode set, recording montage, or reformatting

montage, double-click it.

Staff View
The Staff view can be displayed in List, Detail, or Files/Reports format.

Staff View in List Format

The Staff view in List format contains a list of all staff in the database.
From this list you can access information about a particular staff member
(displayed in the Staff Detail view), by double-clicking the name of the staff
member.

3-10 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 HARMONIE Views

To add a new staff member to the database, you can double-click the gray bar
at the bottom of the patient list.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 3-11

Chapter 3: HARMONIE Basics

Staff View in Files/Reports Format

The Staff view in Files/Reports format contains a list of all files assigned to a
particular staff member (this includes “Read” and “Unread” files).

3-12 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 HARMONIE Views

Staff View in Detail Format

The Staff view in Detail format contains detailed information about the staff
member, including staff ID, full name, profession, institution, telephone and
fax numbers, network ID, and additional comments.

Volumes View
The Volumes view can be displayed in List or Files/Reports format.

Volumes View in List Format

The Volumes view in List format contains a list of all existing volumes for the
current database.
You can modify information about an existing volume.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 3-13

Chapter 3: HARMONIE Basics

To create a new volume, double-click the gray bar at the bottom of the list, or
click New.

Volumes View in Files/Reports Format

The Volumes view in Files/Reports format contains a list of all the files in the
database that are stored on this volume. These include EEG files, spectral
files, and digital video files. The type, size, date, and location of each file is
indicated.
When a file is being recorded, its file type is REC, the icon is red, and the size
is 0 Bytes. During recording, the file cannot be deleted or opened, and the
current status cannot be changed.
When a file is selected, a list of any reports and statistics linked to that file
appears below.
You can open a file in Reviewer by double-clicking it. To open a file in a
specific function (Reviewer, Temporal Distribution, Compressed Spectral
Array, Spectra, or Trends), select the file, then choose the function from the
Start menu. Only functions that are appropriate to the selected file are
enabled.

3-14 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 HARMONIE Views

Right-clicking on a file name opens a popup menu. You can choose Open,
Properties, Delete, or Start from this menu. Right-clicking on a report or
statistics name also opens a popup menu. You can choose New, Edit, Delete,
or Properties from this menu.

Global Montages View

A global recording montage can be used to record any patient while a patient-
specific recording montage can only be used for recording one specific
patient.
You work with global electrode sets, recording montages and reformatting
montages in the Global Montages view (shown below). The Patients view in
Montages format looks very similar.
A recording montage is always linked to its electrode set. When you select an
electrode set in the Electrode Sets box, the linked recording montages are
listed in the Recording Montages box.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 3-15

Chapter 3: HARMONIE Basics

A reformatting montage is always linked to its recording montage. When you

select a recording montage in the Recording Montages box, the linked
reformatting montages are listed in the Reformatting Montages box.

File Views
Seven file views are accessible from the HARMONIE window. Five of the
views are used for performing various database functions:
• Files to Backup
• Files to Assign
• Files to Review
• Files to Archive
• Files to Verify
Two of the views are customizable file views:
• User Defined View 1
• User Defined View 2

Files to Backup View

In the Files to Backup view, you can list all files to be backed up, and perform
the backup operation.

3-16 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 HARMONIE Views

Files to Assign View

In the Files to Assign view, you can list all of the files to be assigned, and
assign a file to a specific staff member for reading.

Files to Review View

In the Files to Review view, staff members can list all of the files assigned to
them, and remove them from the list after the interpretation.
Unread files that have been assigned to a staff member are displayed in this
view.

Files to Archive View

In the Files to Archive view, you can list all files to be archived, and perform
the archiving operation.

Files to Verify View

In the Files to Verify view, you can list all archived files, perform the
verification, remove archive status if archiving has not been successful, and
delete files that have been backed up.

User Defined Views 1 and 2

Each of these customizable user views can be designed using the View Design
wizard.
User Defined View 1 and 2 contain the complete list of patient files for the
current database. When a file is selected, a list of any reports and statistics
linked to that file appears below.
User Defined View 2 also contains filters (Type, Volume, Date, Assign To,
Storage Status, and Read Status) and functions (Record, Append, Backup,
Assign, Review, Verify, Archive, Delete Backup, and Undo Archive) above
the file list.
Customized file views can be defined by modifying the view settings
(changing the view name, adding filters and buttons, and showing/hiding
columns in the file list).

Showing Different Views

To show a view, select the type of view (i.e. Patients, Staff, Volumes, or Global
Montages) and the format (i.e. List, Detail, Montages, or Files/Reports) from
the view specific toolbar or the Show menu. In the Show menu, a check mark
will appear next to the type and format selected.

To show a 1 In the HARMONIE window, click Patients, Staff, Volumes, or Global

different view Montages on the Main View toolbar.
OR
Choose a view from the Show menu.
Selecting a format

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 3-17

Chapter 3: HARMONIE Basics

2 Click a button corresponding to the appropriate format on the view

specific toolbar.
(For example, to show the List format, click List on the Patient, Staff, or
Volume toolbar).
OR
Choose a format from the Show menu.
3 There are two shortcuts for changing formats:
• If you are showing the Patients view in List format, you can double-
click a patient entry to change to Files/Reports format. This format
shows only the files and reports specific to the selected patient.
• If you are showing the Volumes view in List format, you can double-
click a volume entry to change to Detail format. This view lists the EEG
files that belong to the selected volume.
There are many ways to view the information contained in the HARMONIE
database. Some views can be displayed in more than one format. For the
Patients, Staff and Volumes views, you need to start with the List format, select a
specific entry and then select a different format. You cannot change the format
of the Global Montages view.

To refresh the data in a view, choose View > Refresh. For example, new data from
another HARMONIE workstation may display.
If you want all of the views to automatically refresh when there is new data,
choose Options > Auto Refresh Views.

Customizing the Views

The View Design wizard can be used to customize an existing file view. You
can change the view name, select filters and buttons, show/hide columns in
the file list, and show/hide the report and statistic lists.

To use the View 1 In HARMONIE, choose Options > Design File Views.
Design wizard The File View Design – Step 1 window displays.
2 Select a view from the Select the view that you want to modify list.
The name of the view is shown in the View description text box. The User
Defined View names can be changed by entering a new name in the View
description text box.
3 Click Next.
The File View Design – Step 2 window displays.
4 You can specify the filters that you want to display in the view.
5 To add a filter, select it from the Filters to select box and click Add. The
filter will move to the Selected filters box.
6 To remove a filter, select it from the Selected filters box and click Remove.

3-18 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 HARMONIE Views

7 To move a filter up or down in the Selected filters box, select it and click
Move Up or Move Down.
8 To change the filter name, select the filter from the Selected filters box and
click Edit. In the Filter Title dialog box that opens, enter the new title and
click OK.
9 Click Next.
The File View Design – Step 3 window displays.
10 Select and set the filters that you want to apply to the view (e.g. Read
Status is filtered for Unread files).
11 To add a filter, select it from the Filters to select list and click Add. The
filter will move to the Selected filters list.
12 To set a filter, select it from the Selected sections box and click Edit. The
Edit Filter window opens, showing the filter name in the Filter
Description box.
Select a filter parameter from the list.
13 To remove a selected filter, select it from the Selected filters box and click
Remove.
14 Click Next.
The File View Design – Step 4 window displays.
15 You can select the command buttons that will be displayed in your view,
and edit the button names.
16 To add a button to the view, select it from the Actions to select box and
click Add. The button will move to the Selected actions box.
17 To remove a button, select it from the Selected actions box and click
Remove.
18 To move a button up or down in the Selected actions box, click Move Up
or Move Down.
19 To change the button name, select it from the Selected actions box and
click Edit.
At the Action Title window that opens, enter the new button name and
click OK.
20 Click Next.
The File View Design – Step 5 window displays.
21 You can select the columns that will display in the file list. You can also
show or hide the report and statistics lists in the view.
• To show a column, select the corresponding check box.
• To hide a column, clear the corresponding check box.
• To show the report and statistics lists, select the Show Reports and
Statistics check box.
22 Click Finish.
The user view will reflect the settings you specified.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 3-19

Chapter 3: HARMONIE Basics

Storage Status Types

In HARMONIE, There are four storage status types:
• Master File
• Backup of Master
• Archive
• Backup of Archive

Master File
A file with the status “Master File” is the file that has been recorded and is
ready for review. This is the official working file.
After the file has been reviewed, its read status changes from “Unread” to
“Read”.
After the file has been read, it is ready to be archived to CD-ROM.

Backup of Master
At the time of recording, or at a subsequent time, a file can be backed up. A
backup file has the status “Backup of Master”
A backup file is never reviewed or archived. It is kept in case a Master File is
damaged or destroyed.
If a Master File is lost, the status of the backup file can be changed from
“Backup of Master” to “Master File”, and becomes the working file. Another
backup can be made from this file.

Archive
After reviewing is completed, a file can be saved/archived onto a CD-ROM or
another volume.
During archiving, a file is physically copied to a medium, and is given the
status “Archive”.
You never work directly on the “Archive” file.

Backup of Archive
After a file is archived, the original file (Master File) becomes the “Backup of
Archive” file.
Use the Verify function to check that the “Archive” file is readable.
• If the file is readable, you can delete the “Backup of Archive” file using the
Delete Backup function.
• If the file is unreadable, discard it and use the Undo Archive function to
change the “Backup of Archive” file back to the “Master File”. Then
archive the file again.

3-20 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Storage Status Types

Figure 3.1 File Storage Status

Start Recording
The recorded file is created on a database
MASTER FILE volume. E.g. Drive D on Record1 (Rec1-D).
on Rec1-D This Master File is the official working file, that
is ready for review.

Transfer Master and Create Backup

At the end of the recording, the file is copied to
MASTER FILE Rev1-E. This copy is the new "Master File" (it is
on Rev1-E the file that will be interpreted and archived).
The status of the original file on Rec1-D is
BACKUP OF MASTER changed to "Backup of Master". It will only be
on Rec1-D used if the Master file on Rev1-E is corrupted or
lost.

Assign and Review

A Master File can be assigned to a staff
"READ" MASTER FILE member for reading at the time of recording, or
on Rev1-E at a later time. After the staff member reviews
the file, its read status becomes "Read". The file
remains on Rev1-E.

Archive
A reviewed Master File can be archived to a
BACKUP OF ARCHIVE medium such as CD. When this file is archived,
on Rev1-E it is copied to the storage device.
-The original file on Rev1-E, becomes the
ARCHIVE FILE Backup of Archive file.
on CD-ROM number -The copy on the CD becomes the Archive File,
CD00_001 e.g. #CD00_001.

Verify
After archiving, verify that the Archive File on
CD00_001 is readable.
ARCHIVE FILE -If the file is readable, delete the Backup of
on CD00_001 Archive file on Rev1-E.
-If the file is unreadable, use the Undo Archive
feature to change the Backup of Archive file back
to Master File. Then archive the file again.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 3-21

Chapter 3: HARMONIE Basics

HARMONIE Overview
The diagram below outlines the steps to follow when using HARMONIE to
record, review, and archive files.
Figure 3.2 HARMONIE Overview

ON NETWORK OFF NETWORK

Run Extract from

Master

Enter Database

Find Existing
Create New Patient
Patient

Start Recording File

Use Existing
Set Up Template
Template

Observe Recording

End Recording

Back up File
OFF NETWORK

Run Merge with

Master

Assign and Review

File

Archive and Verify

File

3-22 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

CHAPTER 4: Setting Up the Database

This chapter introduces you to the HARMONIE database and EEG files. Since
the database is usually shared on a network, all workstations must be able to
access it. The EEG files can be stored on various devices on the network. Each
drive must be accessible on the network, and each drive must be given a
volume name in HARMONIE.
Setting up the database also means entering the information that is required
to make an EEG recording. This includes at least one patient, an electrode set,
and a recording montage.
This chapter covers:
• Introduction to the Database
• Setting Up a Central Database on the Network
• Creating the Database
• Working with Files and Volumes
• Adding Patients and Staff to the Database
• Finding Patients
• Creating Electrode Sets and Montages

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 4-1

Chapter 4: Setting Up the Database

Introduction to the Database

HARMONIE uses a Microsoft Access database to store patient, staff,
montage, and recording data. Although the database contains information
about your EEG recordings, the actual EEG data are stored in separate files.
For more information, see “Working with Files and Volumes” on page 4-6.

Database

HARMONIE

EEG Files

HARMONIE uses one database at a time. When one database is shared by

several workstations on the same network, each workstation has access to the
same data.

Workstation 1

Workstation 2 Database Workstation 3

Workstation 4

Stellate Systems does not recommend using multiple databases within the same
institution. Although it is possible to create a number of distinct databases,
patients and montages defined in one database cannot be accessed from
another database.

If you are using the database while the station containing the central database is
restarted, an assertion failure message will display. Exit HARMONIE, and then
start the program again.

Setting up a Central Database on the Network

Your network must be configured to share a common database.
You can skip this section if your computer is not connected to a Windows-
compatible network.

A Windows workstation is probably not connected to the network if you cannot

see the Network Neighborhood icon on the desktop. When in doubt, ask your
network administrator for instructions.

4-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Setting up a Central Database on the Network

The database is set up on one computer in the network. We call this the central
workstation. The other computers that access the database are called remote
workstations.

Central Workstation Remote Workstation

Drive C: Drive C:

HARMONIE HARMONIE

Drive D:

Database

In this example, two HARMONIE workstations are connected, and the

database is stored on the central workstation’s Drive D.
On the central workstation, you need to:
• Configure the computer to share its files.
• Allow the database drive to be accessed by the remote workstations.
After these procedures are completed, you will be able to connect to the
central workstation database while using HARMONIE on a remote
workstation.

Configuring the Central Workstation

To enable file 1 Double-click the Network Neighborhood icon on the desktop.
sharing on a The Network dialog box displays.
computer 2 Click the Access Control tab.
3 Select Share-level access control.
4 Click OK.
5 Restart the computer for the new settings to take effect.
If you have two drives, set full access rights for the drive where the central
database is stored. Set read-only rights for the drive where the applications
and operating system are stored.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 4-3

Chapter 4: Setting Up the Database

To allow full 1 Double-click the My Computer icon on the desktop.

access to a drive 2 Select the icon for the drive where the central database is stored (e.g. Drive
D).
3 Choose File > Sharing.
4 Select Shared As, then enter a name in the Share Name box.
(Maximum 12 characters, e.g. “CentralDrive”).
5 Under Access Type, select Full.
6 Click OK.

To allow read-only 1 Double-click the My Computer icon on the desktop.

access to a drive 2 Select the icon for the drive where the applications are stored (e.g. Drive
C).
3 Choose File > Sharing.
4 Select Shared As, then enter a name in the Share Name box.
(Maximum 12 characters, e.g. “CentralDrive”).
5 Under Access Type, select Read-Only.
6 Click OK.
The Drive D (D:) icon in the My Computer window now appears on a serving
hand to indicate that the drive is shared and its files can be accessed by remote
workstations.

Creating the Database

The first time you start HARMONIE after installation, the HARMONIE
database window displays without an open database. You must create a
database for your institution before you can proceed.
Subsequently, the program automatically connects to the database that was
used during the previous session.
If you already have a database and want to create another one, you must first
close the open database.
Stellate Systems does not recommend using multiple databases within the same
institution. It is possible to create a number of distinct databases, but patients
and montages defined in one database cannot be accessed from another
database.

You can skip this section if the HARMONIE window displays when you start the
HARMONIE program. (You do not need to create a new database).

4-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating the Database

To create a 1 Start Windows Explorer.

database 2 Open your HARMONIE folder and double-click CreateDB.exe.
The Create New HARMONIE Database dialog box displays.

3 Enter a name in the Set Institution Name box.

4 Click OK.
The Save As dialog box displays.
5 Enter a filename for the new database (or accept the proposed name). You
can specify a different path for the database in the Save In box. (For
example, if you are working at a remote workstation, save the database on
the central workstation).
6 Click Save.
A message displays: “The database is created successfully”.
7 Click OK.
8 Start HARMONIE and open the database. (The Patients view is empty
because there are no patients in the new database).

To change the 1 Choose Options > Set Institution Name.

institution name The Set Institution Name dialog box displays.

2 Enter the new institution name.

3 Click OK.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 4-5

Chapter 4: Setting Up the Database

Working with Files and Volumes

EEG recordings are stored in separate files outside the database. The database
keeps track of where the files are stored. The EEG files can be stored on any
local or network storage device. This includes hard disk drives and
removable storage drives, such as CD-ROMs and optical disks.
Stellate does not recommend creating a volume on the drive where HARMONIE
is installed. Because an EEG file can become quite substantial in size, memory
problems can occur, and may affect the proper functioning of the software.
The software is installed on Drive C by default, therefore Drive C is not on the
list. Also, because volumes are not usually stored on floppy drives, Drives A and
B are not on the list either. If necessary, you can add these to the list.

Configuring Storage Devices

Storage devices can either be local or on the network. Two examples of
storage devices are your local hard disk drive (D:) and a CD-ROM drive
connected to a network computer (e.g. \\Recording\CD).
In the examples that follow, “D” is the drive letter assigned to the local drive,
“Recording” is the name of the network computer, and “CD” is the share
name of the CD-ROM drive on the network computer.
The share name of a network drive must be defined before it can be added to the
Storage Device List (see below).
You should not change the share name of a network drive. If you do, the Storage
Device List on other computers will not be updated, and HARMONIE will not be
able to find the drive.

If a network device is mapped, avoid using its drive letter because it can change
later.
You should delete the drive letters that do not have local or mapped devices.
For example, if your computer has two hard disk drives (C: and D:), one
CD-ROM drive (E:), and no mapped network drives, you can delete storage
devices F to Z.

4-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Working with Files and Volumes

To configure the 1 Choose Options > Storage Devices.

Storage Device
List

The first time you start HARMONIE after the installation, the list includes
the locally available drives.
For local devices, the drive letter is used with a colon (e.g. D:). For network
devices, the network path is used. A network path uses the syntax
\\computername\sharename (e.g. \\Recording\CD).
If a network device is mapped, avoid using its drive letter because it can change
later.
2 To remove a storage device from the list, select it and click Delete.
You should delete the drive letters that do not have local or mapped
devices. For example, if your computer has two hard disk drives (C: and
D:), one CD-ROM drive (E:), and no mapped network drives, you can
delete storage devices F to Z.
Adding/editing a storage device
3 [Adding a storage device] At the Storage Device List dialog box, click
Add.
OR
[Editing a storage device] At the Storage Device List dialog box, select a
device from the list, then click Edit.
The Edit Storage Device dialog box displays.

4 Enter a path in the Storage device path box, or click Browse to find the
device.
For network devices, you should click Browse to ensure the correct names
and syntax.
5 Click OK to return to the Storage Device List dialog box.
6 When you have finished, click OK.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 4-7

Chapter 4: Setting Up the Database

Volumes
A volume is a name used by HARMONIE to identify where EEG files are
stored. HARMONIE keeps track of the volume where each file belongs, so the
file can be found later. For each hard disk that appears in the list of Storage
Devices, only one volume can exist. For each Storage Device that has a
removable medium (e.g. a CD-ROM), the number of volumes equals the
number of CD-ROMs that have been written.
After storage devices are assigned and volumes are created, you only work
with volumes. EEG files are always stored in the HarmEEG folder on the
storage device. However, you can save other files (e.g. band files, text files) in
different folders.
After you add a device to the Storage Device List, you can create a volume on
it. If you delete the device from the list after you create a volume on it, you
will not be able to find the volume (i.e. its location will be “Unknown”).
There are four times when you need to identify where to store an EEG file:
• When you record a new EEG file.
• When you back up an EEG file.
• When you save sections of an EEG file in Reviewer.
• When you copy files using the Copy Files feature.
In the following example, the Reviewing workstation has two hard disks and
a CD-ROM. The Recording workstation has two hard disks. After the Storage
Device List and the volumes are created, you only work with the volume
names.

Reviewing Workstation
Computer Name: Review1
Available Disks: C: (hard disk for programs)
D: (hard disk for data)
E: (CD-ROM drive)
Storage Device List: D: (local)
E: (local)
\\Record1\D (remote)

Recording Workstation
Computer Name: Record1
Available Disks: C: (hard disk for programs)
D: (hard disk for data)

4-8 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Working with Files and Volumes

Storage Device List: D: (local)

\\Review1\D (remote)
\\Review1\E (remote)
Database Volumes
Review1-D (created on Drive D: on Review1)
Record1-D (created on Drive D: on Record1)
CD98_001 (created on Drive E: on Review1
CD98_002 (created on Drive E: on Review1)
CD98_003 (created on Drive E: on Review1)

When you open a file in HARMONIE, the software searches each hard disk
drive and CD-ROM player for its volume. If the volume cannot be found,
HARMONIE will not be able to open the file.
A volume can also be stored on a floppy disk. If you do not want the software to
search the floppy disk drives, choose Options > No volume on floppy drive A or
B.
Searching the database is much faster if the software does not have to search
the floppy disk drives.

Creating Volumes
There must be one volume on each drive where EEG files are stored. Since
CD-ROMs are removable storage media, there must be a different volume on
each disc where the files are stored.
When you create a volume for a local drive, you should enter a name that
indicates where the volume can be found. For example, you can enter
“Review-D” to indicate Drive D on the Reviewing workstation.
For remote drives, avoid including the network mapping drive letter because it
can change later.
You should follow a volume naming convention for the CD-ROMs. This
makes it easier to keep track of multiple CD-ROMs. For example, you can
include the calendar year and the disk number in that year (e.g. VOL2001-001,
VOL2001-002, … VOL2002-001, VOL2002-002, etc.).
You must create a volume on a hard disk drive before you can record to it.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 4-9

Chapter 4: Setting Up the Database

To create a 1 Show the Volumes view in List format.

volume 2 Click Create on the Volume toolbar.
OR
Choose Edit > Create.
OR
Double-click the gray bar at the bottom of the list of database volumes.
The New Volume Identification dialog box displays.

3 Enter a unique name in the Volume Name box.

4 You can enter a volume description in the Description box.
5 Select an available drive from the Disk Drive list.
You can click Scan to update the available storage list.
If a drive already has a HARMONIE volume, it will not appear in the list.
6 Click OK.
For more information on volumes, see “Troubleshooting Volume Errors” on
page 12-15.

Deleting Volumes
Volumes can be deleted from the Volumes view. When you delete a volume,
you have the following options:
• Delete the volume and all files, reports and statistics stored in it
• Delete only the volume and related files
• Delete only the volume and related reports and statistics
When you use HARMONIE to delete a volume, it is deleted from the database and
the hard disk drive.
You cannot delete a volume that contains a “REC” type file. This type of file is
considered to be in the recording state.

4-10 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Patient Files

To delete a 1 Show the Volumes view.

volume 2 Select a volume from the list.
3 Choose Edit > Delete.
The Delete Volume dialog box displays.

4 The following options are available:

• Clear all options (default) – Only deletes the database volume entry.
• Select the Delete all files on this volume check box – Only deletes the
database volume entry and related physical files on the disk volume
(keeps the database file entries and the reports).
• Select the Also delete the file reports and statistics check box – The
message, “Do you want to keep the file entries?” displays. If you click
Yes, the database volume file entry, and the reports and statistics are
deleted. If you click No, everything is deleted.
• Select both options – Deletes everything.
5 Click Yes to delete the volume.

Patient Files
When you start HARMONIE, the Patients view is shown in List format. This
is where you add new patients to the database. After you create a new
database entry, you must enter an identification number and a last name for
the patient.
Do not enter the EEG identification number in the ID1 field. This field identifies
the patient, who can have more than one EEG file. (The EEG identification
number is entered when you start a recording).

To add/edit a 1 Show the Patients view in List format.

patient 2 Click Create on the Patient toolbar.
OR
Choose Edit > Create.
OR
Double-click the gray bar at the bottom of the list of patients.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 4-11

Chapter 4: Setting Up the Database

The Patient Information dialog box displays.

3 Enter a unique identification in the ID1 box.

For example, you can use the patient’s hospital file number.
4 You should enter the following patient information:
• Last name
• Date of birth (required for sleep report)
• Height and weight (required for sleep report)
The remaining fields are optional.
5 Click OK.
The patient height and weight information can be entered in U.S. or metric
measurements. Select the measurement type before you add a new patient.

To change the 1 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Settings > Control Panel.
height/weight 2 At the Control Panel window, double-click the Regional Settings icon.
units 3 The Regional Settings Properties dialog box displays.
4 Click the Number tab.
5 Select U.S. or Metric from the Measurement system list.
6 Click OK.

4-12 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Finding Patients

Finding Patients
If you are searching for a specific patient in a database containing many
patients, you can use the Find feature.

To find a patient 1 Show the Patients view in List, Detail, or Montages format.
In Montages format, the cursor must be in the Patient Information box to
use the Find feature.
2 Choose Edit > Find.
OR
Press CTRL + F3.
The Find dialog box displays.

3 Enter a name or ID in the Find box.

4 Select a field from the Find what list.
5 You can also change the search by selecting a different match option.
6 Click OK.
The first patient that matches the search criteria is displayed.
OR
A message informs you that the patient is not found.
7 If a patient was found, you can choose Edit > Find Next (or Find Previous)
to display the next (or previous) patient that matches the search criteria.
OR
Press the F3 key for Find Next, or SHIFT + F3 for Find Previous.
You can also sort the list of patients when the Patients view is shown in List
format.
The patients are sorted by the Last Name field when you start HARMONIE.
You can also sort the EEG files in User Views 1 and 2. For example, you can sort
the files by date to see the most recent recordings. For more information, see
“HARMONIE Views” on page 3-5.
When the Patients view is shown in List format, you can scroll through and
select a patient by clicking the file entry.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 4-13

Chapter 4: Setting Up the Database

To sort the patient 1 Show the Patients view in List format.

list 2 Choose View > Sort.
The Sort dialog box displays.

3 Select a field from the Sort by list.

4 Click OK.
The view is refreshed with the sorted list of files.
In the Patients view in List, Detail, or Montages format, you can select a
patient using the Go to options.

To select a patient 1 Show the Patients view in List, Detail, or Montages format.
using the Go to 2 Choose Edit > Go to First, Go to Previous, Go to Next, or Go to Last.
options

Staff Files
The primary reason that staff information is entered in the database, is so that
technicians can attach their names to the recording sessions.
When staff members are deleted, the information regarding which files they
have read is retained. The “Assigned To” information continues to appear in
the Files to Backup view, Files to Archive view, User Views 1 & 2, and File
Properties dialog box after the staff member is deleted from the database.

To add a staff 1 Show the Staff view in List format.

member 2 Click New on the Staff toolbar.
OR
Choose Edit > Create.
OR
Double-click the gray bar at the bottom of the list of staff.

4-14 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating Electrode Sets and Montages

The Staff Information dialog box displays.

3 Enter a unique identification in the Staff ID box.

4 Enter a name in the Last Name box.
The remaining fields are optional.
5 Click OK.
You can now use this staff member to identify who is making a recording
or who is writing a report.

To delete a staff 1 Show the Staff view in List format.

member 2 Select a staff member from the List of Staff box.
3 Click Delete on the Staff toolbar.
The warning, “Are you certain you want to delete this staff member?”
appears.
4 Click Yes to delete.

Creating Electrode Sets and Montages

Channel Mapping
Most recording devices can be mapped during hardware setup, making it
possible to set up channels in any order in the recording montage. However,
some devices do not allow channel mapping.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 4-15

Chapter 4: Setting Up the Database

Using Channel Mapping

When you use channel mapping, compare the labels in the channel mapping
to those in the recording montage. Identical G1 and G2 designations must be
identified in the recording montage and electrode mapping. In this fashion,
channels can be placed in any order in the recording montage.
The G1 and G2 columns list the labels, which should reflect the electrode labels
on the headbox.
The Edit Channel Mapping dialog box is used to set up channel mapping for
your recording device. Each square represents an electrode on the headbox.
The numbers represent the physical positions of the electrodes.

The default channel mapping corresponds to the inputs in the headbox.

Electrode designations which are not found in the channel mapping cannot be
used in the recording montage. If you want to use an electrode label that does
not exist in the channel mapping, use the Save As funtion to modify the default
mapping.

It is recommended that you use the default channel mappings that are provided.

4-16 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating Electrode Sets and Montages

CHANNEL MAPPING EXAMPLE

The LA MONT HXAT 16-ch EEG (STD) default channel mapping is used in
the table below to show how the physical inputs in the channel mapping
correspond to the logical channels in a recording montage.

Recording Montage Channel Mapping

Logical Label Physical G1 G2

Channel Input

1 Fp2-REF 1
2 F4-REF 2 F4 REF
3 C4-REF 3 Fp2 REF
4 P4-REF 4 F3 REF
5 O2-REF 5 Fp1 REF
6 F8-REF 6 T6 REF
7 T4-REF 7 T5 REF
8 T6-REF 8 O2 REF
9 Fp1-REF 9 O1 REF
10 F3-REF 10 F7 REF
11 C3-REF 11 F8 REF
12 P3-REF 12 T3 REF
13 O1-REF 13 T4 REF
14 F7-REF 14 C4 REF
15 T3-REF 15 C3 REF
16 T5-REF 16 P4 REF
17 P3 REF

To edit a channel 1 At the Edit Channel Mapping dialog box, click Save As.
mapping The Channel Mapping Name dialog box displays.
2 Enter a name, and click OK.

You can change or enter labels in the G1 and G2 fields.

To set a common Reference for all G1 inputs on the page, enter a label in
the Reference box. Then click Set Current Page G2 Inputs.

To print the page, click Print.

To clear all headbox inputs on the page, click Clear Current Page.
3 To save the settings, click Save.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 4-17

Chapter 4: Setting Up the Database

4 To exit the dialog box, click OK.

No Channel Mapping
Channel mapping does not have to be used for the recording device. When
there is no channel mapping, no labels are defined, and the order of the
channels cannot be changed by the software. Therefore, the order of channels
in the recording montage must reflect the order/mapping of the physical
electrodes on the EEG device acquiring the EEG data.
Devices that allow you to select whether or not to use channel mapping
display the Channel Select for No Mapping Mode dialog box when the
option is selected.

When you clear a check box corresponding to the G1 column, that channel
will be skipped.
When you use the Schwarzer headbox with No Channel Mapping and skip some
channels, the calibration values must be entered manually.
The following recording devices do not allow channel mapping:
• BMSI 519
• BMSI 519NT
• MNI 600
• MNI 950

4-18 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating Electrode Sets and Montages

Electrode Sets
In HARMONIE, an electrode set defines the name and physical location of all
the electrodes on the head that can be used in a recording. You must define at
least one electrode set prior to recording. For example, most clinical settings
use only one electrode set.
There is no limit to the number of electrodes in an electrode set. However, the
set should at least contain the electrodes that will be used to define a
recording montage.
Normally, the electrode set reflects the nomenclature of the amplifier’s electrode
inputs.

In some clinical settings, it may be useful to define a distinct electrode set that
includes only depth electrodes.

Electrode Configurations
HARMONIE contains all the definitions for the standard electrode
configuration of the International 10-10 and 10-20 System, plus definitions for
several supplementary electrodes that might be used (such as EOG,
sphenoidal, and inferior temporal).

10-10 Electrodes
The 10-10 system contains the following 75 standard electrodes.
NZ, Fp1, Fpz, Fp2, AF7, AF3, AFz, AF4, AF8, F9, F7, F5, F3, F1, Fz, F2, F4,
F6, F8, FT10, FT7, FC5, FC3, FC1, FCz, FC2, FC4, FC6, FT8, A1,T9, T3/T7,
C5, C3, C1, Cz, C2, C4, C6,
T4/T8, T10, A2, TP7, CP5, CP3, CP1, CPz, CP2, CP4, CP6, TP8, TP9, TP10,
P9, T5/P7, P5, P3, P1, Pz, P2,P4, P6, T6/P8, P10, PO7, PO3, POz, PO4, PO8,
O1, Oz, O2, Iz, F10, FT9
When two names exist for the same electrode location, set A selects the first
name and set B selects the second name (set A includes T3, T4, T5, and T6,
whereas set B includes T7, T8, P7, and P8).

10-20 Electrodes
The 10-20 system contains the following 27 standard electrodes.
Loc, Roc, Sp1, Sp2, Fp1, Fpz, Fp2, F7, F3,
Fz, F4, F8, A1, T3/T7, C3, Cz, C4, T4/T8,
A2, T5/P7, P3, Pz, P4, T6/P8, O1, Oz, O2
When two names exist for the same electrode location, set A selects the first
name and set B selects the second name (set A includes T3, T4, T5, and T6,
whereas set B includes T7, T8, P7, and P8).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 4-19

Chapter 4: Setting Up the Database

Body System Electrodes

The Body system contains the following 16 standard electrodes.

Electrode Definition Channel Type

Roc Right electrooculogram EOG
Loc Left electrooculogram EOG
Nasl Nasal FLOW
Oral FLOW
Chin EMG
Ecg EKG
Thor Thoracic Respiratory Effort (EFF)
Abdo Abdominal Respiratory Effort (EFF)
Rleg Right leg EMG
Lleg Left leg EMG
Legs Legs EMG
Mic Microphone MIC
Temp Temperature TEMP
SpO2 Oxygen saturation SpO2
Pap Positive airway pressure PRES
Bpos Body position POS

The diagram below illustrates how the leg electrodes are placed:

4-20 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating Electrode Sets and Montages

Creating Electrode Sets

To create/edit an 1 Show the Global Montages view.

electrode set OR
Show the Patient view in Montages format.
2 Move the cursor to the Electrode Sets box by clicking in the box or
pressing TAB.
3 Click Create on the Montage toolbar.
OR
Choose Edit > Create.
OR
Double-click on the gray bar at the bottom of the list of electrode sets.
The Electrode Set Definition dialog box displays.

4 Enter a name in the Set Name box.

5 Select from the Map Type list if you want to use the electrode set for
displaying a voltage or spectral map with SENSA.
6 Select 10-20A, 10-20B, 10-10A, 10-10B, or Body to view a graphic map
display.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 4-21

Chapter 4: Setting Up the Database

7 In the Electrode List box, select electrodes.

OR
To include all standard electrodes, click Add All.
8 To change the electrode set, use the Add, Insert, Edit, and Delete buttons.
When you add, the new electrode is added to the end of the list. When you
insert, edit, or delete, you use the cursor’s position in the list.
Adding or editing an electrode location
When you add, insert, or edit an electrode, the Electrode Definition dialog
box displays.

9 Enter an electrode name in the Name box, or select the electrode from any
view in the Standard Electrode Configuration box.
10 For displaying voltage or spectral maps with SENSA, electrode
coordinates are required. Coordinates are entered automatically when
electrodes are selected from the Standard Electrode Configuration box.
Otherwise they must be entered manually.
For Circle map types
Theta and Phi are represented as degrees in a 3D spherical coordinate
system. The diagram displayed provides details about the coordinate
system.
• When Include is selected, the corresponding electrode has a radius
equal to 1.0. Theta must be between 0-180 degrees, and Phi must be
between 0-360 degrees.
• When Exclude is selected, an electrode (e.g. non-EEG) is excluded
from maps. The radius equals –1.0, and the Theta and Phi boxes are
disabled.
For Grid map types
X and Y represent coordinates on a grid. The diagram displayed provides
details about the coordinate system.
• When Include is selected, the x and y values must be integers. The x
and y coordinates must be greater than 0.
• Selecting Exclude disables the X and Y boxes.

4-22 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating Electrode Sets and Montages

For No Map
The Electrode Location box is disabled, and the dialog box does not
display any coordinate system.
11 Click OK to save the electrode.
12 At the Electrode Set Definition dialog box, click OK to save the electrode
set.

Global Montages
The three boxes in this view list the electrode sets and their linked montages.

Electrode Set that Linked Recording Linked

is selected Montage that is Reformatting
selected Montage that is
selected

Other Linked Other Linked

Other Electrode Recording Reformatting
Sets Montages Montages

A recording montage is always linked to its electrode set. When you select an
electrode set in the Electrode Sets box, the linked recording montages are
listed in the Recording Montages box.
A reformatting montage is always linked to its recording montage. When you
select a recording montage in the Recording Montages box, the linked
reformatting montages are listed in the Reformatting Montages box.

Recording Montages
A recording montage describes the channels that are recorded to an EEG file.
For each channel, you specify the two source electrodes, the sampling
frequency, and the units, so they match the actual recording conditions.
For example, Channel 1 is Fp1-REF and it records at 200Hz using the unit µV.
Since you define a channel by choosing electrodes from an electrode set, a
recording montage is always linked to its electrode set. You can have more
than one recording montage for an electrode set.
When you record an EEG file, you choose the recording montage. Since it is
used for the entire session, you cannot change your choice.
When you record triggers generated by external hardware devices, you
should use the DINP (Digital Input) type and AD units for the channel.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 4-23

Chapter 4: Setting Up the Database

Creating Recording Montages

Before you add channels to the Channel List box, do the following:
• Enter a name for the recording montage in the Identification box.
• Select a sampling rate from the Base Frequency list. For more information,
see “Creating Electrode Sets and Montages” on page 4-15.
You can also modify and delete montages from the Global Montages view. The
Modify and Delete options are in the Edit menu and on the Montage toolbar.
Another way to modify a montage is by double-clicking the name of the
montage. Another way to delete a montage is by selecting the name and
pressing DELETE. These options can also be used to modify and delete
electrode sets.

When you select two or more channels at the same time, you can change any of
the fields in the Channel Definition box except for the first electrode. When you
click the Replace button, the changes are applied to all of the selected channels.

To create/edit a 1 Show the Global Montages view.

global recording 2 Select an electrode set in the Electrode Sets box.
montage 3 Move the cursor to the Recording Montages box, by clicking the box or
pressing TAB.
4 Click Create on the Montage toolbar.
OR
Choose Edit > Create.
OR
Double-click the gray bar at the bottom of the list of recording montages.

4-24 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating Electrode Sets and Montages

The Recording Montage Definition dialog box displays.

5 Enter a recording montage name in the Name box.

6 Select a sampling rate from the Base Frequency list.
Defining a channel
7 In the Electrode Set box, select 10-20A, 10-20B, 10-10A, 10-10B, or Body to
view a graphic map display.
8 In the Channel Definition box, select the second electrode box. (Usually,
the second electrode is the reference so you only need to set this field
once).
9 In the Electrode Set box, select an electrode.
OR
To add a channel without a second electrode (e.g. EKG, SpO2), select List.
Then select Void to clear the current selection for the second electrode.
10 In the Channel Definition box, select the first electrode box.
11 In the Electrode Set box, select another electrode.
12 Change the Color, Sampling Frequency, Type, and Units fields, if
necessary.
For information about changing the color, see “To change the color”
below.
13 This new channel definition can be:
• Appended to the end of the Channel List by clicking Add.
• Inserted in the position of the selected channel by clicking Insert. (The
other channels shift down one position).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 4-25

Chapter 4: Setting Up the Database

• Used to replace the selected channel by clicking Replace.

14 If you are using another reference channel, repeat steps 2 to 5.
OR
If you are using the same reference channel for all of the channels you are
adding, repeat steps 4 to 5 until all of the channels are selected.
15 After you have finished adding channels to the Channel List box, click
OK.

To change the Click Set Color.

color The Color dialog box displays.

You can select a basic color, or define a custom color. You should avoid
light colors because they display poorly on the white background.

Reformatting Montages
A reformatting montage allows you to display a set of channels that is different
from the recording montage. These new channels are based on the channels
being recorded; they do not change what is being recorded.
Reformatting montages can only be defined from referential recording
montages. If the recording montage is bipolar, you cannot reformat it.
HARMONIE’s montage reformatting allows you to create bipolar, average
reference, Laplacian, and other complex montages from referential
recordings.
Since a reformatting montage is derived from a recording montage, it is
always linked to that recording montage. You can have more than one
reformatting montage for each recording montage.

4-26 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating Electrode Sets and Montages

Creating Reformatting Montages

When you create or modify a reformatting montage, you use the Recording
Montage Definition dialog box. In this dialog box, you can add, modify, and
delete channels. You can also access the macros linked to the reformatting
montage.
The Recording Montage Definition dialog box is similar to the Recording
Montage Definition dialog box described in “Creating Recording Montages”
on page 4-24. The differences are summarized below.
• The Recording Channels box shows referential channels from the
recording montage instead of all the electrodes in the set.
• There are no Base Frequency, Sampling Frequency, Type or Units fields.
• You can use a formula to define a channel.
• You can enter a label for a channel.
• You can create macros for common formulas.
There are two ways to access the reformatting montages that are linked to a
recording montage:
• At the Recording Montage Definition dialog box, use the Name list and
buttons (i.e. New, Edit, Delete) in the Reformatting Montages box.
• Use the Reformatting Montages box in the Global Montages view. See
“To create/edit a global reformatting montage” on page 4-27.

To create/edit a 1 Show the Global Montages view.

global 2 In the Electrode Sets box, select an electrode set.
reformatting 3 In the Recording Montages box, select a recording montage.
montage 4 Move the cursor to the Reformatting Montages box by clicking in the box
or pressing TAB.
5 Click Create on the Montage toolbar.
OR
Choose Edit > Create.
OR
Double-click the gray bar at the bottom of the list of reformatting
montages.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 4-27

Chapter 4: Setting Up the Database

The Reformatting Montage Definition dialog box displays.

6 Before you add channels to the Channel List box, enter the reformatting
montage name in the Name box.
7 Define a bipolar channel, or define a channel using a formula.
Defining a bipolar channel
8 [Adding a channel] Continue with step 9.
OR
{Editing or inserting a channel] In the Channel List box, select a channel.
9 In the Channel Definition box, select Bipolar.
The first Bipolar Channel electrode is automatically selected.

10 In the Recording Channels box, select an electrode.

In the Channel Definition box, the second Bipolar Channel electrode is
automatically selected.
11 In the Recording Channels box, select a second electrode.
If the electrode that you want is not available in the Recording Channels
box, show the List view.

4-28 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating Electrode Sets and Montages

Defining a channel using a formula

12 [Adding a channel] Continue with step 13.
OR
[Editing or inserting a channel] In the Channel List box, select a channel
13 In the Channel Definition box, select Formula.

14 Enter a formula in the Formula box.

You can type electrode names or select them from the Recording
Channels box.
You can use the LEFT ARROW and RIGHT ARROW keys to move within
the field.
15 If the electrode that you want is not available in the Recording Channels
box, show the List view.
The List view also includes the names of macros that you have created.
16 Enter a channel label in the Label box.
OR
Select the Use Formula as Label check box.
Changing the trace color
17 For information about changing the color, see “To change the color” on
page 4-26.
18 This new channel definition can be:
• Appended to the end of the Channel List, by clicking Add.
• Inserted in the position of the previously selected channel in the
Channel List, by clicking Insert.
• Used to replace the previously selected channel in the Channel List,
by clicking Replace.
19 After you finish adding channels to the Channel List box, click OK to exit
the window and save the reformatting montage.
All channels are stored as formulas. When you select a bipolar channel from the
Channel List box, it appears as a formula in the Channel Definition box. That is, a
bipolar channel (e.g. F4-C4) is stored as a formula and the formula is used as the
label.

Creating Macros
Sometimes you need to define many channels using a similar formula. A
macro is just a shortcut to a saved formula. You can use a macro in the
Formula field to simplify the channel definition procedure.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 4-29

Chapter 4: Setting Up the Database

To create a macro 1 At the Reformatting Montage Definition dialog box, click New in the
Macros for complex formulas box.
The Macro for complex formula dialog box displays.

2 Enter a unique name in the Macro Name box. This name can only contain
alphanumeric characters.
3 Select the Operands, using the following methods:
• To select one Operand, highlight or double-click it.
• To select multiple Operands, use the CTRL and SHIFT keys.
• To select all of the Operands, click Select All.
• To clear the selected Operands, click Remove All.

Click an Operator to insert the Operand(s) and Operator into the Formula
box. (The Operator appears between each channel).

To compute the average of the selected Operands, click Average.

You can modify the formula, using the following methods:
• To replace part of the formula with a different Operator and Operands,
select part of the formula, then select the new Operands and Operator.
The highlighted selection will be replaced by the new set of Operands
and Operator.
• To replace one Operand, select the appropriate Operand, and double-
click it.
• To replace one Operator, select the appropriate Operator, and click the
appropriate Operator button.
• To insert Operands and Operators into a formula, move the cursor to
the appropriate position in the Formula box, then select the new
Operands and Operators.

4-30 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating Electrode Sets and Montages

• To clear the formula, click Clear.

4 Click OK to save the macro.
5 To use the macro, enter its name as part of a formula in the Channel
Definition box.
To do this, show the List view in the Recording Channels box, and select
the name of the macro.

To edit or delete a 1 At the Reformatting Montage Definition dialog box, under Macros for
macro: complex formulas box, select a macro from the Name list.
2 To edit or view the selected macro, click Edit.
OR
To delete the selected macro, click Delete.
For examples of macros, see “Average Reference Reformatting Montages” on
page 4-31, and “Laplacian Reformatting Montages” on page 4-31.

Average Reference Reformatting Montages

The Average Reference equals the sum of all considered electrodes (E1 to Ej),
divided by the total number of considered electrodes (j).
Average Reference = (E1 + E2 + ... + Ej) / j
When you create an Average Reference reformatting montage, you should use a
macro for the Average Reference because all of the channels need to use the
same formula.

EXAMPLE
In this example, the recording montage has 18 electrodes (recorded with Cz
reference): Fp1, Fp2, F3, F4, F7, F8, A1, A2, C3, C4, T3, T4, T5, T6, P3, P4, O1,
and O2. In the Macro for complex formula window, you could enter the
following formula for the Average Reference:
(F3 + F4 + F7 + F8 + C3 + C4 + T3 + T4 + T5 + T6 + P3 + P4 + O1 + O2)
/ 14
In this example, the electrodes Fp1, Fp2, A1, and A2 are not included in the
average. The formula for each channel in the reformatting montage is simply
the difference of the electrode and the result of the Average Reference macro.
For example, if AVE is the name of the macro, the formula for C3 is:
C3 - AVE
You can quickly enter a macro name by selecting it from the List view (in the
Recording Channels box). Since the formula has a short name, you can use
this name as the channel label.

Laplacian Reformatting Montages

The Laplacian at a particular electrode site (LEi) equals the difference of the
average weighted sum of neighboring electrodes (En1 to Enj) from the signal
at the electrode of interest (Ei).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 4-31

Chapter 4: Setting Up the Database

LEi = Ei - [(w1)(En1) + (w2)(En2) + … + (wj)(Enj)] / [w1 + w2 + … +

wj]
j = the neighboring electrode number
wj = the weight at the jth neighboring electrode

EXAMPLE 1
In this example, there are four neighboring electrodes that are given equal
weight (i.e. w1 = w2 = w3 = w4 = 1).
LCz = Laplacian at the Cz electrode
LCz = Cz - [1(Fz) + 1(C3) + 1(Pz) + 1(C4)] / [1 + 1 + 1 + 1]
In the reformatting montage, you should enter the following formula for Cz:
Cz - (Fz + C3 + Pz + C4) / 4

You should not use macros when you create a Laplacian reformatting montage.
Because every formula is different, you will not use the macro more than once.

EXAMPLE 2
In this example, only three of the four neighboring electrodes are used. F7 and
T5 are given twice the weight of C3 (i.e. wF7 = wT5 = 2 and wC3 = 1).
LT3 = T3 - [2(F7) + 2(T5) + 1(C3)] / [2 + 2 + 1]
You must use * to multiply in the reformatting montage, so the formula for T3
becomes:
T3 - (2*F7 + 2*T5 + C3) / 5
To identify the channel as Laplacian, you may want to use the label
“T3-LAP”. For more Laplacian examples, contact Stellate Systems.

Copying Electrode Sets and Montages

The following diagram shows how electrode sets, recording montages, and
reformatting montages are linked.

(All Patients) One Patient

Global Electrode Patient-specific

Copy
Set Electrode Set

Global Recording Patient-specific

Copy
Montages Recording
Montages

Global Patient-specific
Reformatting Copy Reformatting
Montages Montages

4-32 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating Electrode Sets and Montages

The diagram also shows that you can copy an electrode set or montage when
you want to make a copy. The copy can be global or patient-specific. For more
information, see “Making Patient-Specific Copies” on page 4-33.
You can only copy a recording montage to an electrode set that shares
common electrodes. (For example, to copy a montage from electrode set A to
electrode set B, electrode sets A and B must have the same electrodes). You
can only copy a reformatting montage to a recording montage that shares
common channels.
When you copy an electrode set, all of the montages attached to the electrode
set are also copied. When you copy a recording montage, all of the
reformatting montages that are attached to the montage are also copied.

To copy an 1 Show the Global Montages view.

electrode set or You can also copy from the Patients view in Montages format.
montage 2 Select an electrode set, recording montage, or reformatting montage from
the corresponding box.
3 Click Copy on the Montage toolbar.
OR
Choose Edit > Copy.
A copy is now in the Windows Clipboard.
4 Click Paste on the Montage toolbar.
OR
Choose Edit > Paste.
A window appears because a new name is needed for the copy.
5 Enter a unique name in the New Name box, then click OK.
You can now make changes to the new copy.
(If there are linked montages, they are also copied. See the diagram above).
6 Choose Edit > Modify.
After you make the changes, click OK.

Making Patient-Specific Copies

A recording montage that can be used to record any patient is called global. A
patient-specific recording montage can only be used for recording one specific
patient.
Patient-specific electrode sets and montages are used in the same way as
global electrode sets and montages. For example, when start the Recorder,
you can select a patient-specific recording montage instead of a global
recording montage.
HARMONIE stores patient-specific electrode sets and montages with the
patient’s records in the database.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 4-33

Chapter 4: Setting Up the Database

You work with patient-specific electrode sets, recording montages, and

reformatting montages in the Patients view in Montages format. You can
create, modify, and delete them in this view the same way you work with
global electrode sets and montages in the Global Montages view.
Instructions are given earlier in this chapter.
When a patient-specific electrode set or montage only differs slightly from an
existing electrode set or montage, making a copy is faster than creating a new
one.
For example, a patient-specific electrode set might be useful in situations
where intracerebral electrodes are used for some patients. Instead of
redefining each electrode, you can simply modify a copy of the existing
electrode set.
Modifying a patient-specific electrode set does not affect the original set in the
database, and vice versa. This also applies to the recording and reformatting
montages.

To make a 1 Show the Global Montages view.

patient-specific 2 Select an electrode set, recording montage or reformatting montage from
copy the corresponding box.
3 Click Copy on the Montage toolbar.
OR
Choose Edit > Copy.
A copy is now in the Windows Clipboard.
4 Show the Patients view in List format.
5 Select the patient and change to Montages format.
6 Move the cursor to the appropriate box (e.g. the Electrode Sets box to copy
an electrode set and its montages).
To do this, you can click in the box or press TAB.
7 Click Paste on the Patient Montage toolbar.
OR
Choose Edit > Paste.
A window appears if a new name is needed for the copy. (Enter a unique
name in the New Name box and click OK.
If there are linked montages, they are also copied.
8 You can now make changes to the new copy.
Choose Edit > Modify. After you make the changes, click OK.

4-34 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

CHAPTER 5: Recording EEG Files

This chapter explains how to record EEG files. Two HARMONIE functions
correspond to the two main recording steps. First, to start the Recorder, you
enter recording parameters. Then, in the Observer, you can view and control
the recording session.
The recording parameters include: the patient name, file name, recording
montage, calibration settings, preprogrammed annotations, automatic start/
stop, photic stimulation, and other recording features.
When you start the Recorder, EEG data is not automatically stored on the
hard disk drive. At this point the Recorder is only reading the signals from
the data acquisition board.
In Observer, you can view the signals and then start and stop writing to the
hard disk drive at any time. You can view the signals using a reformatting
montage and filters in the active window, or in a LookBack window. You can
also use the photic stimulator and place annotations while recording.
This chapter covers:
• Introduction to Recording
• Starting the Recorder
• Creating or Editing Recording Templates
• Appending Recordings to Existing Files
• Viewing the Recorder Window
• Exiting the Recording Session

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 5-1

Chapter 5: Recording EEG Files

Introduction to Recording
Two separate functions handle the recording process: the Recorder reads and
stores the signals, and the Observer provides the interface that controls the
recording.
The diagram below shows that the amplified analog signals from the patient
are digitized by the data acquisition board and recorded to hard disk by the
Recorder. Although the Recorder can run by itself, it is usually controlled by
the Observer.

Patient

Data Flow

EEG Device Control

Recording Workstation

Data Acquisition
Recorder Hard Disk
Board

Observer

When triggers generated by external hardware devices are recorded, they are
encoded as a wave that is fully synchronized with the EEG. A DINP channel
type and AD units should be used for recording these triggers.
Before you can record, you must have a patient, volume, electrode set, and
recording montage. Also, the recording device must be configured.
1 Start the recording session. (See “Starting the Recorder” on page 5-4).
The file name, recording template, volume, and staff are set. You can also
make a backup of the file.
2 Use Observer to record and view the recording. (See Chapter 6,
“Observer”).
3 Stop the recording session.

5-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Before You Begin Recording

Connection to the Central Database

The database (MDB) must be accessible just before ending a recording, in
order for the file to be “registered” in the database. If the station containing
the central database needs to be restarted, it should not be done while any
recordings are in progress.
If it is necessary to restart the central database station while recording, the file
will not be harmed although it will not be registered in the database. You can
recover the file using the Recover Recording function (see “Recovering from
System Failure” on page 6-25), or manually register the file using the File >
Import File function (See the Stellate HARMONIE Reference Guide).

Before You Begin Recording

The parameters that are required to start a recording session include: the
patient name, file name, recording montage, and calibration settings.
Therefore, you cannot record unless you have a patient, volume, recording
montage, and a set of calibration factors. The recording device must also be
set up.

Patient: Since you need to identify the patient that is being recorded, there
must be at least one patient in the database.
For more information on adding patients to the database, see “Patient Files”
on page 4-11.

Volume: You need to enter a name and a path for the EEG file. Since each
EEG file belongs to a volume, there must be at least one volume in the
database. You should check that this volume has enough disk space for the
file.

Stellate does not recommed having a volume on the same drive as the
HARMONIE software. The software is installed on Drive C by default, therefore,
do not record on the Drive C.
For more information on creating volumes, see “Working with Files and
Volumes” on page 4-6.

Recording Montage: Since you need to identify the recording montage that is
being used for the recording, there must be at least one recording montage in
the database.
For more information on defining recording montages, see “Creating
Electrode Sets and Montages” on page 4-15.

Set of Calibration Factors: You need to select a set of calibration factors, so a

calibration must be performed. See “Calibrating Signals” on page 5-9.

Recording Device: You need to select a recording device. To record signals

from a patient, the recording device must be your data acquisition board. If
you have problems recording, you should check that the board is working
properly.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 5-3

Chapter 5: Recording EEG Files

For more information on recording devices, see “Selecting the Recording

Device” on page 2-13.

Starting the Recorder

To start the Recorder, you must enter recording parameters in a recording
template.

You should not use a ‘screen saver’ or any other automatic programs while the
Recorder is running. If you will be away from the recording station for a long
period of time, you can turn off the monitor.
An example of an automatic program is when the Disk Fragmentation utility is
scheduled to run at a specific time of day.

To start a 1 Show the Patients view in List format.

recording session 2 Select a patient from the list.
3 Click Record.
OR
Choose Start > Recorder.
The Recorder dialog box displays.

4 Enter a unique name in the Signal File Name box.

5 Do one of the following:
• To create a new recording template, click New. The Template dialog
box is displayed.

5-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating or Editing Recording Templates

• To use an existing recording template, select the template from the

Recording Template list.
• To edit a template, select the template from the Recording Template
list, then click Edit. The template is displayed.
• To delete a saved template, select the template and click Delete.
6 To specify where the file will be saved, click Scan and select a volume from
the Name list.
7 You can select names from the Created by and Assign to lists.
8 To create a backup of the file, select the Make backup after recording
check box.
9 Click OK.
The Observer window displays. (The Recorder also starts, but the
Recorder window is minimized).

Creating or Editing Recording Templates

Some Recorder and Observer features require parameters. These recording
parameters must be specified before the Recorder starts:
• Database or Patient Electrode Set
• Recording Montage
• Calibration Factors
• (Preprogrammed) Annotations
• Photic Stimulator Protocols
• Hyperventilation Marker
• Sample Sections
• Push Buttons
• Automatic Start and Stop
• Restart Recording Session
• Time Code Generator
• Special Digitizing Features
• Traces as Observed “Station” Option
• Online Processors (e.g. Scheduled Section Processor)
You can specify different parameters each time you record an EEG. These
settings are saved as a recording template.

Templates are specific to each workstation; they are not stored in the central
database.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 5-5

Chapter 5: Recording EEG Files

You cannot change recording parameters from Observer.

To create or edit a 1 From the Recorder dialog box, select an existing recording template from
recording the Record Template list.
template OR
Create a new template, by clicking New.
The Template dialog box displays.

2 Select a Database or Patient electrode set.

3 Select a recording montage from the Recording Montage box.
Calibration

To calibrate every time a recording is started, select Calibrate Every
Recording.

To use a specific calibration file, select Use Specific Calibration File. You
can:
• Select a calibration file from the File list.
• Click New to create a new calibration file.
• Click Edit to modify an existing file.

5-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating or Editing Recording Templates

• Click Delete to delete an existing calibration file.

Recordings with automatic restart use the same calibration factors for each
recording session. For more information, see “Calibrating Signals” on
page 5-9.
Markers

To enter annotations in the recording, select the Annotations check box.
Then click Setup to configure preprogrammed annotations.
For more information, see “Programming Annotations” on page 5-20.

To use a photic stimulator during the recording, select the Photic
check box. Click Setup to configure the photic stimulator protocols.
For more information, see “Photic Stimulator Protocols” on page 5-22.

To use the hyperventilation event marker during the recording, select the
Hyperventilation check box.
Manual Samples

You can change the delay time (in hh:mm:ss format) in the Delay Before
box.
The default setting is 0 seconds.

To record a digital video segment with each sample section, select the
Digital Video check box.
Push Button

To use a Push Button device while recording, select the PushButtons check
box. Then, enter the duration of signals you want stored before and after
each pushbutton event in the Delay Before and Delay After boxes.
To record a digital video segment with each pushbutton event, select the
Digital Video check box.
Processors
Selecting the processors is a two-step process. First you must select the
processor you want to use. Then you must configure the processor.

To select a processor, select the appropriate check box.
1 Select the Digital Video check box to record a digital video segment for
each processor event.
2 If necessary, select a montage from the Montage list.
3 Select a settings file from the General Settings File list, or configure the
processor by clicking Setup.
Recording Features

To set a specific start time for the recording session, select the Automatic
Start check box.
Enter the start date in the Date box and the start time in the Time box. The
default settings are the current date and time.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 5-7

Chapter 5: Recording EEG Files

To set a specific end time for the recording session, select the Automatic
Stop check box.
Enter the end date in the Date box and the end time in the Time box. The
default settings are tomorrow’s date and the current time.
Using the default results in the maximum recording length (24 hours).

It is not necessary to use both the Automatic Start and Automatic Stop times.
For example, you can set only the stop time, and manually start the recording
in the Observer.

To set a restart interval for the recording you are starting, select the Restart
New Recording Session check box.
Enter the number of hours you want each recording to last in the first box,
and how many times you want the recording to restart in the second box.

It is important that you click Save and Exit (see below) when you use this
feature. The recording is restarted based on the last saved template, not the
last used template.

If you are using a time code generator with your VCR, enable it by
selecting the Use Time Code Generator check box.

To use the special digitizing features, click Setup and enter the Speed-Up
Factor. For real-time recording, the speed-up factor should be at 1.00.
For more information, see “Special Digitizing Features” on page 5-28.
Traces as Observed
4 Select one of the following options:
• Mark Changes from Local Observer Station
• Mark Changes from All Observer Stations

The Traces as Observed feature must be enabled from within Observer.

Saving the Template
5 Click Save and Go.
A list of templates appears in the Choose the template you wish to save
dialog box. The proposed template name is the patient name plus the date.
6 Use the proposed template name or enter a different name. Then click
Save.

To view a summary of the current template, click View Template.
To begin recording
7 At the Recorder dialog box, click OK.
The Observer window displays. (The Recorder also starts, but its window
is minimized).
For more information, see “Introduction to Observer” on page 6-2.

5-8 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating or Editing Recording Templates

8 To start recording to disk, click Activate/Deactivate Recording on the

Main toolbar.

Calibrating Signals
Calibrating the EEG device is very important for the validity of EEG data.
When you perform a calibration automatically, it is saved as a file and
inserted at the beginning of each recording that uses this calibration. When
you calibrate manually, only the calibration factors (not the signals) are stored
to file–no signals are appended to the beginning of the recording. You do not
have to calibrate every recording.
The EEG device is either a digital amplifier or an analog EEG machine. The
following sections of the manual uses the word “amplifier” for both.

You must perform at least one calibration for each recording montage that you
plan to use.
A set of calibration factors is specific to the amplifier, the data acquisition
board, and the recording montage. If you change any of these things, you
must calibrate again.
When you record calibration signals from your amplifier, they depend on the
performance of your specific amplifier. Therefore, you should perform this
type of calibration regularly (e.g. daily). As you gain confidence in your
amplifier, however, you may want to calibrate less often (e.g. weekly).
If the amplifier falls or is mishandled, you should always perform new
calibrations.

Calibration in HARMONIE is a less extensive procedure than calibration of an

analog EEG machine. In HARMONIE, only the amplifier is calibrated. There are
no paper, no pens, and no other mechanical parts to align, space, or set up.

About Calibration
Analog signals from the patient are amplified (in the EEG device) before they
arrive at a Recording workstation’s data acquisition board. For example, a
specific signal point of 50 µV on Channel 1 can be amplified to 0.2 V.
The signal has gained amplitude (i.e. voltage). Gain is the scaling factor that
the signal has increased in amplitude by. It is the ratio of the amplifier’s
output voltage to the amplifier’s input voltage.
OutputSignalVoltage 0.2V 0.2
Gain = --------------------------------------------------------- = -------------- = ------------------- = 4000
InputSignalVoltage 50µV 0.00005

In this example, the gain equals 4000. This means that the amplifier
multiplied the analog signal by a factor of 4000.
The amplified signal is digitized by the data acquisition board and then read
by the Recorder. All of the signal points are stored in digital form. When a
signal point is displayed on the screen or used in a calculation, the value of
the original signal must be used. HARMONIE uses the gain to compute the
value of the input voltage (i.e. original value) from output voltage.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 5-9

Chapter 5: Recording EEG Files

For example, the Observer must compute the original value of a 0.2 V signal
point on Channel 1.
OutputSignalVoltage 0.2V
InputSignalVoltage = --------------------------------------------------------- = ------------ = 50µV
Gain 4000

Therefore, the reason for performing a calibration on the amplifier is to let

HARMONIE know the gain for every channel of a recording montage.
When plotting Output Signal Voltage to Input Signal Voltage, the slope of the
line equals the gain.

Output Signal
Voltage (V)

0.2

0 50
Input Signal
Voltage (µV)

The following section on offsets is not relevant for most EEG recordings. Offsets
typically apply to channels that do not have a baseline equal to 0. One example
is a polygraphic recording of a pulse oximetry channel.
When a signal is asymmetrical, the line in the graph intersects the x-axis so
there is an offset value other than zero.

Output Signal
Voltage (V)

0 50 100 Input Signal

(%)

For example, an input signal of 50% (for an SpO2 channel) is represented by 0

V. In this case, the offset is 50%.
Therefore, one way to calibrate a channel is to specify the gain and the offset.
Sometimes, the gain and offset are unknown. The slope (i.e. gain) can be
calculated if two points on the line are known. (The offset can also be
calculated, if necessary).
Therefore, another way to calibrate a channel is to specify two signal points.
For example, we know that an Amplifier Output Signal Value (i.e. a data
acquisition board value) of -0.4 V corresponds to an Amplifier Input Signal
Value (i.e. an original value) of -100 µV.

5-10 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating or Editing Recording Templates

We also know an output of 0.8 V corresponds to an input of 200 µV.

OutputVoltage ( – 0.4V ) – 〈 0.8V〉
Gain = --------------------------------------- = ----------------------------------------------------- = 4000
InputVoltage ( – 100µV ) – ( 200µV )

In this example, the gain equals 4000.

HARMONIE Calibration Methods

In HARMONIE, there are three methods for performing a calibration:

Manual: You calibrate manually by entering a set of values supplied by the

manufacturer, or a set of default values (only available for GRASS and
LAMONT amplifiers).

Automatic: You calibrate automatically by recording calibration signals from

your amplifier.

External Calibration: You inject your own calibration signal into the
amplifier.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 5-11

Chapter 5: Recording EEG Files

The following flowchart summarizes the steps required for the manual and
automatic calibration methods.

New Calibration

Select
Manual Calibration Automatic
Method
Inputs button
Select Channels
Specify Input Range
to calibrate
of calibration signal
with same units
for all channels

Defaults button
Use Default Select Channels
Yes Set default gains
Values? to calibrate
of the amplifier

No

Calibrate button
Calibrate button
Specify Input Range,
Set amplifier in
then specify either:
calibration mode and
- Output Range or
acquire waveforms
- Gain & Offset

Start button
OK button
Program tracks min-
Repeat for next
max values of output
set of channels
and marks these as
with same units
calibration points

Stop & Edit button

View waveforms
and manually tag
Calibration
calibration points No
Points OK?
and enter their
corresponding input
values
Yes

Done button
Repeat for next set of
channels

Save & Go/

Save button
Save Calibration File

5-12 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating or Editing Recording Templates

Manual Calibration
If you enter the calibration factors supplied by the manufacturer, they do not
depend on the performance of your specific amplifier. Therefore, you only
need to perform this type of calibration once for each recording montage.
To specify these calibration factors, you need to know:
• The gain and offset for each channel.
OR
• The board and original values for two signal points on each channel.
If you are using a GRASS or LA MONT amplifier, you can also use the
predefined Manual Calibration defaults. In this case, calibrate manually using
the Manual Calibration Defaults button.

Applying the "Default" function while calibrating will replace the current
selected calibration settings with the default values (if there is a default value
defined for the channel). If you do not use this function properly, the calibration
values you edited may be lost.

Channels that use a unit other than Volts must be set using two signals points.
Only volt channels can be set using the gain and offset.

LA MONT Blue/Red Diamond Amplifiers

The table below shows Pulse Oximeter inputs (OXY and HR channel) with
the Red/Blue Diamond:

Input Location Type Label Input Output Calibration Requirements

Amp SAO2 OXY 0 … 100% 0 … 0.12207V Pre-calibrated, Non-editable
Amp RATE HR 0 … 255 BPM 0 … 0.31128V Pre-calibrated, Non-editable
* External SAO2 OXY No Pre-calibration, Editable
* External RATE HR No Pre-calibration, Editable

* There is no default calibration for the auxiliary channels of DC inputs

To calibrate 1 [HARMONIE] At the Calibration Factors dialog box, use the proposed file
manually name, or enter a new name in the Calibration Filename box.
If you are calibrating every recording, this step does not apply.
OR
[Reviewer] After opening the EEG file associated with the calibration file
you want to edit, choose File > Calibration.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 5-13

Chapter 5: Recording EEG Files

The Calibration Factors dialog box displays.

2 Select the channels you want to calibrate.

To select channels you can:
• Click on a channel.
• Click and drag the mouse to select several channels.
• Press CTRL while clicking the channels to select multiple channels.
OR
Select a channel type from the Select All Channels of Type list, then
click Select All Channels of Type.
3 To enter calibration factors, under Manual Calibration, click Manual.

5-14 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating or Editing Recording Templates

The Manual Calibration dialog box displays.

4 The channels that will be calibrated are shown in the Calibrating box.
5 Under Input, enter low and high input values in the Low and High boxes.
6 Under Output, select one of the following options:
• To enter specific low and high values, select Specify Low and High.
Then enter the output values in the Low and High boxes.
• To enter the gain and offset, select Specify Gain and Offset: Slope [a1],
[Intercept [a0]. Then enter the values in the Gain and Offset boxes.
7 Click OK to return to the Calibration Factors dialog box.
8 Repeat steps 2 to 7 until you have calibrated all of the channels.
Entering default values
9 To enter default calibration values (for LA MONT amplifiers), select All
from the Select All Channels of Type list. Click Select All Channels of
Type.
EEG type channels are assigned a gain of 4000, and non-EEG channels are
assigned a gain of 1000.
10 Click Print to print the current calibration file.
11 [HARMONIE] To use the calibration file you have created without saving
it for subsequent use, click Go.
12 Click Save & Go to save the calibration file.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 5-15

Chapter 5: Recording EEG Files

Automatic Calibration
When you record calibration signals from your amplifier, they depend on the
performance of your specific amplifier. Therefore, you should perform this
type of calibration regularly (e.g. daily). However, as you gain confidence in
your amplifier, you may want to calibrate less often (e.g. weekly).
After you record a calibration signal, you must specify the output and input
values for two points on each channel. There are two methods for doing this:

Automated Technique: You specify the calibration signal’s amplitude range

(i.e. minimum and maximum input values). The Recorder finds the minimum
and maximum output values and then uses these as the two signal points.

Manual Technique: For each of the two signal points, you select an output
value (using the mouse) and then enter the corresponding input value.
You can also use a combination of these two techniques. Once the Recorder
has both signal points for each channel, it can calculate the channel gains.

To calibrate 1 [Creating or editing a calibration file] At the Calibration Factors dialog

automatically box, use the proposed file name, or enter a new name in the Calibration
Filename box.
OR
[Calibrating every recording] This step does not apply.

5-16 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating or Editing Recording Templates

Setting the input range

2 Select the channels that need the input range defined. To select channels
you can:
• Click on a channel.
• Click and drag the mouse to select several channels.
• Press CTRL while clicking the channels to select multiple channels.
OR
Select a channel type from the Select All Channels of Type list, then
click Select All Channels of Type.
The selected channels must all use the same units (e.g. µV).
3 Under Automatic Calibration, click Inputs.
The Set Inputs dialog box displays.

4 In the Low and High boxes, enter the calibration signal’s known low and
high input values, presented at the amplifier inputs (e.g. +/- 50 µV for
EEG, +/- 1 mV for ECG, 0-100% for Pulse Oximetry, etcetera).
5 Click OK to return to the Calibration Factors dialog box.
Calibrating Automatically
6 Select the channels you want to calibrate. To select channels you can:
• Click on a channel.
• Click and drag the mouse to select several channels.
• Press CTRL while clicking the channels to select multiple channels.
• Select a channel type from the Select All Channels of Type list, then
click Select All Channels of Type.
7 If necessary, set your amplifier to “Calibration mode”. Under Automatic
Calibration, click Calibrate.

If you have an amplifier that allows computer-controlled calibration, you do

not need to set your amplifier to ‘Calibration mode’. When you click the
Calibrate button, the amplifier will automatically go into Calibration mode.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 5-17

Chapter 5: Recording EEG Files

The Automatic Calibration window displays.

8 To adjust the sensitivity of the traces, click Increase or Decrease.

OR
Click Chn+, to open the Sensitivity dialog box.
9 Click Start to begin the min/max tracking.
(Every time you click Start, the min/max tracking is reset to allow you to
discard artifacts).
10 Record for a few seconds, until all of the channels contain min/max output
points that correspond to the specified input range.
If these output points are satisfactory, click Done to return to the
Calibration Factors dialog box.

5-18 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating or Editing Recording Templates

11 To view or edit the calibration points marked by the program, click Stop &
Edit.

12 To manually change the position of a calibration point, and specify the

corresponding input value for individual channels, click the channel you
want to edit.
Drag the cursor to determine the output value of the channel at a specific
point. The channel name, type, and output value (in volts) appear on the
status bar as you drag.
Stop the cursor at the value you want to use, then click Set High or Set
Low to label that point.
13 Calibrate all of the required channels.
14 Click Done.
15 To print the current calibration file, click Print.
16 To save the calibration file and return to the Template dialog box, click
Save & Go.
17 To use the calibration file you have created without saving it for future
use, click Go.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 5-19

Chapter 5: Recording EEG Files

External Calibration
Usually, calibration automatically switches into Calibration mode. However,
if you want to inject your own calibration signal into the amplifier instead of
using the amplifier’s internal calibration, you can disable the internal
calibration for the hardware. If you do this, you must connect an external
calibration device to the amplifier (headbox) inputs in order to provide a
calibration signal from an external device.

The External Calibration option only applies to amplifiers with Calibration mode,
such as LA MONT and GRASS amplifiers.

To enable external 1 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Programs > Stellate HARMONIE
calibration > Hardware Setup.
OR
From HARMONIE, choose Start > Hardware Setup.
2 At the Select and Configure Devices dialog box, click Cancel.
3 Choose Options > Advanced.
The Advanced dialog box displays.

4 Select the External Calibration Enabled check box.

5 Click OK.

Programming Annotations
An annotation is an event that marks a specific time on the signals using a
yellow vertical line. The event name appears vertically on the annotation. In
the Observer, you can place preprogrammed and free-text (user-definable)
annotations on your recording to mark events.
To program an annotation, you enter an event name and assign the keyboard
key that will be used to quickly insert the annotation. User-definable
annotations are also assigned a key. (You enter the text string when you place
the annotation).
You must program annotations before you start the Recorder (you cannot
program them in Observer).

5-20 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating or Editing Recording Templates

EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMMED ANNOTATIONS

Annotation Key Special Annotation Key

EYES OPEN O BODYPOS: SUPINE S
EYES CLOSED C BODYPOS: LEFT L
ALERTED A BODYPOS: RIGHT R
DROWSY D BODYPOS: PRONE P
ASLEEP S
HYPERVENTILATION H
1 MINUTE HV 1
2 MINUTE HV 2
3 MINUTE HV 3
END OF
E
HYPERVENTILATION
MOVEMENT M
SWALLOW W
(User Definable) U

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 5-21

Chapter 5: Recording EEG Files

To program 1 At the Template dialog box, click the Annotations Setup button.
annotations The Define Annotation Keys dialog box displays.

2 Enter the programmed annotations.

You can program up to 18 annotation keys. The Annotation field can
contain up to 40 characters. In the Key field, only use the numbers 1-9, or
A-Z.
You can change the Key field for user-definable annotations.
3 Click OK.

Photic Stimulator Protocols

If you want to use a photic stimulator while you record, you must select a
photic stimulator device in the Hardware Setup function. For more
information, see “Selecting the Photic Stimulator Device” on page 2-20.
To use a photic stimulator, you must enter at least one protocol. A protocol is a
set of steps that describe the periods of photic stimulation. Each step requires
a frequency and a duration.
For example, Protocol A has three steps: 10 Hz for 20 seconds, OFF (i.e. 0 Hz,
or no stimulation) for 15 seconds and 20 Hz for 10 seconds.

5-22 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating or Editing Recording Templates

In the Observer, you play a protocol to drive the photic stimulator. The steps
are executed in the order you arrange them when you enter the protocol. To
insert a break between steps, add a step with the frequency set to “OFF”.

In the Observer, you cannot pause a protocol and then continue.

If you want to have more control over the interval between steps, you should
put the steps in separate protocols. In Observer, you play each of these one-
step protocols when you are ready.
Protocol A in the previous example can be broken into Protocol A1 (10 Hz for
20 seconds) and Protocol A2 (20 Hz for 10 seconds). Now you can control the
length of the break.
To control the length of a step, you enter a duration (in seconds). However,
you may not know how long you want to play a step. In this case, you can
select “Manual Stop” from the Duration list. If you use “Manual Stop”, the
period of photic stimulation continues until you stop the protocol.

You should only use “Manual Stop” for a one step protocol. Otherwise, the
subsequent steps will never be played.
A Photic Stimuli Protocol contains a series of stimuli, called protocol steps.

To set up a photic 1 At the Template dialog box, select the Photic check box.
stimuli protocol 2 Click the corresponding Setup button.
The Photic Stimuli Protocol Editor dialog box displays.

3 You can select, add, or delete a protocol.

• Select a protocol from the Protocol Name list.
• To add a new protocol, click New.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 5-23

Chapter 5: Recording EEG Files

The Protocol Name dialog box displays.

Enter a name for the new protocol, then click OK.

• To delete a protocol, select it from the Protocol Name list, then click
Delete.
Setting up the protocol steps
4 Under Protocol Steps, you can add, insert, and edit steps.
• To add a step (at the end of the list), click Add.
• To insert a step (above the selected step), click Insert.
• To edit a step, double-click it (or click Edit).
The Edit Photic Stimuli Protocol Step dialog box displays.

5 Select a frequency (in Hz) from the Frequency list.

OR
To create a protocol step without photic stimulation, select OFF.
6 Select a time (in seconds) from the Duration list.
OR
Select Manual Stop.
7 Click OK to return to the Photic Stimuli Protocol Editor dialog box.
8 To delete a step, select it and click Delete.
9 When you have finished, click OK.
You will return to the Template dialog box.
10 Save the template to use this protocol for other recordings.
For more information, see “Photic Stimulator” on page 6-17.

5-24 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating or Editing Recording Templates

Manual Sample Delay

In Observer you can start and stop recording as often as you want. By default,
the Recorder starts storing the signals to the hard disk drive when you click
Record. In this case, the signals that are displayed before the start of a manual
sample are not stored. Clicking Record again ends the manual sample.
If the Sample Sections feature is activated, a period of these signals is stored
with the manual sample. Before you start the Recorder, you can set the length
of this period (also known as the delay).

Delay

At this time, you click the Record At this time, you click the Record
button to start the sample button to end the sample

Using the Sample Sections feature enables you to record the signals that lead
up to an event. For example, a technician notices the start of a seizure, then
starts the recording. The delay before the sample includes the important
signals leading up to the seizure.

This type of sample is marked in the EEG file as a Sample Section type of
recorded section.

Push Button Samples

The Push Button feature is another way to record a sample. When a patient
(or technician) presses on a Push Button device, a period of signals before and
after the Push Button is recorded as a sample. The Push Button device can
also be activated on-screen by clicking PushButton on the Main toolbar.
Because a patient can use a Push Button device, this feature can also be used
as a remote event marker. If the recording is continuous, each Push Button
section marks a separate event (i.e. the Push Button Detection) that can be
categorized when the EEG file is reviewed.
A Push Button sample has a fixed length, therefore you can also use it to mark
an event with a known duration. Instead of placing an annotation at the start
and end of the event, you simply click PushButton once at the start. When the
continuous recording is reviewed, the embedded Push Button Section is easy
to find.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 5-25

Chapter 5: Recording EEG Files

Before you start the Recorder, you can set the length of the two periods, also
known as the delays.

'Before' Delay 'After' Delay

At this time, the patient presses

on the Push Button device

It is not necessary to stop this type of sample; it stops at the end of the delay
after the Push Button.

To use this feature with a Push Button device, you must configure the device in
the Hardware Setup function. Then you must activate the Push Button feature in
the Template dialog box.
For details on configuring and testing a Digital Input/Output (DIO) device, see
“Selecting the Recording Device” on page 2-13.

This type of sample is marked in the EEG file as a Push Button Section type of
recorded section.

Automatic Recording
There are two types of automatic recording:
• A recording scheduled to automatically start and stop at specific times,
resulting in one recorded section. (The “Sample Section” type of recorded
section is used).
• A recording scheduled with a start time, stop time, section length, and
interval between sections. This results in multiple recorded sections of
equal length. (The “Scheduled Section” type of recorded section is used).
To use this type of automatic recording, you must use the Scheduled
Section Processor. For more information, see “Scheduled Section
Processor” on page 10-11.
Usually, these two types of recording are not used together.
Figure 5.1 One Automatic Section

Start Time Stop Time

You do not need to use both the Automatic Start and Automatic Stop times. For
example, you can set only the stop time and then start the recording manually in
the Observer.

5-26 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Creating or Editing Recording Templates

Restart New Recording Session

The Restart Recording feature simplifies performing long-term recordings. It
enables you to automatically restart recording sessions at regular intervals,
based on the parameters specified in the recording template. For example, it is
possible to monitor a patient over several days, restarting the recording
session every 24 hours.
HARMONIE EEG files are restricted to 24 hours. The Restart Recording
feature is particularly important for long-term digital video recording under
Windows 98, since digital video files cannot exceed 4 GB in size (7 hours of
continuous video recording at regular video capture rate). To record longer
periods of digital video, the recording must be restarted.
Observer automatically reapplies the current set of display filters whenever
an automatic restart is performed. Each time the recording is restarted, new
SIG and video files are created. New file names are assigned based on the
original filename, with a suffix appended to indicate the number of restarts.
For example, the recording SMITH.SIG will be restarted as SMITH_01.SIG. A
subsequent restart will be saved as SMITH_02.SIG.

The maximum video length on NTFS formatted drives is 24 hours. The maximum
video file size on FAT32 formatted drives is 4 GB (or a length of 7 hours at
regular video capture rate).

When database problems interrupt the Restart Recording function during

recording, you can use a mobile database.

Timecode Generator
Analog patient video can be recorded with a time code signal so the EEG file
can be reviewed using analog Video Synchronization mode. The time code is
a video frame number in the format of hours, minutes, seconds, and frames
(HH:MM:SS:FF).
To record a time code signal, the output from the video camera is encoded by
a time code generator (TCG) that is connected to the computer recording the
EEG file. The computer sets the time code on the video to be synchronized
with the time in the EEG file.
Check that the video camera is working properly. You can view the video
output in another window (using Video-in-a-Window) or using a stand-alone
video monitor. After the Observer starts, check that the time code is
displaying on the video. The video frame numbers should match the current
time displayed on the Time and Status toolbar.
Select the Use Timecode Generator check box to activate your TCG.

If you only superimpose the time of day directly on the video image (e.g. using
MULTIM Video Print Screen), you cannot use Video Synchronization mode when
you review the EEG file. Only video recorded with a time code signal can be
reviewed using this mode.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 5-27

Chapter 5: Recording EEG Files

Configure the Time Code Generator in the Hardware Setup function.

You should start recording video (on the Recording VCR) before you start
recording EEG signals to disk. You should also stop recording EEG signals
before you stop recording video.
For more information about the analog Video Synchronization mode, see
“Reviewing Patient Analog Video” on page 8-43.

Special Digitizing Features

When using an EEG device that is capable of high-speed playback (e.g. an FM
Instrumentation Tape Recorder), you need to set the Speed-Up Factor value
to match the speed of the device. For real-time recording, the speed-up factor
is always 1.0.
When you enable this feature, digitizing actually proceeds at a higher
frequency, so the signal is filtered, down-sampled and then stored at the
original base frequency.
For example, the base frequency (for a recording montage) is 128 Hz. The
digitizing actually proceeds at 256 Hz. The Recorder performs online digital
filtering with a 15-point Finite Impulse Response (FIR) filter. This filter
attenuates the signal by half at a frequency that is ¼ of the digitizing
frequency (e.g. 64 Hz). After the filtering, it is possible to retain only 128
samples per second per channel for writing to disk.
Click the Special Digitizing Features Setup button to specify the speed-up
factor. This opens the Digitizing Parameters dialog box.

Traces as Observed
You have the option of changing the Station option. It controls whether the
Traces as Observed feature marks display changes from all Observer
workstations connected to the recording session, or only from the local
workstation where the EEG file is being recorded.
To only display changes from the local Observer workstation, select Mark
Changes From Local Observer Stations.
To display changes from all Observer workstations, select Mark Changes
From All Observer Stations.

Processors
To use processors online, you must activate and configure them. For most
processors, you can specify start and stop times (i.e. for the processing) in the
settings file. If these times are not specified, the entire recording session is
processed.

5-28 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Appending Recordings to Existing Files

Appending Recordings to Existing Files

Recordings can be appended to an existing signal file. The same template that
was used for the original recording will be used for each appended recording.
There is no limit to the number of recordings that can be appended to a file, as
long as the total time span does not exceed 24 hours.
While a recording can be appended to a file containing digital video, you can
only append the signal file, not digital video.

If you want to append a recording, it must be done within 24 hours of the original
recording, as the total time span of the recording cannot exceed 24 hours.
Digital video data cannot be appended to recordings containing digital video.
This feature can be used for the consecutive naps that make up a multiple sleep
latency test (MSLT). You can append the naps into a single file.

To append a 1 Show the Patients view in Files/Reports format.

recording to an 2 Select a file from the list
existing file 3 Click Append.
If digital video is selected in the original recording template, the following
message displays: “Please note that digital video data will not be
appended to the recording. However, any digital video segments that
were in the initial recording will remain. Do you still want to continue?”
Click Yes to continue, or click No to cancel.
4 The Recorder and Observer windows open. (The recording template does
not appear, since HARMONIE loads the same recording template that was
used to record the original file).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 5-29

Chapter 5: Recording EEG Files

5-30 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

CHAPTER 6: Observer

This chapter explains how Observer is used to control the recording session.
In Observer, you can view the signals and then start and stop writing to the
hard disk drive at any time. You can view the signals using a reformatting
montage and filters in the active window, or in a LookBack window. You can
also use the photic stimulator and place annotations while recording.
This chapter covers:
• Introduction to Observer
• Other Ways to Start Observer
• Scroll and Sweep Modes
• Changing Settings from the Channel Bar
• Observer Toolbars
• Measuring Impedance
• Recording to Disk
• Placing Annotations
• Marking Hyperventilation Events
• Photic Stimulator
• Electrical Stimulation
• Reformatting Montages
• Connecting to Other Stations
• Viewing the Recording Log
• Viewing the Recorder Window
• Generating Reports Online
• Recovering from System Failure
• Exiting the Observer
• Exiting the Recorder

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 6-1

Chapter 6: Observer

Introduction to Observer
The Recorder reads and stores the signals from the data acquisition board.
When you begin recording, Observer starts automatically.
In Observer, two features affect the recording.
• Only the sections that you record are stored. (This includes sample and
automatic sections).
• Annotations and other events are stored with the signals.
Other Observer features do not affect the recording. Instead, they help you
view the signals in various ways.
• You can change how the signals are displayed.
• You can view different channels by using a reformatting montage.
• You can apply filters to the displayed signals.
• You can view the recorded signals in the LookBack window.
You cannot scroll in the Observer’s Real Time Recording window. Therefore,
you can only see one page of signals. To view the recorded signals that came
before this page, you can open the LookBack window.
You can start and stop writing to the hard disk drive whenever you want.
After you have finished recording, you can exit the Observer and Recorder at
the same time.
You can also view a recording session currently in progress on another
workstation.

To use Observer 1 After starting a recording session, the Observer window will open,
displaying all the channel signals.
You can select either the Scroll mode or the Sweep mode for displaying the
signals.
2 If you are using an amplifier that allows computer controlled impedance
measurement, you can click the Impedance Mode button on the Main
toolbar.
OR
Choose View > Impedance Mode.
Impedance (ETEST) mode sets the amplifier into an impedance testing
mode that is equivalent to pressing the corresponding (Ohm) button on
the amplifier.
3 If you are using an amplifier that allows computer controlled calibration,
you can click the Calibration Mode button on the Main toolbar.
OR
Choose View > Calibration Mode.

6-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Other Ways to Start Observer

If you have an amplifier that allows computer-controlled calibration, you do

not need to set your amplifier to ‘Calibration mode’. When you click the
Calibrate button, the amplifier will automatically go into Calibration mode.
4 To display the signals more clearly, you can increase or decrease the
channel sensitivities, using the Sensitivity toolbar.
The Channels and Sensitivities dialog box lists all of the channels in the
current montage.
5 Before (and after) you start recording the signals to disk, you can measure
electrode impedances.
6 To start and stop the recording, click Record on the main toolbar.
7 To add annotations while you record, press the key that was programmed
for the annotation.
8 To use a Photic Stimulator, select a protocol and then click Play.
9 To exit the Observer and Recorder, choose File > Exit.
10 In the dialog box that displays, select Exit OBSERVER and RECORDER
functions, then click OK.

Other Ways to Start Observer

When a recording session is started, the Observer window automatically
opens. This is the usual method for starting Observer.
However, there are other ways to start the Observer. For example, if you want
to view a recording session that is already started, you can start Observer
from the Recorder. This method can only be used at the Recording station that
is running the Recorder.

To start the 1 If the Recorder is already started, maximize the Recorder window by
Observer from clicking the Stellate Recorder button on the Windows taskbar.
Recorder 2 Click Start Observer.
The Observer window displays the local recording session.
The Observer can also be started from the Windows Start menu.

To start Observer 1 From the Windows Start menu, choose Programs > Stellate HARMONIE
from the Start > Observer.
menu 2 Connect to an ongoing recording session. see “Connecting to Other
Recording Stations” below.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 6-3

Chapter 6: Observer

Scroll and Sweep Modes

The Observer window displays all of the channel signals. In the Real Time
Recording window, there are two viewing options you can choose: Scroll
mode and Sweep mode. The Scroll mode smoothly scrolls the signals across
the screen, moving from the right side of the screen to the left. The Sweep
mode displays the signals moving across the screen from left to right.

The Scroll mode may not operate properly if your system does not have the
required speed, Video Card memory, screen resolution, or color. See “Minimum
System Requirements” on page 1-8.
Also, when other programs are running at the same time as Observer, smooth
scrolling may be jerky.
The scroll mode is used locally; it cannot be used when connecting to a remote
workstation.

To activate the 1 Start the Hardware Setup function.

Scroll mode 2 In the Select and Configure Devices dialog box, click Cancel.
3 Choose Options > Advanced.
The Advanced dialog box displays.

4 Select the Smooth Scrolling Enabled check box, then click OK.
5 Exit Hardware Setup.

To use the Scroll In Observer, you can view the channels signals using the Scroll mode or the
and Sweep Sweep mode (default):
modes • To use smooth scrolling, choose View > Scroll Mode.
If you have not enabled smooth scrolling from Hardware Setup, this
option will not be available.
• To use the sweep view, choose View > Sweep Mode.

6-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 LookBack Window

LookBack Window
In the LookBack window you can move back and forth through the recording,
and place annotations. The numerical value that corresponds to the sample
intersecting with the major time lines (1, 2, or 3 seconds) can be displayed on
any trace, and events that have been marked by processors and the Traces as
Observed feature can be displayed. The extent of these events can be an
instant in time (e.g. annotation), or a duration of time (e.g. desaturation
events).

You cannot delete annotations in the LookBack window once they are entered
(Reviewer must be used).
You can also use reformatting montages and filters in this window. All of the
changes you make to the LookBack window are independent from the Real
Time Recording window.
Tools such as the Amplitude-Time cursor and the Overlay cursor let you view
the signal traces in different ways, and compare them to one another.
The time it takes for signals in the Real Time Recording window to appear in
the LookBack window equals the longest of these three delays:
• Default delay of one minute
• Delay Before Manual Samples (from the settings for Sample Section)
• Delay Before Push Button (from the settings for Push Button Section)
For more information on changing these settings, see “Creating or Editing
Recording Templates” on page 5-5.
Recorder saves the necessary duration of signals in memory before writing to
disk. The LookBack window only shows the signals that have been written to
disk.
For example, the Manual Sample delay is two minutes and the Push Button
delay is three minutes. After placing an annotation in the Real Time
Recording window, it takes three minutes before the annotation appears in
the LookBack window.

The color-coded horizontal bars at the top of the window are called recorded
section bars. The three basic types of recorded sections are Calibration Section
(red), Sample Section (green), and Push Button Section (cyan). For more
information, see “Working with Events” on page 8-14.

To open the Click the LookBack button on the Main toolbar.

LookBack OR
window Choose Window > LookBack.
This window can be moved and resized just like the Real Time Recording
window, using standard window controls. You can also tile these windows
vertically or horizontally.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 6-5

Chapter 6: Observer

Moving Around the LookBack Window

In Observer you can open a LookBack window to view data recorded earlier
during the current recording session.
There are several ways to move around in the LookBack window. By moving
around, you can view different pages of the recorded trace.
• The length of the scroll bar at the bottom represents the length of the
recorded file. Clicking various parts of the scroll bar displays different
pages of the file.

Show Previous Page Show Next Page

Move Back One Record Drag to a Different Page Move Forward One Record

A page is one window of traces. A record equals 64 data samples (e.g. 0.32
seconds for a 200 Hz signal).
• You can also use the keyboard to move around:
PAGE UP - Show Previous Page
PAGE DOWN - Show Next Page
HOME - Go to First Page
END - Go to Last Page
LEFT ARROW - Move Forward 1 Record
RIGHT ARROW - Move Back 1 Record
• The Find in List feature and Find feature also help you move around the
recorded file.
The Find in List feature can be used to find an event by name.
The Find feature can be used to find an event by event group.

To find an event 1 Make the LookBack window the active window.

by name
2 Then click the View Events button on the Find toolbar.
OR
Choose View > Find in List.

6-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 LookBack Window

The Find in List dialog box displays.

3 When you click on an event, the LookBack window scrolls to the page that
includes the event. You can also use the keyboard to move through the list
of events. Press HOME, END, PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN, the LEFT
ARROW key, or the RIGHT ARROW key.
4 Click Close when you have finished.

To find an event 1 Click the Find button on the Goto toolbar.

by event group OR
Choose View > Find.
The Find dialog box displays.

2 Select an event group from the Find what list.

The list includes <Any item>, <Section Mark>, and all of the event groups
defined in the recording’s Event Group List.
<Section Mark> finds selected sections, not recorded sections.
3 Choose the direction that you want to search for the event by selecting Left
or Right.
4 Click Find Next.
The window scrolls to the page that includes the event. If there is no event
in the specified direction, the speaker beeps.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 6-7

Chapter 6: Observer

Once you have specified the search criteria (i.e. the event group to find),
you can use the Find Next and Find Previous features to move to another
event.

Changing Settings from the Channel Bar

You can select the channels that you want to display, and you can change the
following channel properties: sensitivity, polarity, baseline, digital readouts,
width, and grid.

To change 1 Right-click on a channel in the channel bar.

channel settings You can select one of the following options from the menu that appears:
from the channel • Sensitivities
bar • Add
• Remove
• Double Width
• Grid
• Negative Up
• Digital Readout
• Baseline
• Channel Properties

Changing the channel sensitivity.
1 Choose Sensitivities and select a sensitivity value from the list.
OR
Choose Sensitivities > Edit.
The Edit Channel Sensitivity dialog box displays.

2 Change the value in the Enter new sensitivity box, then click OK.

Displaying/hiding channels.
• To add a channel to the channel bar, choose Add and select a channel
from the list.
• To display all of the channels, choose Add > Add All.
• To remove a channel, choose Remove.

Changing the channel width.
6-8 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide
 Changing Settings from the Channel Bar

The width of a channel is either Normal (the default) or Double.

1 To change the channel width, choose Double Width.
A check mark appears beside the menu command.
2 To return the channel width to Normal, choose Double Width again.

Displaying/hiding grid lines.
1 To display the grid lines, choose Grid On.
A check mark appears beside the menu command.
2 To hide the grid lines, choose Grid On again.

Changing channel polarity.
1 To change the polarity of a channel to Positive Up, choose Negative Up
to clear the check mark.
2 To change the polarity back to Negative Up, choose Negative Up again.

Displaying/hiding digital readouts.
1 To display digital readouts for the channel, choose Digital Readout.
A check mark appears beside the menu command.
2 To hide the digital readouts, choose Digital Readout again.

Changing channel baseline.
1 Choose Baseline.
The Edit channel baseline dialog box displays.

2 Change the value in the Enter new baseline value box, then click OK.

Changing channel settings.
1 Choose Channel Properties.
The Channel Properties dialog box displays.
2 Make your changes and click OK.
For more information, see “To change channel settings from the toolbar”
on page 7-6.
The Sensitivity toolbar can also be used to change channel settings. When
you use the toolbar, you can change sensitivities for all of the channels, or the
channels of a specific type. The toolbar list includes all of the channel types in
the current montage. (These types were set when the montage was defined).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 6-9

Chapter 6: Observer

Observer Toolbars
There are eleven toolbars to help you use Observer:
• Time & Status toolbar
• Stop Watch toolbar
• Annotation toolbar
• Main toolbar
• Sensitivity toolbar
• Photic toolbar
• Filter toolbar
• Cursor toolbar
• Hypnogram toolbar (only available if you are viewing an EEG file
containing a hypnogram)
• Digital Readout toolbar
• Find toolbar

To display/hide a 1 Choose View > Select Toolbars.

toolbar The Toolbar List dialog box displays.

2 You can display or hide toolbars:

• To display all toolbars, click Check All.
• To hide all toolbars, click Clear All.
• To display a toolbar, select the appropriate toolbar check box.
• To hide a currently visible toolbar, clear the toolbar check box.
3 Click OK.

6-10 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Measuring Impedance

Measuring Impedance
Before and during the recording, you can check the electrode impedances.
The procedure for measuring impedance depends on the EEG device you are
using.
If you are using an analog EEG device, read the electrode impedances using
your impedance meter. If you are using an amplifier that allows
computer-controlled impedance measurement, you can view impedances in
the Impedance window.

In Observer, Impedance (E-TEST) Mode sets the amplifier into an

impedance testing mode, which is equivalent to pressing the corresponding
(Ohm) button on the device.
Special annotations are inserted in the recording to indicate the start and end
of an E-TEST section. The ending annotation includes the electrode
impedance values at the end of the measurement cycle.

When using Schwarzer amplifiers, channels 3, 4, 7, and 8 must always be

attached to the patient.
The signals from channels 3 and 4 are measured versus the reference signal
(In3 + In4) / 2.

LA MONT Amplifiers
The actual impedance measurement made at each electrode is:
ZELEC - ZREF
where ‘ZELEC’ is the impedance of the electrode and ‘ZREF’ is the impedance of
the reference electrode for the channel. For bipolar channels, the impedance
measurement is made relative to each electrode of the pair. That is:
Zch = Z(+) - Z(-)
Generally, the impedance of the GND electrode (ZGND) will not significantly
affect the above measurements, but the GND electrode MUST be connected
for the E-TEST function to work properly. The REF and GND impedances
CANNOT be measured directly by this method.
If most or all channels display high impedance values, then the REF and/or
GND electrode needs to be attended to (i.e. re-gelled, or the skin abraded
under the electrode).
It is critical to get the REF as low as possible because all measurements are
relative to it. The GND is not as critical, but should not be left at a very high
value. A high impedance of the REF electrode will result in observed or
measured signal amplitude that pertains more to the REF impedance than to
the individual electrode.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 6-11

Chapter 6: Observer

To measure 1 Click the Impedance Mode button on the Main toolbar.

impedance OR
Choose View > Impedance Mode.
The amplifier is put into the Electrode Test Mode.
The Impedance Testing window displays.

The recording montage channels are listed in the Impedance Testing

window (even if you are currently displaying a reformatting montage in
the Observer window). Only EEG, EOG, and SEEG type channels are
listed.
2 You can choose to view the channels either as a head view and list or as a
list only.
The head view contains the following electrodes:

Pg1 Fp1 Fpz Fp2 Pg2

F7 F3 Fz F4 F8
T3 C3 Cz C4 T4
T5 P3 Pz P4 T6
A1 O1 Oz O2 A2

Electrodes that are not in the head view are displayed in the list view.

6-12 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Calibration Mode

• Select Head and List to view both.

• Select List Only to view only a list of the channels.
3 While you are recording signals to disk, you can click Annotate to store the
impedance values in an annotation.
4 When you have finished, click Close to stop impedance testing and return
to the Observer window.

In Reviewer, you can view the impedance values in the annotations. To do this,
select the impedance annotation with the Event Properties tool and then read
the values in the Comments field.

Calibration Mode
In Observer, you can put the amplifier into Calibration Mode in order to
check the actual gain calibration.

It is recommended that you perform this calibration procedure prior to every

recording to ensure that the calibration correction factors match the hardware
that is set up for the recording.

To use the 1 In Observer, click the Calibration Mode button .

Calibration Mode OR
Choose View > Calibration Mode.
The amplifier is put into the Calibration Mode.
2 You can open the LookBack window, and use the Amplitude-Time cursor
to measure the voltage.

Recording to Disk
When the Recorder starts, it automatically reads the channel signals from the
data acquisition board. The Observer window displays the signals that the
Recorder reads. (The main Observer window is called the Real Time
Recording window).

The Recorder does not automatically store the signals to the hard disk drive;
you must start the recording.
This rule does not apply if you have scheduled automatic recording. See
“Automatic Recording” on page 6-14.

To start and stop
Click the Record button on the Main toolbar.
recording to disk The button becomes red when recording is started and dimmed when the
recording is stopped.
OR
Choose Record > Record to Disk.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 6-13

Chapter 6: Observer

A check mark is shown beside this command when recording is started

and it is not shown when the recording is stopped.
While recording to disk, the gray wipe bar becomes red. (This thick
vertical line wipes across the old page of signals as a new page of signals
is displayed).

You can start and stop recording as many times as you want. When you stop
recording to disk, Recorder does not automatically stop.

Trace Restore
The Trace Restore feature temporarily shuts off all input from certain
amplifiers. (Currently, the GRASS Model 15 and Schwarzer amplifiers
support this feature). This is useful when there is a great deal of signal noise,
or interference from an outside source. All channels are reset to their baseline
and do not enter the amplifier until the Trace Restore feature is turned off.

To temporarily 1 Choose View > Trace Restore.

turn off all inputs All signals will become flat lines onscreen and are no longer recorded.
using Trace 2 To restore the signals, choose Trace Restore again.
Restore
Automatic Recording
If you have scheduled automatic recording in the Template dialog box, you
do not have to start the recording. In this case, the Record button is selected
and automatically becomes red.
The only way to stop a Scheduled Section recording is to exit the Recorder;
you cannot click Record to interrupt it.

Push Button Feature

The Push Button feature is another way to record a sample. When the patient
(or the technician) presses on a Push Button device, a period of signals before
and after the Push Button is recorded.

To use this feature, you must enable it in the Template dialog box before you
start the Recorder. See “Creating or Editing Recording Templates” on page 5-5.

The Push Button feature can be used while the signals are already being
recorded to disk (either automatically or manually). The Push Button Section is
marked as usual. The embedded recorded section can be used to locate the time
period when the EEG file is reviewed.

6-14 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Placing Annotations

To use the Push 1 While the Observer is running, you (or the patient) can press on the Push
Button feature Button device.
OR

Click the PushButton button on the Main toolbar.

OR
Choose Record > Push Button.
For a moment, the Push Button button becomes cyan. The Record button
becomes red when recording is started and gray when the recording is
stopped.
While recording to disk, the gray wipe bar becomes red. (This thick
vertical line wipes across the old page of signals as a new page of signals
is displayed).
2 To stop recording a Push Button Section, you must exit the Recorder; you
cannot click Record on the Main toolbar to interrupt it.

Placing Annotations
You can place programmed and free-text (user-definable) annotations on your
recording to mark events. The programmed annotations are set up in the
recording template. You must specify the Annotations when you set up the
recording template parameters if you want to use programmed annotations.
(For more information, see “Programming Annotations” on page 5-20). Free-
text annotations are entered as you use them.

To place annotations, you must be recording to disk.

You cannot erase annotations after they are placed using the Observer.
However, you can remove them later when you are using Reviewer.
The keyboard or the Annotation toolbar can be used to place annotations in
the Real Time Recording window or the LookBack window. The Clear
Annotation button on the right is used to cancel a selection if you decide not
to place an annotation using the toolbar.

To place a
Press the key that was programmed for the annotation.
programmed The annotation is placed immediately.
annotation
Select an annotation from the Annotation toolbar list, then click the trace
where you want to place the annotation.
For information about creating programmed annotations, see “Programming
Annotations” on page 5-20.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 6-15

Chapter 6: Observer

To place a free- 1 [Keyboard] Press the 0 key (or the key that you programmed to
text annotation correspond to a free-text annotation).
OR
[Toolbar] Select the last annotation from the Annotation toolbar list.
The User-defined Annotation dialog box displays.

2 Enter text for the annotation. You can also enter comments in the space
provided below.
3 Click OK.
[Keyboard] The annotation is placed at the point where you pressed the
free-text annotation key.
4 [Toolbar] Click the trace where you want to place the annotation.
Annotations appear as yellow vertical lines with the text written from top to
bottom.

Marking Hyperventilation Events

Hyperventilation events can be inserted in the Observer during recording.
After a patient is asked to hyperventilate, the Hyperventilation Event feature
is started from the Photic menu or toolbar. HARMONIE will begin marking
the hyperventilation event using a duration ruler (10 second intervals are
labelled).
When the Hyperventilation event is stopped, HARMONIE starts marking a
Post-Hyperventilation Event in a different color. This event runs for two
minutes unless you manually stop it.
Before recording, you must enable the Hyperventilation marker by selecting
the Photic and Hyperventilation check box at the Template dialog box.

A Hyperventilation event cannot be inserted unless you are recording to disk.

To mark a 1 Click the Hyperventilation Event button on the Photic toolbar.

Hyperventilation OR
event Choose Photic > Hyperventilation Event.

6-16 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Photic Stimulator

The Hyperventilation Event marker will appear at the bottom of the

Observer window.
2 Select Hyperventilation Marker again to stop the event marker.
The Post-Hyperventilation Event marker will start. This will run for two
minutes, then stop automatically.
To manually stop the Post-Hyperventilation marker, select
Hyperventilation Event again.

Photic Stimulator
You can play protocols to drive a photic stimulator. The photic stimulator
must be enabled, and the protocols must be set up when you specify the
recording session parameters.
When you play a protocol, each of the steps is executed in sequence. The start
and end of each step is automatically annotated, indicating the time when the
photic flash was triggered. The Photic toolbar is used to play protocols.

When a photic protocol contains frequencies greater than 50 Hz, the Schwarzer
FS-14P photic stimulator may flash at an unpredictable rate, instead of the
expected frequency.
When a stimulation interval is greater than 50 seconds, the Schwarzer FS-14P
may stop flashing after 50 seconds, regardless of the specified interval.

Before you play a protocol, make sure the photic stimulator interface is
connected.
You cannot enter photic stimulator protocols while in Observer.
For more information, see “Photic Stimulator Protocols” on page 5-22.

To play a protocol 1 Select a protocol name from the Photic toolbar list.
OR
Choose a protocol name from the Photic menu.

2 Click the Start Photic Stimulator with current protocol button on the
Photic toolbar.
OR
Choose Photic > Play.
The Play button becomes green when a protocol is playing, otherwise it is
gray.
Each step is played and annotated.
3 To stop the protocol before it ends, click Start Photic Stimulator with
current protocol on the Photic toolbar again.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 6-17

Chapter 6: Observer

OR
Choose Photic > Play.

If you set the duration of a one-step protocol to “Manual Stop”, the period of
photic stimulation continues until you stop the protocol.

Electrode Switching for Electrical Stimulation

When the Schwarzer 66-ch EEG headbox is used, electrical stimulation can be
performed by connecting/disconnecting a pair of electrodes to an external
stimulator. This can only be done on the recording station.
When two 66-ch headboxes are used (128-ch system), the selected electrodes
can be from either headbox.
In order for this feature to be enabled, the Schwarzer 66-ch EEG headbox
must be set up on your system. See Appendix A, “Hardware Setup” for
additional details.

When using two 66-ch headboxes, you must make sure the selected pair of
electrodes are connected to the stimulator. If the electrodes are not connected to
the stimulator, stimulation is not possible.

When two headboxes are interconnected (128-ch EEG), one stimulator’s

stimulation signal can be applied to both headboxes by connecting the positive
stimulator output to headbox 1, and the negative stimulator output to headbox 2.
You can specify a time-out interval, which will automatically disconnect the
electrodes from the stimulator at the end of the interval.
Electrical stimulation is disabled while the system is in ETEST or CAL mode.

Do not run an electrical stimulation while the system is in Impedance Mode or

Calibration Mode, since this will result in invalid data.

The stimulator is not under software control. It must be operated by the

attending physician.

To perform 1 Ensure that the stimulator is connected to the proper jacks on the
Electrical amplifier.
Stimulation 2 Turn the external stimulator off.

3 Click the Electric Stimulation button on the Main toolbar.

OR
Choose View > Electric Stimulation.

6-18 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Electrode Switching for Electrical Stimulation

The Stimulator Connection dialog box displays.

4 Under Stimulator Input Electrodes, you can select any pair of channels in
the recording montage from the RED (+) and BLUE (-) lists.
This allows the corresponding electrodes to be connected to an external
stimulator at any moment, through two internal relays (red and blue input
jacks on the 66-ch headbox).

Stimulation will not be possible if you select input 3, 4, Resp, MARK, PHOT, or
any DC input.

You can specify a time out interval by selecting the Auto-Disconnect check
box and entering the Duration in seconds.
At the end of this interval, the electrodes will automatically be
disconnected from the stimulator.
5 Click Connect to connect the selected electrodes to the stimulator.
6 Turn on the electrical stimulator.

You can mark Electric Stimulator annotations on the recording.
1 When you turn on the stimulator, click Start Annotation. “Start Electric
Stimulator” is written on the signal trace.
2 When the stimulator is disconnected, click Stop Annotation. “Stop
Electric Stimulator” is written on the signal trace.
7 If the Auto-Disconnect feature is disabled, click Disconnect.
8 Turn off the electrical stimulator.
9 When the session is finished, click Close.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 6-19

Chapter 6: Observer

Reformatting Montages
Channel traces are initially displayed using the recording montage. To
display the same data in another way, you can use a reformatting montage.

You can only use reformatting montages that are defined for the current
recording montage. You cannot create or edit reformatting montages in
Observer.
The channel traces can be viewed in the Real Time Recording or LookBack
window. For more information, see “LookBack Window” on page 6-5.

To use a 1 Select the window where you want to use the montage.
reformatting You can use montages in the Real Time Recording window, or the
montage LookBack window.
(To select a window, click inside the window or press CTRL+TAB until the
window becomes active).
2 From the Montage menu, choose the montage you want to use.
The new channels are displayed in the window (and a check mark appears
beside the menu command). The current setting is also displayed on the
status bar.

Connecting to Other Recording Stations

Using Observer, you can connect to any ongoing recording session on the
network. Observer can be connected to more than one station at a time, so you
do not have to disconnect from one recording before connecting to another
station.

Recording Workstation Reviewing Workstation

Recorder Observer

Observer

In this diagram, the Observer on the Reviewing workstation is connected to

the Recorder on the Recording workstation. Either Observer can view and
control the recording session.
From Observer you can view a recording being performed at another
workstation on the network.

6-20 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Connecting to Other Recording Stations

Under certain circumstances, usually when the system is very busy and there is
a heavy network load, Observer may disconnect, which causes the window
displaying the waveforms to disappear, leaving an empty grey background. This
does not mean the recording has stopped, however Observer needs to be
reconnected manually. To do this, choose File > Connect. At the Connect dialog
box, select the appropriate Recording Station and then click Connect.

To connect to a 1 Choose File > Connect.

recording session The Connect dialog box displays.
on another
recording station

The workstations performing recordings are listed.

2 Use one of the following options:
• From the list, select the name of the computer you want to connect to.
The computer name will be entered in the Computer to connect to box.
• Select the Do not display recording station information check box.
Then, enter the computer name in the Computer to connect to box.
The recording station information is not displayed because this option
prevents the transfer of recording station information from the
HARMONIE database. Bypassing the selection process and entering the
name manually enables quicker connection to remote stations.
It is recommended when the network is congested, many stations are
recording, etcetera.
3 If you only want to display the data that has been written to disk by the
Recorder, select the Connect in LookBack mode check box.
4 Click Connect.
The Observer displays the Real Time Recording window for the specified
workstation.
OR
If you selected the Connect in LookBack mode check box in step 3, the
Observer displays the LookBack window for the specified workstation.
The current settings are saved each time the dialog box is used, and
become the default settings.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 6-21

Chapter 6: Observer

Viewing the Recording Log

As an EEG file is recorded, the Recorder keeps a log of various significant
times:
• When the session started
• When the recording starts and stops (manually or automatically)
• When the Observer stations connect and disconnect
• When a backup of the EEG file is made
• When the backup interval is changed
• When processors start and stop
• When video capture starts and stops
• Push Button events
After the EEG file is recorded, from the main HARMONIE window, you can
view the recording log information in the Standard Log report. For more
information, see “Generating Reports” on page 8-40.

The starts and stops for Scheduled Sections are not listed. You can view this log
from any Observer station.

To view the Choose Window > Recording Log.

Recording Log This window can be moved and resized just like the LookBack and Real Time
Recording windows, using standard window controls. You can also tile these
windows vertically or horizontally.

Viewing the Recorder Window

When you start the Recorder, its window is minimized. At the Recording
workstation, you can view the Recorder window to check the status of the
current recording session.
The information in the Recorder window includes:
• Patient Name - shows the name of the patient who is being recorded.
• Electrode Set - shows the name of the current electrode set.
• Recording Montage - shows the name of the recording montage that is
being used.
• Number of Connections - shows the total number of workstations that are
observing this recording session.
• Percent Load (Cur/Max) - shows the ratio of system resources currently
used (in %) to maximum system resources available (in %).
• Writing to Disk - indicates whether the Recorder is writing the signals to
disk (i.e. Yes/No).
• Current Time - shows the time of day (i.e. current system time).

6-22 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Viewing the Recorder Window

• Elapsed Time - shows the time since the recording session started.
• Mbytes Written - shows the amount of disk space used for the recording
session.
• Minutes Written - shows the duration of signals (in hh:mm:ss format) that
has been recorded to disk.
Most of the information displayed in the Recorder window is also available in
the Observer.

When the Recorder is running on a remote recording workstation, you cannot

view the function.

To view the Maximize the Recorder window by clicking the Stellate Recorder button on
Recorder window the Windows taskbar.

• Usually, the Observer is used to control the Recorder. However, you can
also start and stop recording to disk and exit the Recorder from the
Recorder window.
• The Recorder window also lists all of the channels in the recording
montage. You can view each of the signals by clicking the corresponding
entry in the Recording Montage Details list.
• Three other types of information can be reviewed in the Recorder window:

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 6-23

Chapter 6: Observer

Click View Template to display all current recording session parameters

(excluding the Photic Stimulator protocols).
The Current Connections box shows the workstations that are observing
the recording session.
You can review the recording log in the Special Run-Time Messages box.

Generating Reports Online

When you create a report in Observer, only the reports that can be generated
online are available.

To create a report 1 Choose File > Report.

online The Create Report dialog box displays.

2 Select a template from the Template list.

3 If your name is entered in the database, you can select it from the Author
list.
The Show templates supporting on-line operation only check box is
selected to show that only reports that can be generated online are
available in the Template list.
4 At the report, you can enter comments in the Comments field.
You can also write the report using a word processor, or import the data
from another document. To do this, copy the text by pressing CTRL+C,
then paste it in the Report Text field by pressing CTRL+V.
The Report Text field can accommodate up to 32K of text (32,000
characters).
5 You have the following options for saving the report:
• Choose File > Save.
The Save Report dialog box displays. You can change the default report
name.
Click OK. The report is saved to the database after the document is
closed.
• Choose File > Close or Exit. Your are prompted to save the changes. If
you click Yes, the report is saved to the database after the document is
closed. If you click No, the document closes without saving.
• Choose File > Save As.

6-24 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Recovering from System Failure

The Save As dialog box displays. You can change the file path and
name.
Click Yes. The file is saved outside the database.

Recovering from System Failure

While you are recording, the Recorder stores the signals to the hard disk
drive. For the security of the data, the EEG file is automatically closed at
regular intervals. All of the EEG and digital video data stored to disk before
this procedure can be recovered if the recording is interrupted by a system
failure (e.g. due to a power failure). However, it is not guaranteed that the
recovered EEG and digital video files will be free of defects.
If you are experiencing problems with your computer system, you may want
to decrease the interval. Otherwise, you should not change the default of 30
minutes.
After a recording is interrupted by a system failure, the Recover function will
register the EEG file (and digital video file) with the database using the latest
update to the file.
The backup interval is saved with the Recorder settings and not the Observer
settings. If Observer is connected to two recording sessions, the backup interval
for the session in the active window is changed.

To change the 1 In Observer, choose View > Options.

backup interval The Options dialog box displays.

2 Edit the Backup Interval for RECORDER field.

This time must be in hh:mm:ss format.
3 Click OK
If the previous recording was interrupted by a system failure, the Recover
function will automatically start when you click Record or Append.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 6-25

Chapter 6: Observer

To recover a file 1 The HARMONIE Recording Recovery – Restart dialog box displays.
when you start a
recording

2 To restart the computer and start the Recover function, click Restart the
computer.
The following Recording Recovery message displays.

3 Click Yes to continue.

If you click Postpone, the reboot will be postponed until you click Record
or Append again.
After the computer is restarted, the HARMONIE Recording Recovery –
Recover dialog box displays.

4 Click Recover to attempt to recover the session.

If you click Postpone, the file recovery will be postponed and the dialog
will reappear when you start a new recording.
You can also activate the Recover function from HARMONIE’s Tool menu.

6-26 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Recovering from System Failure

To recover a file 1 Choose Tools > Recover Recording.

If you clicked Postpone during the previous recovery, the HARMONIE
Recording Recovery – Restart dialog box displays.

2 Click Restart the computer.

The following Recording Recovery message displays.

Click Yes to continue.

After the computer restarts, the HARMONIE Recording Recovery –
Recover dialog box displays.

3 Click Recover.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 6-27

Chapter 6: Observer

Exiting the Observer

You can exit the Observer with or without exiting the (local) Recorder. If you
are connected to a remote workstation that is running the Recorder, you can
only exit the Observer.

The note on the Exit Observer window regarding the Online CSA window only
applies to SENSA users.

To exit Observer 1 Choose File > Exit.

The Exit OBSERVER dialog box displays.

2 Select one of the options, then click OK.

With the default setting, you exit both the Observer and Recorder.

Exiting the Recorder

You can exit the (local) Recorder without exiting the Observer. This can be
done when you want to connect to another workstation.

When the Recorder is running on a remote workstation, you cannot exit the
function.

To exit the 1 Choose File > Stop Recording.

Recorder A message displays.

2 Click Yes.
The Observer window remains open. You can connect to another
workstation.

6-28 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

CHAPTER 7: Observer and Reviewer
Tools

This chapter explains the Observer and Reviewer tools. Some of the tools are
common to both functions, while other tools can only be used by Observer or
Reviewer.
This chapter covers:
• Observer Tools
• Digital Readout Toolbar
• Stop Watch Toolbar
• Time and Status Toolbar
• Observer/Reviewer Tools
• Displaying Channels
• Observer/Reviewer Options
• Time Scale
• Time Stamp
• Clip Traces
• Applying Filters
• About Digital Filters
• Traces as Observed
• Analysis Tools
• Reviewer Tools
• Analysis Tools
• Bookmark Feature

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 7-1

Chapter 7: Observer and Reviewer Tools

Observer Tools
Digital Readout Toolbar
The Digital Readout toolbar displays the read-out of the current recorded
values for one to five channels. This is particularly useful for displaying
oxygen saturation values or values from other sensors. You can select the
channels for the Digital Readout toolbar from one or more montages.

To select the 1 Click Edit Digital Readout on the Digital Readout toolbar.
channels The Digital Readout Properties dialog box displays.
displayed on the
Digital Readout
toolbar

2 From the Maximum number of Readouts list, select the number of

readouts you want displayed on the toolbar.
3 In the Readout Assignments box, assign a channel to each readout by
selecting a readout. Then click Edit.
The Edit Readout Channel Assignment dialog box displays.

4 Select a channel from the list. Click OK to return to the Digital Readout
Properties dialog box.
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each readout.
6 Click OK when you have finished.

7-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Observer Tools

Stop Watch Toolbar

You can use the StopWatch toolbar to measure elapsed time during
recording. For example, you can measure time between events.

The StopWatch toolbar buttons:

Start Stopwatch

Stop Stopwatch

Reset Stopwatch

Time and Status Toolbar

The Time & Status toolbar shows the current system time in red. When
recording to disk, the toolbar shows in green the number of EEG minutes that
have been recorded. When digital video is recorded to disk, the toolbar shows
in green the number of DV minutes that have been recorded.

The system time is also displayed on the status bar.

You can check the status of the disk where you are recording.

To check the disk 1 In Observer, click Disk Status on the Time & Status toolbar.
status OR
Choose View > Disk Status.
The Disk Status dialog box displays.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 7-3

Chapter 7: Observer and Reviewer Tools

It lists the following:

Time - The time you opened the dialog box to check the disk status.
Min. EEG Recorded - The minutes of EEG written to disk.
Mb. EEG Recorded - The size of the EEG file written to disk.
Min. Video Recorded - The minutes of digital video written to disk.
Mb. Video Recorded - The size of the digital video file written to disk.
Mb. Free - The free space remaining on the disk where the EEG and/or
digital video are being written.
2 Review the information, then click OK.

Inline Pulse Oximeter Toolbar

For systems equipped with inline pulse oximetry hardware, the Inline Pulse
Oximeter toolbar can display a digital readout of SpO2 and pulse rate, and
can also monitor the quality of the oximetry signal.
Audible alarms with user-defined thresholds can be enabled to signal the
onset of potential desaturations, or Bradycardia or Tachycardia episodes.

The alarm is not a diagnostic device. It should only be used to help obtain the
attention of the clinician.

You should not rely solely on the Inline Pulse Oximeter toolbar to verify the
SpO2 and pulse rate signal from the patient.

To activate the 1 Click the Set Oximeter Parameters button on the Inline Pulse
Inline Pulse Oximeter toolbar.
Oximeter alarms The Inline Pulse Oximeter Settings dialog box displays.
and set the
You can change the Oxygen Saturation Level. To activate the SpO2 alarm,
thresholds select the SpO2 Alarm check box.

You can change the Pulse Rate Low and High Thresholds. To activate the
Pulse Rate alarm, select the PR Alarm check box.

To activate the Signal Quality alarm, select the SQ Alarm check box.
2 Click OK to save the settings.

To stop the Inline When an alarm sounds, click the Oximeter Alarm button on the Inline
Pulse Oximeter Pulse Oximeter toolbar.
alarm The button is disabled until the alarm is triggered, then it becomes enabled.

7-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Observer/Reviewer Tools

Observer/Reviewer Tools
Displaying Channels
When you view a signal trace from the data acquisition board, the channel bar
displays the channel name and the voltage of each channel. The displayed
values are from the current record's last sample.
You can select the channels that you want to display, and you can change the
following channel properties: sensitivity, polarity, baseline, digital readouts,
width, and grid.

Sensitivity
Sensitivity is the ratio of input signal to output deflection. The units depend
on the unit used for the channel. This ratio is used to adjust how a signal
appears on the computer screen.
Increase a channel’s sensitivity when the signal appears too flat. When you
increase sensitivity, the displayed signal amplitude increases. However, the
sensitivity value decreases.

Increasing Sensitivity

Decrease a channel’s sensitivity when the displayed signal overlaps another

signal, or cannot be easily distinguished. When you decrease sensitivity, the
displayed signal amplitude decreases. However, the sensitivity value
increases.

Sensitivity affects the displayed amplitude of a signal, not the actual signal that
is recorded.

Polarity
The polarity of a channel is either Negative Up (the default) or Positive Up.

Baseline
The default baseline is 0 volts. You change baseline when signal values
fluctuate near a non-zero baseline. For example, you can change the baseline
of an oximetry channel from 0% to 50%.

Digital Readout
The Digital Readout feature is either On or Off.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 7-5

Chapter 7: Observer and Reviewer Tools

Width
Channel width is the space reserved for displaying a channel. It can be
displayed in normal or double width.

Grid
Grid lines are horizontal lines that can be displayed at amplitudes you select.
They cross the channels displayed in the EEG view, relative to the channel
baselines.
The grid line level must be within the range of the displayed signal.

To change 1 Specify the type of channels to be changed, by selecting a channel type (or
channel select All) from the Sensitivity toolbar list.
sensitivity from The toolbar displays a value if all the displayed channels of the selected
type have the same sensitivity. Otherwise, it shows “Mixed”.
the toolbar
2 Change the sensitivity of the selected channels by clicking Increase
Sensitivity or Decrease Sensitivity on the Sensitivity toolbar.
OR
Press the PLUS or MINUS key on the numeric keypad.
The next lower or higher sensitivity value for each channel is taken from
the range that corresponds to its type.
If you selected a specific type in step 1, the values for the other channels
are not changed.

To change 1 Specify the type of channels to be changed, by selecting a channel type (or
channel settings select All) from the Sensitivity toolbar list.
from the toolbar 2 Click Edit Channels on the Sensitivity toolbar.
OR
Choose Channels > Edit.

7-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Observer/Reviewer Tools

The Channel Properties dialog box displays.

3 Select channels from the list using the following methods:

• Select a channel.
• Select multiple channels using the CTRL or SHIFT keys.
• Select all channels by clicking Select All.

Display/hide channels in the window.
• To hide channels, select the channel(s) and then click Exclude.
• To display channels, select the channel(s) and then click Include.
• To toggle the setting, double-click an entry.

Increase or decrease the channel sensitivity.
Initially, Sensitivity is selected in the Property list.
• To increase the sensitivity of the selected channels, click Increase.
• To decrease the sensitivity of the selected channels, click Decrease.
The next lower or higher sensitivity value for each selected channel is
taken from the range that corresponds to its type.

Change the sensitivity value.
1 Click Edit.
The Edit Channel Sensitivity dialog box displays.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 7-7

Chapter 7: Observer and Reviewer Tools

2 Change the value and click OK. (The value must be within the range of
sensitivity values for the type).

Edit the range of sensitivity values.
1 Click Range.
The Sensitivity Ranges dialog box displays.

2 Select a type of trace from the Trace Type list.

3 You can add, delete, or apply the default settings:
• To add a value, click Add.
At the Add the sensitivity level dialog box, enter a value and click OK.
• To delete a value, select a value from the Sensitivities box and then
click Delete.
• To clear all values for the displayed trace type, click Delete All.
• To return to the default range for the displayed trace type, click Default.

Change (or view) the channel polarity.
1 Select Polarity from the Property list.
2 Click Pos. Up or Neg. Up.

Displaying/hiding digital readouts.
1 Select Digital Readout from the Property list.
2 Click On or Off.

Change (or view) the channel baseline.
1 Select Baseline from the Property list.
2 Click Edit.

7-8 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Observer/Reviewer Tools

The Edit channel baseline dialog box displays.

3 Enter the baseline value and click OK.

Change the channel width.
1 Select Width from the Property list.
2 Click Normal or Double.

Display/hide grid lines.
1 Select Grid from the Property list.
2 Turn the grid on or off by clicking On or Off.

Edit the grid settings.
1 Select Grid from the Property list.
2 Click Edit.
The Edit Grid Settings dialog box displays.

3 Select a trace type from the Channel Type list.

• Click Add to enter a new grid level in the Add Grid Level dialog box
that displays.
• To delete a grid line, select a value in the Grid Line Level with unit in
µV list, and click Delete.
• To reset each grid line to its default amplitude value, click Default.
4 Click OK.
4 At the Channel Properties dialog box, click OK to accept the new settings.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 7-9

Chapter 7: Observer and Reviewer Tools

Observer/Reviewer Options
In Observer and Reviewer, you can change several display options, such as
how the channel bar, time lines and traces are shown.
The channel bar, which is located on the left edge of the Observer and
Reviewer windows, identifies all of the displayed channels. You can show the
channel labels, types, sampling rates, and sensitivities by changing the
options.
Some options control how the signal traces are shown. For example, if you
want to show traces using the colors that are set for the channels, select the
Display Color Traces option. These colors were set when the montage was
defined. Otherwise, the traces are shown in black.
Time lines are light green vertical lines can be displayed across the signal
traces to help you see the time scale. You can set the time lines interval to 0,
0.2, 1.0, 2.0, or 3.0 seconds. (If you set this option to 0, no time lines are
displayed). The current setting is displayed on the status bar. When the
Digital Readout feature is activated for any channel, a numerical readout
displays at each time line of 1 second or greater. Each value corresponds to
the sample intersecting with that time line.

If the Time Line Interval is set to 0.2 seconds, a solid line is used for the whole-
second time line and dashed lines are used for the four 200 msec time lines.
In Observer’s Real Time Recording window, a vertical bar wipes across the
old page of signals as a new page of signals is displayed. The signal traces are
continuously updated as the bar moves from left to right (in Sweep Mode), or
from right to left (in Scroll Mode). Each time the bar reaches the right side
(Sweep Mode), or left side (Scroll Mode), it starts again at the opposite side
and refreshes the window). When you are recording the signals to disk, the
wipe bar is shown in red instead of gray. Select the Display Vertical Wipe Bar
option if you want to show this bar.

When the LookBack window is active, you cannot change the Enable Traces as
Observed or Display Vertical Wipe Bar settings. When the Real Time Recording
window is active, you cannot change the Show Recorded/Elapsed Time setting.

7-10 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Observer/Reviewer Tools

To change 1 Choose View > Options.

Observer options The Options dialog box displays.

2 To display or hide a channel bar field, select or clear the corresponding

check box in the Channel Bar Settings box.
When you select these options, the information is displayed on the
Channel Bar of the LookBack window.
3 To display the recording’s time or the elapsed time in the channel bar,
select Show Recorded Time or Show Elapsed Time.
4 Select the Enable Traces as Observed check box to activate the feature.
5 The options in the Trace View Settings box change the way the traces are
displayed.
• To display color traces, select the Color Traces check box.
• To display the vertical wipe bar, select the Vertical Wipe bar check box.
To disable any of these options, clear the corresponding check box.
6 To set the time line interval, select a value from the Time Line Interval list.
7 To set the recording’s periodic save interval, enter the time in hh:mm:ss
format. (If a system failure occurs, part of the recording can often be
recovered from the back up).
8 Click OK.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 7-11

Chapter 7: Observer and Reviewer Tools

To change 1 In the Reviewer, choose View > Options.

Reviewer options The Options dialog box displays.

2 To change the way the pages are displayed, select one of the options in the
Trace View Settings box.
You can either Overwrite the current page while drawing the next one or
Erase the current page before drawing the next one.
3 To change the way the traces are displayed, select the corresponding
option(s) in the Trace View Settings box.
Select or clear the check box(es) to activate or disable Display Color
Traces, and Display Detections on Traces.
4 Set the Time Line Interval by selecting a value from the list.
5 Set the Fast Forward/Backward Setting to indicate the number of seconds
a page should display when using the fast forward or backward features.
6 To display or hide a channel bar field, select or clear the corresponding
check box in the Channel Bar Settings box.
When you select these options, the information is displayed on the
Channel Bar of the LookBack window.
7 To display either the recording’s Recorded Time or Elapsed Time in the
channel bar, select one of the options.
8 Choose the elements you want included in the Traces as Observed by
selecting the corresponding check box(es) in the Traces as Observed
Settings box.
To hide an element, clear the corresponding check box.
For the “Traces as Observed” feature to be available during review, it must
have been enabled during the recording session.

7-12 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Observer/Reviewer Tools

9 Click OK.

Time Scale
Setting the time scale enables you to control how much time is displayed
across the width of a page (i.e. a window of traces). There are 32 time scales to
choose from. These values (in mm/sec or sec/page) depend on your screen
resolution and the recording’s base frequency. A higher mm/sec value shows
less total time per page.) The current setting is displayed on the status bar.
Because different computers have different settings for the number of pixels
on screen, the number of pixels in a unit length (mm, inch, etc.) changes,
depending upon a computer’s size and setting. Your screen can be calibrated
through the Hardware Setup function. (For more information, see “Screen
Calibration” on page 2-12).

The choices (in mm/sec) depend on your screen resolution and the base
frequency of the recording. A higher value shows less total time per page.

The time scale is also used when you print the signals displayed on the screen.
Each menu command includes a second value in parentheses which refers to
the exact time scale on the printed page. For more information on printing, see
“Printing and Saving Selected Sections” on page 8-30.

To change the 1 To change the time scale displayed on the screen in Observer and
time scale Reviewer, choose one of the four last-used time scales from the Time Scale
menu.
OR
To view all of the available time scales, choose Time Scale > More.
The Time Scales dialog box displays.

2 To view the time scale values in millimeter per second, select mm/s.
OR
To view the time scale values in seconds per page, select s/page.
3 Select a time scale from the list, then click OK.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 7-13

Chapter 7: Observer and Reviewer Tools

OR
Double-click a time scale from the list.

Time Stamp
The time stamp for the beginning of a page in a window is shown at the top of
the channel bar. This time is also displayed on the status bar. You can change
it to show either recorded time (i.e. time of day) or elapsed time (i.e. minutes
since the beginning of the recording).

The time stamp setting also affects the times that are shown on the status bar
for the analysis, event, and section tools.

To change the 1 [Observer] Make the LookBack window the active window.
time stamp on the OR
channel bar [Reviewer] Skip to step 2.
2 Choose View > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
3 In the Channel Bar Settings box, select an option.
The choices are Show Recorded Time and Show Elapsed Time.
4 Click OK.
The time is shown at the top of the channel bar preceded with the letter R
for recorded time or E for elapsed time.

The timestamp setting also affects the time that is shown on the status bar when
you use the Amplitude-Time cursor.

Clip Traces
The Clip Traces feature ensures that the traces do not overlap. You can
activate and deactivate this feature from the Main toolbar.

To activate/ Click Clip Traces on the Main toolbar.

deactivate Clip OR
Traces Choose View > Clip Traces.
The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
command until you stop the feature.

7-14 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Observer/Reviewer Tools

Applying Filters
You can apply digital filters to the signals displayed in the window. If several
files are open (or if a window is split into two panes), you can apply different
filters to each window (or windowpane).

Applying digital filters does not modify the recorded data. Filters only affect the
displayed signals.
A filter lets you modify (or reshape) the frequency components of one or more
channel signals to remove noise or separate signals that were mixed. You can
create filters in the Reviewer and Observer. To create a filter, you add one or
more filter definitions. For more information, see “Creating Filters” on
page 7-17.

The filters you create are stored at your workstation. Later, you can use these
filters during other recordings, or while you review other EEG files. To use the
same filters at another workstation, you can copy the Default.flt file (in the
C:\Harmonie\Template folder) to the other workstation. When you replace the
existing Default.flt file, you lose the current filters.
You can apply up to three filters to the displayed signals. When you apply
these cascading filters, all of the filter definitions in the selected filters are
applied at the same time.
You can use the three Filter toolbar lists to apply filters.

Three Filter Lists Edit Filter

Button

The list of all available filters is shown in each toolbar list and in each
cascading menu in the Filters menu. You can switch filters at any time.

To apply a filter 1 Select the window (or window pane) where you want to use the filter.
(Different filters can be applied to different windows).
2 Select a filter from one of the three Filter toolbar lists.
OR
Choose one of the filters from the Filters menu.
The appropriate channel signals are filtered using the corresponding filter
definition(s).
When a filter is selected, a check mark appears beside the filter name in the
Filters menu (and the name appears on the toolbar). When no filters are
selected, the lists are set to <Filter 1>, <Filter 2>, and <Filter 3>. In this
case, the original recorded signals are displayed.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 7-15

Chapter 7: Observer and Reviewer Tools

To remove a filter Select <Filter N> from the corresponding Filter toolbar list. (N is the filter
number 1, 2 or 3).
OR
Choose the filter again from the Filters menu. The check mark beside the filter
name is removed.

About Digital Filters

A filter modifies a signal by attenuating, isolating and/or rejecting a range of
frequency components.
There are four types of digital filters in HARMONIE:
• Low Pass - attenuates high frequency components beyond a cutoff
frequency
• High Pass - attenuates low frequency components below a cutoff
frequency
• Band Pass - isolates a range of frequency components between two cutoff
frequencies (i.e. the others are rejected)
• Band Reject - rejects a range of frequency components between two cutoff
frequencies
There are two filter classes:
• Infinite Impulse Response (IIR)
• Finite Impulse Response (FIR)
IIR filters are similar to analog filters in their response. Some signal distortion
is expected because of the non-linear phase characteristics of IIR filters. FIR
filters have linear phase, so they do not distort the input signal.
The higher the filter order, the steeper the slope at the cutoff frequencies. A
filter with a steep slope is very efficient at removing frequencies immediately
above the cutoff; a filter with gentle slope is less efficient. However, as the
order of an IIR filter increases, the signal distortion increases.

The order of an IIR filter can be as high as 10, but it is best to use a value of 3 or
lower because of the increasing distortion.
A FIR filter can have an order that is higher (up to 63) without creating
distortion. However, higher order requires more computations, so an FIR
filter can be slower (although this is rarely apparent in HARMONIE).
Sometimes it is impossible to specify a filter with a very high or very low
cutoff frequency. You must balance the slope (i.e. order) with the cutoff
frequency. Usually, increasing the order (while still considering the distortion
and/or longer computation time) allows a wider range of cutoff frequencies.

Filters should never be applied to any channel with a DINP or PHOT trace type.

7-16 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Observer/Reviewer Tools

Creating Filters
When you create a new filter, you must enter one or more filter definitions.
For each filter definition, you must specify the class, type, order, and cutoff
frequencies.
You must also specify the channels that the filter definition will affect.
Usually, you identify channels by their type and the frequency that they are
recorded at, but you can also use a specific channel name. (If you do not
specify a channel name, the filter is applied to all channels with the specified
frequency and type).

The channels that are not included in a filter definition are not affected by it.
You can add different filter definitions for the different channels in your
montage. All the definitions included in a filter are applied at the same time,
but each definition is only applied on its own channels.
For example, you can create a filter (with the Filter Name “Sleep”) that
includes these three filter definitions:

Freq. Trace Channel Filter Type Order Cut1 Cut2

Type Name
200 Hz EEG (blank) IIR Band Pass3 1 35
200 Hz EMG (blank) IIR High Pass3 5
200 Hz EOG (blank) IIR Band Pass3 5 95

Two filter definitions that apply to the same channel or channel type, cannot be
added into one filter. If you want to filter a channel or channel type more than
once, apply cascading filters.
For example, you can apply all three of these filters at the same time:

Filter Name “LOW 35 Hz” has one filter definition:

Freq. Trace Channel Filter Type Order Cut1 Cut2
Type Name
200Hz EEG blank IIR Low 3 35
Pass

Filter Name “HIGH 1 Hz” has one filter definition

Freq. Trace Channel Filter Type Order Cut1 Cut2
Type Name
200Hz EEG blank IIR High 3 1
Pass

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 7-17

Chapter 7: Observer and Reviewer Tools

Filter Name “NOTCH 58-62 Hz” has one filter definition

Freq. Trace Channel Filter Type Order Cut1 Cut2
Type Name
200Hz EEG blank IIR Band 5 58 62
Reject

To add a filter 1 Click Edit Filter on the Filter toolbar.

OR
Choose Filters > Edit.
The Filter Settings dialog box displays.

2 Click New.
The Enter filter name dialog box displays.

3 Enter a filter name and click OK.

4 Click Add.

7-18 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Observer/Reviewer Tools

The Filter definition dialog box displays.

5 Under Apply to All Channels, specify the channels that this filter
definition applies to.
You must select a sampling frequency and trace type, but the channel
name (e.g. C3-REF) is optional. If you do not specify a channel name, the
filter is applied to all channels with the specified frequency and type.
If you want to identify all of the channels that use a particular sampling
frequency, select <Any> as the trace type.
6 Under Filter Definition, specify the class, type, order, and cutoff
frequencies.
Low Pass and High Pass filter types only require one cutoff frequency. The
possible order values depend on the filter class.
7 Click OK to close the Filter definition dialog box.
8 Repeat steps 4 to 7 for each additional filter definition.
9 To view a filter’s frequency response (attenuation as a function of
frequency), select the filter and click FreqResp.
The Frequency Response window displays.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 7-19

Chapter 7: Observer and Reviewer Tools

It displays the Frequency Response graph for the selected filter.

Click OK to close the window.
10 At the Filter Settings dialog box, click OK to save the new filter.

To edit a filter 1 Click Edit Filter on the Filter toolbar.

OR
Choose Filters > Edit.
The Filter Settings dialog box displays.

2 Select a filter name from the Name list.

3 Select a filter definition, and then click Edit.
The Filter definition dialog box displays.

4 Under Apply to All Channels, you can change the channels this filter
definition applies to.
You can select a new sampling frequency and trace type, and change or
enter the channel name.
5 Under Filter Definition, you can change the class, type, order, and cutoff
frequencies.
6 Click OK to close the Filter definition dialog box.

7-20 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Observer/Reviewer Tools

You can also remove filters and/or delete filter definitions from the Filter
Settings dialog box.

Traces as Observed
In the Observer, all montage, channel, sensitivity (including polarity),
baseline, time scale and filter changes are saved as Traces as Observed events.
However, in Reviewer you can select the display changes that are shown.
The settings for these display options, and the record of when the changes are
made can be significant for the person who reviews the EEG file later. For
example, the reason for marking an event or reaching a conclusion may be
clearer if one can see the signals as they were originally viewed.
The Traces as Observed feature enables you to view (in Reviewer) the signal
traces exactly as they were viewed (in Observer) at the time the EEG file was
recorded.

Recording Traces as Observed

In Observer, you must activate the Traces as Observed feature. Then, the
display changes you make in the Real Time Recording window are saved
with the EEG file in the form of Traces as Observed events. (The events in the
Traces as Observed event group look like annotations but are shown in cyan
instead of yellow).

To enable the 1 In Observer, make the Real Time Recording window the active window.
Traces as 2 Choose View > Options.
Observed feature The Options dialog box displays.

3 Select the Enable Traces as Observed check box to enable this feature.
(The setting is saved for the next time you start Observer).
You should not activate and deactivate this feature more than once. If you
stop this feature while recording to disk, the changes that you make are no
longer saved (i.e. no more events are marked). The moment you start the
feature again, a Traces as Observed event is marked with the current settings
for all of the relevant display options. If several display options were changed

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 7-21

Chapter 7: Observer and Reviewer Tools

while the feature was disabled, you will see a choppy transition while
reviewing the EEG file later (using the Traces as Observed feature).

Only the changes that you make while the Recorder is recording to disk are
saved. The moment you start recording to disk again, a Traces as Observed
event is marked with the current settings for all of the relevant display options.

Viewing Traces as Observed in Reviewer

In Reviewer, to view traces as they were originally observed, you must enable
the Traces as Observed feature. When it is enabled, the display changes are
shown according to the Traces as Observed events in the file.

When reviewing an EEG file you may want to change the display options. Before
you do this, you should stop the Traces as Observed feature. Otherwise, the
changes you make could be lost when a Traces as Observed event is processed.
As you move around the window, you can view different pages of the
recorded trace. To do this, you can use the scroll bar, the Go to menu or the
keyboard. (For auto-paging, you can also use the Tools toolbar).
Traces as Observed events are interpreted by Reviewer as they pass the left
edge of the window.

EXAMPLE
The time scale is set to 21 mm/sec and there is a Traces as Observed event in
the middle of the current page (e.g. “Set Time Scale = 11 mm/sec”). You press
the RIGHT ARROW key on the keyboard to move forward one record at a
time. When the event moves off the left side of the window, the time scale
changes to 11 mm/sec. Now, you press PAGE UP on the keyboard to show
the previous page. The event is displayed again (i.e. it is to the right of the left
edge of the window), so the time scale changes back to 21 mm/sec.
Before you press PAGE DOWN to show the next page of signals, the Traces as
Observed events shown on the current page announce the display changes
that will be applied on the next page.

To view the EEG file exactly as it was recorded, the entire file must be
accessible. Therefore, you should not exclude recorded sections (or parts of
recorded sections) from the display while you use this feature. (Normally, you
can hide these sections using the Set of Recorded Sections window).

To enable the Choose View > Traces as Observed.

Traces as A check mark appears beside the menu command until you stop the feature.
Observed feature (The on/off setting is saved for the next time you start Reviewer).

7-22 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Observer/Reviewer Tools

To show display 1 Choose View > Options.

changes The Options dialog box displays.

2 Under Traces as Observed Settings, select any of the display changes.

Before you can select Show Observed Channels, Show Observed
Sensitivities or Show Observed Baselines, you must select Show
Observed Montage.
3 Click OK.

Traces as Observed Filter Changes

For the Traces as Observed filter changes to work properly, the filters on the
Recording workstation must also exist on the workstation where you review
the EEG file (e.g. Reviewing workstation). Traces as Observed events that
indicate a filter change include the name of the filter that is applied to the
signals, but not the filter definition.
Since filters are stored at the workstation (i.e. not with the EEG file), you have
two options:
1 Create the filter on the Reviewing workstation using exactly the same
name and filter definition.
OR
2 Copy the Default.flt file (in the C:\Harmonie\Template folder) from the
Recorder workstation to the Reviewing workstation. When you replace the
existing Default.flt file, you lose the current filters.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 7-23

Chapter 7: Observer and Reviewer Tools

Traces as Observed Events

Usually, you use the Traces as Observed feature by looking at the display
changes without looking at the Traces as Observed event names or properties.
For example, you can see when the montage is changed because the channels
change.
If you want to know what changed, you can also look at the names of the
Traces as Observed events:
• Initial Settings: Inserted at the beginning of file.
• Montage=name: Inserted when the montage is switched to name.
• ChanSens=Inc: Inserted when the sensitivities for one or more channels
are increased with Increase Sensitivity.
• ChanSens=Dec: Inserted when the sensitivities for one or.more channels
are decreased with Decrease Sensitivity.
• ChansSens=Chg: Inserted when the Channel Properties window is used
to change sensitivities, polarities or baselines.
• Tscl=n: Inserted when the time scale is switched.
(The number n is an even number between 0 and 62 that represents one of
the 32 time scales).
• Filter=name1, name2, name3: Inserted when a filter change occurs.
(The filter names are put in the three <Filter n> positions).
If you want exact details about one of the three channel changes, you can look
at the properties of the Traces as Observed events.

Analysis Tools
Analysis tools can help you quantify and compare different channel traces.
They are also called cursors because the mouse pointer uses a different cursor
for each of the tools.
While you are using an analysis tool, you can still use the keyboard to move
around in the recording. The active keys include HOME, END, PAGE UP,
PAGE DOWN, RIGHT ARROW and LEFT ARROW. This feature is useful
when you are trying to identify a segment of signals that extends beyond the
current page.
For example, while you use the Duration Cursor, you can press RIGHT
ARROW to move one record forward.

Amplitude-Time Cursor
You can use the Amplitude-Time cursor to find the exact time and amplitude
of a point on a signal trace. The amplitude is normally shown in µV. It can
also be shown in V (press CTRL as you point to the signal trace), or AD units
(press SHIFT as you point to the signal trace).

7-24 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Observer/Reviewer Tools

To use the 1 [Observer] In the LookBack window, click Amplitude-Time Cursor

Amplitude-Time on the Cursor toolbar.
cursor OR

[Reviewer] Click Amplitude-Time Cursor on the Tools toolbar.

OR
Choose Tools > Amplitude-Time Cursor.
The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
command until you stop the feature (or select a different tool).
2 You can view the amplitude in µV, V, or AD units:
• To show the amplitude in µV, click on a signal and drag the cursor
along the trace.
• To show the amplitude in V, press CTRL while clicking on a signal and
dragging the cursor along the trace.
• To show the amplitude in AD, press SHIFT while clicking on a signal
and dragging the cursor along the trace.
A vertical line follows the cursor movement. The recorded (or elapsed)
time, channel name and amplitude are displayed as a tool tip near the
cursor, and on the status bar.
3 To deactivate the tool, choose Amplitude-Time Cursor again.

Overlay Cursor
Sometimes you want to compare the signal traces from two different
channels, instead of just looking at them. You can use the Overlay Cursor to
drag a copy of a displayed trace on top of another signal trace.

To use the 1 [Observer] In the LookBack window, click Overlay Cursor on the
Overlay Cursor Cursor toolbar.
OR

[Reviewer] Click Overlay Cursor on the Tools toolbar.

OR
Choose Tools > Overlay Cursor.
The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
command until you stop the feature (or select a different tool).
2 Click on a signal in the Reviewer or LookBack window, and drag the
overlay cursor vertically.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 7-25

Chapter 7: Observer and Reviewer Tools

The overlay cursor is a copy of the selected signal trace. When you release
the mouse button, the copy disappears.
The name of the channel is displayed as a tool tip near the cursor, and on
the status bar.
3 To deactivate the tool, choose Overlay Cursor again.

Reviewer Tools
Analysis Tools
Analysis tools can help you quantify and compare different channel traces.
They are also called cursors because the mouse pointer uses a different cursor
for each of the tools.
While you are using an analysis tool, you can still use the keyboard to move
around in the recording. The active keys include HOME, END, PAGE UP,
PAGE DOWN, RIGHT ARROW and LEFT ARROW. This feature is useful
when you are trying to identify a segment of signals that extends beyond the
current page.
For example, while you use the Duration Cursor, you can press RIGHT
ARROW to move one record forward.

Duration Cursor
The Duration Cursor is a ruler for measuring the time between significant
points on the signals. One end of the ruler stays fixed while you measure with
the other end.

To use the 1 In Reviewer, click Duration Cursor on the Tools toolbar.

Duration Cursor OR
Choose Tools > Duration Cursor.
The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
command until you stop the feature (or select a different tool).
2 Click on a signal in the window and drag the cursor along the trace.

You can press RIGHT ARROW to move one record forward, and LEFT
ARROW to move one record backward while you drag the ruler-cursor.
A ruler follows the cursor movement. The length of the selected section is
displayed as a tool tip near the cursor, and on the status bar.
3 To deactivate the tool, choose Duration Cursor again.
You can set how many tick marks you want per second on the ruler.

7-26 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Reviewer Tools

To set the number 1 Choose View > Options.

of tick marks 2 Under Duration Cursor Setting, select a value from the Number of ticks
per second list.
The choices are 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.
A tall line is used for the whole-second tick mark. If you set this option to
2, 3, 4, or 5, a short line is used for the corresponding 500, 333.3, 250, or 200
msec tick marks.
3 Click OK.

Statistics Cursor
The Statistics cursor is used to view time, amplitude, and frequency
information for any section of a signal trace. The amplitude is normally
shown as µV. It can also be shown in V (press CTRL as you point to the signal
trace), or AD units (press SHIFT).

Frequency statistics are computed by counting zero-crossings, so their

accuracy depends on the signal.
If the signal baseline fluctuates, it may not cross the zero line. Also, low
amplitude noise in the signal causes many zero-crossings. You will get better
results with the Statistics tool after you apply a Band Pass filter to eliminate the
low and high frequencies that you do not want to include.

To use the 1 In Reviewer, click Statistic Cursor on the Tools toolbar.

Statistics cursor OR
Choose Tools > Statistics Cursor.
The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
command until you stop the feature (or select a different tool).
2 Click at a time on any of the channels and drag the box-cursor to the left or
the right.
You can move the cursor vertically to other channels. As you drag, the
Channel name, Begin time, End time, and Length of the box are displayed
on the status bar.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 7-27

Chapter 7: Observer and Reviewer Tools

3 When you release the mouse button, the Signal Statistics window
displays.

Several statistics for the selected signal section are shown, including
amplitude and frequency information. After you have viewed the
statistics, click OK.
4 To deactivate the tool, choose Statistics Cursor again.

Bookmark Feature
The Bookmark feature allows you to modify display parameters to show an
event using a good set of display parameters, and then save the display
parameters by placing a bookmark. You can subsequently review the same
section of EEG with the same display parameters by finding and restoring the
bookmark.
After placing a bookmark, the display settings can be changed again. Another
bookmark can be placed, or you can return to previous display settings by
finding and restoring the settings of an existing bookmark.
In Reviewer, all montage, channel sensitivity (including polarity), baseline,
time scale and filter changes can be bookmarked. The EEG file’s current
setting properties will be saved as a Bookmark event.
Each bookmark that is saved in the EEG file will include the following
properties.

General Item Event Properties Item Event Advanced Properties

Definition Name Montage
Begin Time Time Scale
End Time Filters
Duration Channels
Event Name Channel Sensitivities
Comments Channel Baseline

7-28 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Reviewer Tools

General Item Event Properties Item Event Advanced Properties

Channel Widths
Channel Types

The advantage of the Bookmark feature is that you can quickly mark
interesting parts of an EEG file using certain settings, and review them faster.
The Bookmark feature can be used to remember display characteristics. It also
allows two (groups of) people to use different bookmarks to display an event
in different ways.

To use the Bookmarks B1 and B2 can be used to point out different types of interesting
Bookmark feature sections in the file (e.g. spike and seizure events).
At an interesting section in the EEG file, you can change the file settings and
place a bookmark event.
1 Change the file settings to highlight an interesting section of the file.
2 To place a bookmark, click the Place Bookmark 1 button on the
Bookmarks toolbar.

OR
Choose Events > Place Bookmark 1.
The Bookmark 1 (B1) event will be placed at the beginning of the viewed
signal window.
3 To set another Bookmark 1 event, repeat steps 1 to 2.
4 To mark another type of interesting section in the file, you can change the
file settings and place another bookmark.
[Toolbar] Click the Place Bookmark 2 button on the Bookmarks toolbar.
OR
[Menu] Choose Events > Place Bookmark 2.
The Bookmark 2 (B2) event will be placed at the beginning of the viewed
signal window.
5 To return to the settings of an existing bookmark, you can:
[Toolbar]
1 Select the type of bookmark from the Bookmarks toolbar list.
• <Any> will reapply the settings of the closest bookmark.
• B1 will reapply the settings of the closest Bookmark 1 event.
• B2 will reapply the settings of the closest Bookmark 2 event.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 7-29

Chapter 7: Observer and Reviewer Tools

2 To find a bookmark and restore its settings, click the Find Previous
Bookmark and Restore Settings or Find Next Bookmark and Restore
Settings button on the Bookmarks toolbar.
[Menu] To find and restore the closest bookmark, choose Goto > Find
Previous Bookmark and Restore Settings or Find Next Bookmark and
Restore Settings.
[Shortcut Keys] To find and restore the closest bookmark, press the
SHIFT+LEFT ARROW or SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW key.
When finding and restoring a bookmark’s settings, the current settings of
the signal displayed on the screen will be replaced by the bookmark, and
the display settings will be set back to " Bookmarks" properties that were
perviously saved in the file.

When filters that are not currently available are required for finding and restoring
bookmark settings, an error message will appear.

7-30 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

CHAPTER 8: Reviewing Files

This chapter explains how to review the EEG files that were recorded. Many
Reviewer features help you view and analyze recorded signals: you can
display the signals using different reformatting montages and filters, and
there are tools for displaying specific sections of the file.
In addition to the annotations that were placed while recording the EEG file,
you can add more events. Analysis tools help you quantify and compare
different channel traces. After reviewing a long file, you can save specific
sections as a new file or print several pages of the signal traces.
This chapter covers:
• Starting the Reviewer
• Opening Files
• Read-Only Files
• Calibrating Signals
• Reviewing Files
• Changing the Read Status of Files
• Reformatting Montages
• Working with Events
• Printing and Saving Selected Sections
• Generating Reports
• Applying Filters
• Reviewing Patient Analog Video
• Reviewing Stellate DOS Files

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-1

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

Starting the Reviewer

You can start the Reviewer from any of the three HARMONIE views that
show a list of EEG files. These are the Patients view (in Files/Reports format),
the Volumes view (in Detail format), and the All Files view.
You can use this method to view any EEG file in the database with an
accessible volume. For example, you can review a file on a remote volume,
but you cannot review a file that was archived to CD-ROM if the CD-ROM is
not in the drive.
(If an error message such as “Cannot find the volume location” displays when
you try to open a file, the problem can also be a lost volume information file.
For more information, see “Troubleshooting Volume Errors” on page 12-15).

To start the 1 In HARMONIE, show any file view.

Reviewer from 2 Double-click the EEG file that you want to review.
HARMONIE OR
Right-click the EEG file that you want to review, and choose Open (or
Start > Reviewer) from the popup menu.
OR
Select an EEG file, and choose Start > Reviewer.
The main Reviewer window displays the selected EEG file.
Another way to start the Reviewer is from the Windows Start menu. After
Reviewer starts, you can open an EEG file.

To start the On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Programs > Stellate HARMONIE >
Reviewer from the Reviewer.
Start menu

Opening Files
After Reviewer starts, you can open other EEG files. You do not have to
return to HARMONIE to select another file.
You can open more than one EEG file at a time. Each file is displayed in its
own window, which can be moved and arranged using standard Windows
techniques (e.g. Tile Horizontal and Tile Vertical). However, only one
window can be active. To move between open windows, choose a file name
from the Window menu, press CTRL + TAB, or click the mouse in the
window you want to become active.
Read-only means that you cannot add event groups, mark events, erase events,
or edit reformatting montages. If you need to mark events on a CD-ROM file,
you can click Cancel (in step 5), and then follow the instructions in “Read-
Only Files” on page 8-4.

8-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Opening Files

If a file is not read-only, the changes (e.g. marked events and changed
reformatting montages) are saved automatically. If you are reviewing an EEG
file for a long period, you may want to save your changes. To do this, choose
File > Save Changes (or click Save Changes on the Main toolbar).
Files that were recorded with Stellate Rhythm and Monitor can be opened in the
Reviewer. For more information, see “Reviewing Stellate DOS Files” on
page 8-46.

To open a file 1 In Reviewer, click the Open button on the Main toolbar.
OR
Choose File >Open.
The Open dialog box displays.

2 Select an EEG (signal) file.

You may have to look in another folder and/or drive to find the file.
If you are opening an EEG file created by another application (e.g. a BMSI
or Nihon Kohden file), you must select the file type from the Files of Type
list.
3 To open a file with read-only rights, select the Open as read-only check
box.
4 Click Open.
If the file must be read-only (e.g. it is on a CD-ROM), the message, “This
file is stored on a read-only volume: Do you want to open it read-only?”
appears.
5 Click OK.
The EEG file is opened in a new window.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-3

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

Read-Only Files
If you want to modify an EEG file that is on CD-ROM, you must first copy it
to a hard disk drive. If the file is registered in the database, you can make a
copy in HARMONIE using the Copy Files feature. Otherwise, you must first
import the file. After you copy the EEG file to a hard disk drive volume, the
corresponding signal (SIG) and status (STS) files are still read-only. You can
change the properties of these files using Windows Explorer.

To make a file 1 In Windows Explorer, locate and select the appropriate SIG and STS files.
writable 2 Choose File > Properties.
The Properties dialog box displays.
3 Clear the Read-only check box.
4 Click OK.
Now there are two copies of the signal and status files: the read-only set is
on the CD-ROM, and the writable set is on the hard drive. In Reviewer,
you can open and change the EEG file that is on the hard disk drive.

Calibrating Signals
The calibration function can be used from Reviewer to edit an existing file’s
calibration factors. However, from Reviewer, the calibration can only be done
manually.
Calibration factors can be edited in two ways:
• In HARMONIE, from the recording template. For more information, see
“HARMONIE Calibration Methods” on page 5-11.
OR
• In Reviewer, an EEG file is opened, then its associated calibration file is
edited.
When you edit the calibration file in Reviewer, you are making changes to the
existing calibration file, that was appended to the EEG file when it was
originally recorded.
If you enter the calibration factors that are supplied by the manufacturer, they
do not depend on the performance of your specific amplifier. Therefore, you
only need to perform this type of calibration once for each recording montage.
To specify the calibration factors, you must know:
• The gain and offset for each channel.
OR
• The board (output) and original values (input) for two signal points on
each channel.
If you are using a Grass or LA MONT amplifier, you can also use the
predefined values.

8-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Calibrating Signals

Channels that use a unit other than Volts must be set using two signals points.
Only volt channels can be set using the gain and offset.

To edit a 1 After opening the EEG file associated with the calibration file you want to
calibration file edit, choose File > Calibration.
The Calibration Factors -Editing dialog box displays.

2 Select the channels you want to calibrate.

To select channels you can:
• Click on a channel.
• Click and drag the mouse to select several channels.
• Press CTRL while clicking the channels to select multiple channels.
• Select a channel type from the Select All Channels of Type list, then
click Select All Channels of Type.
3 To enter calibration factors, under Manual Calibration, click Manual.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-5

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

The Manual Calibration dialog box displays.

4 The channels that will be calibrated are shown in the Calibrating box.
5 Under Input, enter low and high input values in the Low and High boxes.
6 Under Output, select one of the following options:
• To enter specific low and high values, select Specify Low and High.
Then enter the output values in the Low and High boxes.
• To enter the gain and offset, select Specify Gain and Offset: Slope [a1],
[Intercept [a0]. Then enter the values in the Gain and Offset boxes.
7 Click OK to return to the Calibration Factors dialog box.
Repeat steps 2 to 7 until you have calibrated all of the channels.
Entering default values
8 To enter default calibration values (for LA MONT amplifiers), select All
from the Select All Channels of Type list. Click Select All Channels of
Type.
EEG type channels are assigned a gain of 4000, and non-EEG channels are
assigned a gain of 1000.
9 Click Print to print the current calibration file.
10 Click OK to save the calibration file.

Reviewing Files
Each EEG file is displayed in its own window in Reviewer. The signal traces
for all the recording montage channels are initially shown in the window
when you open the EEG file.

8-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Reviewing Files

You can select which channels to display, and you can change the options that
relate to the channel bar, time marks and time scale. You can move around in
the window to show different pages of the recording. The window can also be
split, so that you can see the signal traces in different ways.
Signal files can be reviewed simultaneously by several users on the network.
The first person to open the file as read-write access; subsequent reviewers
have read-only access.

To review a file 1 In HARMONIE, show the Files to Review view by clicking Files to Review
on the File View toolbar.
2 To filter the files by who they are assigned to, select a filter from the
Assign To list.
3 To filter the files by read status, select <Any>, Unread, or Read from the
Read Status list.
4 Click Apply.
5 Select a file, then click Review.
OR
Double click the file name.
The file opens in Reviewer.

Moving Around the Window

When you open an EEG file, the Reviewer window shows the beginning of
the recording. There are several ways to move around in this window. By
moving around, you can view different pages of the recorded trace.

Scroll Bar
The length of the scroll bar at the bottom of the window represents the length
of the recorded file. Clicking various parts of the scroll bar displays different
pages of the file:

Show Previous Page Show Next Page

Move Back One Record Drag to a Different Page Move Forward One Record

A page is one window of traces. A record equals 64 data samples (e.g. 0.32
seconds for a 200 Hz signal).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-7

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

To move to a Drag the scroll bar button while looking at the time displayed in the status bar
specific time in at the bottom of the Reviewer window.
the recording

This “Go to” time equals the time stamp of the displayed page when you
release the mouse button. The time stamp can show elapsed time or recorded
time. For more information, see “Time Stamp” on page 7-14.

Goto Menu or Keyboard Commands

There are several menu commands for moving around the window that are
equivalent to using the scroll bar. These commands (in the Go to menu) have
very convenient keyboard shortcuts.
You can move around the window by using these keyboard shortcuts:

PAGE UP Show Previous Page

PAGE DOWN Show Next Page
HOME Go to First Page
END Go to Last Page
RIGHT ARROW Move Forward 1 Record
LEFT ARROW Move Back 1 Record

Automatic Pagination
When you want to scroll through pages without holding down a key on the
keyboard (or continuously clicking the scroll bar), you can use automatic
pagination. This feature makes the window automatically fast-forward (or
fast-backward). After you start this feature, it continues until you stop it.
The amount of time displayed in the window (i.e. time per page) depends on
the time scale that you have selected. The speed of auto-paging (i.e. number
of pages per second) depends on the speed of the page redraw and the delay
between pages.

To start/stop Click Fast Forward or Fast Backward on the Goto toolbar.

auto-paging OR
Choose Goto > Fast Forward (or Fast Backward).
OR
Press the CTRL+RIGHT ARROW key (or CTRL+LEFT ARROW).
The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
command until you click the button again. An easier way to stop automatic
pagination is to press ESC on the keyboard.

8-8 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Reviewing Files

You can set the delay between pages. For example, you can look at a page for
three seconds before the next page is automatically drawn.

To set the delay 1 Choose View > Options.

between pages 2 To adjust the pause between pages, in the Fast Forward/Backward Setting
box, select one of the numbers from the list.
The choices are 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4. If you select 0, the next page is drawn
immediately whenever you use automatic pagination.
3 Click OK.

Trace Drawing Techniques

As you move from page to page (using any of the methods described above),
the new (next) page of traces must replace the old (current) one. The next
page can be drawn as the current one is erased or the next page can be drawn
after the current one is erased.
The Overwrite current page while drawing next option is usually used
because it is less tiring for your eyes.

To set how the 1 Choose View > Options.

traces are drawn 2 In the Trace View Settings box, select one of the two options.
The choices are Overwrite current page while drawing next, and
Erase current page before drawing next.
3 Click OK.

Splitting the Window into Two Panes

The window can be split to enable you to see the signal traces in two separate
window panes. You can compare two parts of the same recording, or you can
show the same part of the recording in two different ways. For example, you
can show a page with two different montages.
Window panes cannot show two different EEG files. To review two files
simultaneously, open both of them and arrange the two windows. For more
information, see “Opening Files” on page 8-2.

The two panes are controlled independently with respect to the montage, time
scale, channels, and filters that are used.
However, the Reviewer options are global. For example, a change to the
timestamp or channel bar settings applies to all window panes (and windows).

To split a window Choose Window > Split. The pointer changes into a two-headed arrow.
Move the pointer to the appropriate midpoint and then click.
OR
Drag the Pane Border button to the appropriate midpoint and then release it.
OR

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-9

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

Double-click the Pane Border button (to split the window into two equal
panes).

To show one 1 Choose Window > Split. The pointer changes into a two-headed arrow.
window pane 2 Move the pointer to either side of the window and then click.
OR
Drag the pane border to either side of the window and then release it.
OR
Double-click the pane border.
3 To close the left pane, drag the pane border to the left side of the window.
4 To close the right pane, drag the pane border to the right side.
You can change the montage, time scale, channels, and filters of the active
window pane.

To make a Click inside the pane.

window pane The channel bar of the active window pane is highlighted. (On the inactive
active window pane, the channel bar is shown in gray).

Moving Around the Window Panes

The same methods that are used in a window (e.g. the scroll bar, the
keyboard) can be used to view different pages in a window pane.
For example, you can scroll to an event in one pane, scroll to another event in
the second pane, and then compare the two events.
There is also a feature called Pane Sync that synchronizes the two window
panes. This means that the pages in both panes have equal time stamps. (The
time stamps are shown at the top of the two channel bars).
When you start this feature, the time stamp of the inactive pane is changed to
equal the time stamp of the active pane.
The Pane Sync feature is very useful when you want to show the same part of
the recording in two different ways.
For example, you can scroll to an event in one pane, show the same event in
the second pane using a different montage, and then compare the two.
When you use the Pane Sync feature, the two panes do not necessarily show the
same length of time. This is because each window pane can have a different time
scale and a different size.

To start/stop Pane Click the Pane Sync button on the Main toolbar.
Sync OR
Choose View > Pane Sync.
The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
command until you stop the feature.

8-10 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Changing the Read Status of Files

Changing the Read Status of Files

After an EEG file is reviewed, the read status must be changed to Read. This
ensures that the file can be archived.
In order to archive an EEG file, the storage status must be Master File, and the
Read Status must be Read.
A file’s read status can be changed from the Reviewer, CSA Reviewer,
Spectra, and Trends.

To change the 1 Click the Read Status button on the Main toolbar.
read status of a OR
file Choose File > Read Status.
The File Read Status dialog box displays.

2 You can select a staff member from The file is assigned to list.
3 Select the Read check box.
4 Click OK.

Reformatting Montages
Initially, channel traces are displayed using the recording montage. To
display the same data another way, you can use a reformatting montage. You
cannot use a different recording montage.
If several files are open (or if a window is split into two panes), you can use a
different montage for each window (or window pane).
In Reviewer, you can create, edit, and delete reformatting montages. All new
and existing montages are saved with the EEG file unless the file is read-only
(e.g. on CD-ROM).
You cannot edit the recording montage channels. You can only change the Trace
Color used for each channel.

To use a 1 Select the window (or window pane) where you want to use the montage.
reformatting (Different montages can be applied to different windows).
montage 2 From the Montage menu, choose the montage you want to use.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-11

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

The new channels are displayed in the window (and a check mark appears
beside the menu command). The current setting is also displayed on the
status bar.

To create a 1 Choose Montage > Edit.

reformatting The Recording Montage Definition dialog box displays.
montage 2 In the Reformatting Montages box, click New to create a new montage.
The Reformatting Montage Definition dialog box displays.
For a description of this window, see “Reformatting Montages” on
page 4-26.
3 When you are finished, click OK to exit the window and save the
reformatting montage.
You return to Recording Montage Definition dialog box.
4 Click OK to exit the window and save the changes.

To edit or delete a 1 Choose Montage > Edit.

reformatting The Recording Montage Definition dialog box displays.
montage 2 In the Reformatting Montages box, select a reformatting montage from
the Name list.
3 To edit or view the selected montage, click Edit.
OR
To delete the selected montage, click Delete.

Copying Reformatting Montages to Reviewer

Sometimes, a new reformatting montage is created in the database after an
EEG file is recorded. In this case, you can copy the reformatting montage from
the database (instead of creating it again).
You can only copy a reformatting montage to an EEG file if the reformatting
montage belongs to a recording montage that shares common channels with
the recording montage that was used for the EEG recording.
The montages in the database can be either global or patient-specific.
For example, an EEG file was recorded with Recording Montage A. In the
database, there is a Reformatting Montage F that belongs to a Recording

8-12 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Reformatting Montages

Montage B. If Recording Montage A and B use the same channels, you can
copy Reformatting Montage F to Recording Montage A.

Stored in the Stored with an EEG

Database File

Recording Recording
Montage B Montage A

Reformatting Reformatting
Copy
Montage F Montages

For more information on copying montages, see “Copying Electrode Sets and
Montages” on page 4-32.
If the EEG file is read-only (e.g. on CD-ROM), you cannot save a new montage or
any changes to an existing montage.

To copy a 1 In HARMONIE, show the Global Montages view, or the Patients view in
reformatting Montages format.
montage to 2 Move the cursor to the Reformatting Montages box.
Reviewer 3 Double-click the selected montage.
The Reformatting Montage Definition dialog box displays.
4 Click Copy to Clipboard.
The montage is copied to the Windows Clipboard.
5 In Reviewer, choose Montage > Edit.
The Recording Montage Definition dialog box displays.
6 In the Reformatting Montages box, click New to create a new montage.
The Reformatting Montage Definition dialog box displays.
7 Click Paste from Clipboard.
The message, “Warning! The current montage will be replaced” displays.
8 Click OK to replace the blank montage with the copied montage.
9 You can edit the name of the reformatting montage.
10 Click OK to save the reformatting montage.
You return to Recording Montage Definition dialog box.
11 Click OK to exit the window and save the changes.
You can now use the copied reformatting montage.
The HARMONIE and the Reviewer Reformatting Montage Definition dialog boxes
look and work the same. To avoid confusion between the two windows (i.e. if
they are both open at the same time), you should close the window in
HARMONIE before step 5.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-13

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

Working with Events

In general, an event is any noteworthy happening in the recorded EEG file.
This includes recorded sections, discontinuities, annotations, user-defined
events, processor events, and Traces as Observed events.
While reviewing an EEG file, you can find and display all of the existing
events, and mark your own events. You can also view event properties, add
comments to events, and erase events.

Recorded Sections
When you record an EEG file, the various sections are marked to indicate
when recording starts and stops. The basic types of recorded section are:

Calibration Section: The period of saved calibration signals that is attached

to the beginning of the EEG file. (Does not exist if the recording was
calibrated manually).

Sample Section: A duration of signals that is recorded manually (i.e. between

starting and stopping the recording to disk).

Push Button Section: A duration of signals that is recorded before and after a
Push Button device is pressed. Other types of recorded sections are created by
processors (online or offline).

Scheduled Section: A duration of recorded signals that is scheduled in the

recording session parameters using the Scheduled Section Processor.

Spike Section: A duration of signals that is recorded before and after a spike
is detected by the Spike Pattern Detector (SENSA).

Seizure Section : A duration of signals that is recorded before and after a

seizure is detected by the Seizure Pattern Detector (SENSA).

Discontinuities
A discontinuity is an event that is automatically placed to mark the break
between two recorded sections. For example, when you stop recording to disk
and then start again, there is a discontinuity placed between the two sample
sections. A black vertical line is drawn across all channels to identify the
discontinuity.

Annotations
An annotation is an event that marks a specific time on the signals. You can
place an annotation while any montage is selected. A yellow vertical line is
drawn across all channels to identify the event.
Annotations can be placed while an EEG file is recorded, or when it is
reviewed. For example, you can mark “EYES OPEN” and “EYES CLOSED” in
the Observer or in the Reviewer. In Observer, annotations are also marked
automatically when you play a Photic Stimulator protocol or annotate
impedance values.

8-14 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Working with Events

User Defined Events

User defined events are placed in the Reviewer. Unlike annotations, these
events can mark an instant or duration of time. They can be specific to one or
all channels, and appear on one or all of the montages.
For example, there is often some slow wave activity on one or more channels
after a spike or hyperventilation period. You can mark the duration of signals
on these channels using a Slow Wave event.
User-defined events are very flexible because you create the event group that
the events belong to. An event group defines the extent, color, montages, and
channels for an event.
For more information on event groups, see “Defining Event Groups” later in this
section.

Processor Events
A processor event is simply an event (e.g. detection) that is marked by a
processor. For example, the Respiratory Event Detector marks apnea and
partial apnea events. When you use a processor, it creates one or more event
groups in the EEG file.

Traces as Observed Events

If the Traces as Observed feature is enabled in Observer and you are
recording to disk, a Traces as Observed event is marked each time you make a
display change. This type of event can be interpreted by the Reviewer to show
display changes. For more information on this feature, see “Viewing Traces as
Observed in Reviewer” on page 7-22.

Viewing Events
The Reviewer window shows events using event lines, event boxes, recorded
section bars and event locators.
An event line is a thin vertical bar that marks an instant of time on one or all of
the channels. Its name is written from top to bottom. An event box is a square
that highlights a duration of time on one or all of the channels. Its name is
written across the top.
You can choose to display or hide the events that are on the signals.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-15

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

To display/hide Choose View > Events.

the events on the A check mark appears beside the menu command while events are displayed.
signals
Event Line (Instant in Time Event Box (Duration of Time

A recorded section bar is a thick horizontal bar displayed at the top of the
window’s trace area. Each bar is as long as the section it marks. The thickness
of the recorded section bars depends on the number of recorded section types
that are defined in the file. For example, if an EEG file includes the three basic
types of recorded sections (Calibration Section, Sample Section, and Push
Button Section), there is space for three bars in the recorded section bar area.
An event locator is a short vertical bar, drawn on a recorded section bar to
indicate the location of an event. For a Push Button Section, the locator marks
the Push Button Detection (i.e. the time that the Push Button device was
pressed).

8-16 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Working with Events

To display/hide Choose View > Recorded Section Bars.

the recorded A check mark appears beside the menu command while these events are
section bars and displayed. When you hide the recorded section bars, the timestamp on the top
of the channel bar is also hidden.
event locators
Recorded Section Bar Event Locator

The illustration shows a Calibration Section and a Push Button Section,

separated by a discontinuity. There is an event locator on the Push Button
recorded section bar to indicate the Push Button Detection.
You can differentiate recorded section bars by their colors:
• Calibration Section - Red recorded section bar.
• Sample Section - Green recorded section bar.
• Push Button Section - Cyan (i.e. light blue) recorded section bar with cyan
event locator.
For recorded sections created by processors, you can change the default colors
in the processor settings files:
• Scheduled Section - Yellow recorded section bar.
• Spike Section - Dark blue recorded section bar.
• Seizure Section - Magenta (i.e. purple) recorded section bar.
You can also change the colors that are used for processor events and user-
defined events. For example, you can set the color of the desaturation events
marked by the Desaturation Detector (LUNA).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-17

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

Finding Events
There are various ways to find events in a recording.
The scroll bar or keyboard can be used to find a specific time. The following
features are used to find a specific event.
The Find in List feature can be used in the Observer LookBack window, and
in the Reviewer. It helps you to move around the recorded file. It can be used
to view a list of all of the events that have been marked, and to find an event
(by name).
The Find feature can be used to find an event by event group, and can also be
used to find marked sections. This feature is also available in the Observer
LookBack window, and Reviewer.

To find an event
1 Click the Find in List button on the Goto toolbar.
by name
OR
Choose Goto > Find in List.
The Find in List dialog box displays.

2 When you click on an event, the window scrolls to the page that includes
the event. You can also use the keyboard to move through the list of
events. Press HOME, END, PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN, the LEFT ARROW
key, or the RIGHT ARROW key.
3 Click Close when you have finished.

To find an event 1 Click the Find button on the Goto toolbar.

by event group OR
Choose Goto > Find.

8-18 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Working with Events

The Find dialog box displays.

2 Select an event group from the Find what list.

The list includes <Any item>, <Section Mark>, and all of the event groups
defined in the recording’s Event Group List. (<Section Mark> finds
selected sections, not recorded sections).
3 Choose the direction that you want to search for the event by selecting Left
or Right.
4 Click Find Next.
The window scrolls to the page that includes the event. If there is no event
in the specified direction, the speaker beeps.
Once you have specified the search criteria (i.e. the event group to find),
you can use the Find Next and Find Previous features to move to another
event.

To move to the Click Find Next or Find Previous on the Go to toolbar.

next or previous OR
event Choose Go to > Find Next or Find Previous.
The window scrolls to the page that includes the next or previous event from
the event group that is specified in the Find window. If there is no event in
the specified direction, the speaker beeps. (You can click Find to change the
search criteria).

Marking Events
When you mark an annotation in Reviewer, you can enter a name to describe
the event. For user-defined events and processor events, you can enter a free-
text name or select a name from a list of predefined names.

About Event Groups and Names

Events in an EEG file belong to event groups. You can mark events, and events
can be automatically marked by a processor. Events belonging to one group
can have different event names. These names can be predefined or free-text.
Predefined names can be generated by a processor, or entered when you
define an event group in Reviewer. Free-text names can only be entered one
at a time as you mark events in Reviewer.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-19

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

However, once an event group has predefined names, you cannot enter a free-
text name when you mark an event.
Likewise, you cannot enter a free-text name when you view the event properties.
For example, you create an event group for periodic limb movements. The
Limb Movement group defines events with duration that can be marked on
the EMG channel. You add three predefined event names for limb movement
(PLMS), limb movement with arousal (PLMA) and limb movement with
awakening (PLMW). When you mark a Limb Movement event, the pull-
down menu shows the three event names.

While you are marking an event, you can still use the keyboard to move
around in the recording. The active keys include HOME, END, PAGE UP,
PAGE DOWN, RIGHT ARROW and LEFT ARROW. This feature is useful
when you are trying to mark an event that extends beyond the current page.
For information about defining events, see “Adding Names to an Event
Group” on page 8-23.

To mark an event 1 Select an event group from the Event toolbar list.

OR
Choose an event group from the Events menu.
The event group remains selected (in the list) and a check mark appears
beside the menu command until you select a different tool.
2 The remaining steps depend on the properties of the selected event group.
If you are marking an instant of time (e.g. annotation), click the trace
where you want to place the event.
If you are marking a duration of time, drag a rectangular outline to
indicate the channel(s) that the event applies to and the length of the event.
An event for a specific montage and/or channel must be marked on that
montage and/or channel.

8-20 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Working with Events

If there are no predefined event names for the selected event group (e.g.
Annotation), the Event Properties dialog box displays.

3 Enter a free-text name in the Event Name box. You can also add text to the
Comments box. As you type in the Comments box, press CTRL+ENTER
to move to the next line (instead of pressing ENTER).
Click OK. The new event is marked on the recording.
If there is one predefined event name for the selected event group, the new
event is marked on the recording using that name.
If there are two or more predefined event names for the selected event
group, a popup menu appears when you release the mouse button. When
you click a predefined name, the new event is marked on the recording
using that name.
4 If you select the <Auto> entry, you can point and click to mark events. The
event defined for channel type you have clicked will automatically be
entered at the point you have indicated.
The auto entry is used when there are many defined events, each specific
to a given channel. When an appropriate channel is selected, an event
specific to that channel can be marked.
If more than one event type has been defined for a given channel, <Auto>
marking cannot be used for that channel.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-21

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

Viewing Event Properties

After an event can be seen in the window, you can use the Event Properties
feature to display extra information about it. For example, the event group
name, begin time, end time and duration are shown.

For the events marked by a processor, the Event Properties window may include
advanced properties. For example, the Respiratory Event Detector (LUNA)
inserts values into the Advanced Properties box, such as the Duration and
Amplitude/IRA. These variables are calculated by the processor and cannot be
changed. You cannot enter these values manually.
In the Event Properties window, you can add comments to or change the
name of an event.

To view event 1 Click the Event Properties button on the Event toolbar.
properties OR
Choose Events > Event Properties.
The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
command until you stop the feature (or select a different tool).
2 Click (or drag a rectangular outline around) a single event in the window.
You cannot select more than one event.

8-22 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Working with Events

The Event Properties window displays details of the event.

The event group name, begin time, end time and duration are shown.
3 You can change the event name:
• If there are no predefined event names for the selected event group, you
can enter a free-text name in the Event Name box.
• If there are predefined event names for the selected event group, you
must select a name from the Event Name list.
• To add new event names, see “Adding Names to an Event Group”
below.
4 You can change the Comments field.
As you type in the Comments field, press CTRL+ENTER to move to the
next line (instead of pressing ENTER).
5 You can view the detection parameter values in the Advanced Properties
box.
6 Click OK.

Adding Names to an Event Group

In Reviewer, you can change the name of a specific event so the name is more
accurate.
Before you can change the name of an event, the corresponding event group
must include the new name. The Event Names box in the Event Definition
dialog box lists the names that appear:
• In the popup menu when you mark an event.
• In the Event Name list (in the Event Properties dialog box) when you view
the properties of an event.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-23

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

Although you can add new names to the Event Names field, you should not
delete or change the names that are already entered because they may be used
by existing events. Changing an event name in this field does not change the
name of all the events that use the names.
For more information about event names and groups, see “Marking Events”
on page 8-19.

To add names to 1 Click the Event Editor button on the Event toolbar.
an event group OR
Choose Events > Event Editor.
The Event Definition Editor dialog box displays.

2 Select an event group.

3 Click Edit.

8-24 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Working with Events

The Event Definition dialog box displays.

4 Add new names to the Event Names list.

Do not change or delete the names that are already entered.
Separate names with a comma (e.g. “Name1, Name2”).
(If this field is blank, the Event Properties window will display when you
mark an event that belongs to this event group).
5 Click OK to return to the Event Definition Editor dialog box.
6 When you have finished, click Close.

Deleting Events
You can remove any of the annotations, user-defined events, processor
events, and Traces as Observed events that have been marked on the
recording.
You cannot delete recorded sections or discontinuities.

To delete an event 1 Click the Event Eraser button on the Event toolbar.
OR
Choose Events > Event Eraser.
The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
command until you stop the feature (or select a different tool).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-25

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

2 Click an event in the window, or drag a rectangular outline around one or

more events.
The Delete Events dialog box displays.

3 Two options are available:

• To delete all intersecting events, select All intersecting events.
If you clicked a single event in step 2, there is only one intersecting
event. Otherwise, the number of events that intersect with and are
contained in the rectangular outline can vary.
• To delete only those events that are completely selected, select Only the
fully contained event(s).
4 Click OK.
The event(s) are deleted.

Defining Event Groups

Before you can place your own event, you must add an event group. An event
group defines the extent, color, montages, and channels for an event. When
the extent is an instant in time, the event is marked with an event line; a
duration of time is marked with an event box.
User-defined event groups can mark an instant or a duration of time. They
can be specific to one or all channels and appear on one or all of the montages.
Events that are linked to a specific channel are inherently linked to (and can only
be viewed in) the corresponding montage.
Some examples of user-defined event groups include:
• Slow Wave Activity
• Respiratory Events (useful to compare events you mark, with events
marked by the LUNA processor)
• Periodic Leg Movement (useful for LUNA sleep reports)
• Spike Detection (useful to compare events you mark, with events marked
by the SENSA processor)
• Seizure Detection (useful to compare events you mark, with events
marked by the SENSA processor)
• K Complex
• Arousals
• Other events marked by the technologist

8-26 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Working with Events

For more information about predefined and free-text names, see “Marking
Events” on page 8-19 and “Viewing Event Properties” on page 8-22.

To add (or edit) an 1 Click the Event Editor button on the Event toolbar.
event group OR
Choose Events > Event Editor.
The Event Definition Editor dialog box displays.

2 To view the recorded section, Detection (i.e. Spike Detection, Seizure

Detection, Push Button Detection) and Discontinuity event groups, select
the Show Section and Detection Definition check box.
Defining the event group
3 Click New (or click Edit to edit an existing user-defined event group).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-27

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

The Event Definition dialog box displays.

4 Enter a name for the event group in the Event Group Name box.
This name is not used for naming the events.
5 Under Event Extent, select an extent.
The options are With Duration and Instantaneous.
You cannot change this setting after you define the event group.
6 Select montages and channels from the Event Linked To list. This group’s
events can only be placed on (and will only appear on) these montages and
channels.
You cannot change this setting after you define the event group.
7 Click Change to select the color used for the event line or event box.
When the event has a duration (i.e. uses an event box), you should use a
light color so the signals remain visible.
8 You can enter predefined event names in the Event Names box. Separate
names with a comma (e.g. “Name1, Name2”).

8-28 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Working with Events

• If you leave this field blank, the Event Properties window will display
when you mark an event that belongs to this event group.
• If you enter one predefined name, it will automatically be used when
you mark an event that belongs to this event group.
• If you enter two or more names, a popup menu (with the list of names)
appears when you mark an event that belongs to this event group.
9 You can add comments to describe this event group in the Event Group
Description box.
10 You can show information about an event group or event definition by
double-clicking on any property in the Event Group Property Description
or Event Property Definitions box.
The View Property dialog box displays.
An event definition's properties are described, or an event's property value
is shown.
11 Click OK to return to the Event Definition Editor dialog box.
Saving as a group template file
After you have defined the event group, you can save the set of groups as a
group template file.
12 Click Save.
13 In the Save As dialog box, enter a file name and click Save. (A group
template file has the file extension GRF).
When you are viewing another recording, you can load the saved event
groups.
If you want a group template file to be loaded by default, specify the path
and file name in the Default Definition box.
14 When you have finished, click Close.

Deleting Event Groups

You can delete user-defined event groups in the Event Definition Editor
window. All events belonging to the group are deleted.
You can also delete some of the event groups that are created by processors.
For example, the Staging Epoch Marker (in LUNA) creates the Stage event
group. If you want to delete the hypnogram, you delete the Stage event
group.
You cannot delete the recorded section event groups (e.g. Calibration Section,
Sample Section, and Push Button Section) or the Discontinuity event group. You
should not delete the Annotation event group because all annotations placed on
the recording will be deleted.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-29

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

To delete an event 1 At the Event Definition Editor dialog box, select the event group that you
group want deleted.
2 Click Delete.
A warning message displays.

3 Click Yes.
The event group is removed from the list.
4 Click Close.

Printing and Saving Selected Sections

Before you can print or save a portion of an EEG file, you must identify the
segments of the EEG file that you want to use. These segments are called
selected sections.
Selected sections are not the same as recorded sections. A recorded section is a
type of event. For more information on recorded sections, see “Working with
Events” on page 8-14.

Working with Selected Sections

A selected EEG section is shown in gray, and a selected digital video section is
shown in blue in the Reviewer window (or window pane). When two EEG or
digital video sections overlap, they become one section.
Selected sections are not stored with the EEG file; they are only used for
printing and saving signals. If you want to permanently mark a segment of the
recording, use an event to mark the duration of time.

Marking Sections
While you are marking (or erasing) sections, you can still use the keyboard to
move around in the recording. The active keys include: HOME, END, PAGE
UP, PAGE DOWN, RIGHT ARROW, and LEFT ARROW. This feature is
useful when you are trying to mark (or erase) a section that extends beyond
the current page.

8-30 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Printing and Saving Selected Sections

To mark a section 1 Click the Section Marker button on the Tools toolbar.
of EEG OR
Choose Tools > Section Marker.
The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
command until you stop the feature (or select a different tool).
2 Click at a time to mark the beginning of the section, then click again to
mark the end of the section. (The marked section is shown in gray).
You can mark another section now. When sections overlap, they are joined
to become one section.
3 To deactivate the tool, choose Section Marker again.

To mark a section 1 Click the Section Marker for Saving DV button on the Tools toolbar.
of digital video OR
Choose Tools > Section Marker for Saving DV.
The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
command until you stop the feature (or select a different tool).
2 Click at a time to mark the beginning of the section, then click again to
mark the end of the section. (The marked section, which contains both
digital video and EEG, is shown in blue).
You can mark another section now. When sections overlap, they are joined
to become one section.
3 To deactivate the tool, choose Section Marker for Saving DV again.

To mark the 1 Click the Section Marker for Saving DV button on the Tools toolbar.
smallest OR
enclosing Choose Tools > Section Marker for Saving DV.
recording section The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
with digital video command until you stop the feature (or select a different tool).
2 Double-click at a specific recording section.
When two sections (other than a Sample section) overlap at the selected
point, a popup menu containing the names of the sections will display at
your cursor.
3 Select the section you want to mark. (After you select one of the sections,
the corresponding section will be marked).

To mark the 1 Click the Section Marker button on the Tools toolbar.
smallest OR
enclosing Choose Tools > Section Marker.
recording section The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
command until you stop the feature (or select a different tool).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-31

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

2 Double-click at a specific recording section.

When two sections (other than a Sample section) overlap at the selected
point, a popup menu containing the names of the sections will display at
your cursor.
3 Select the section you want to mark. (After you select one of the sections,
the corresponding section will be marked).

To mark multiple 1 Click the Multiple Section Marker button on the Tools toolbar.
sections OR
Choose Tools > Multiple Sections Marker.
The Multiple Sections Marker dialog box displays.

2 If you want to erase all selected sections, select the Remove any existing
marks check box.
3 Select the event groups that you want to mark.
The window shows all of the recorded sections and user-defined event
groups that are defined for the recording. Only the event groups that mark
a duration of time are included, because you cannot mark an instant in
time. (For example, you must manually select a section to mark an
annotation that is in that section).
OR
To mark the entire file, select all of the event groups by clicking Select All.
You do not have to select an event group if it is included in another group.
For example, you can select Calibration Section and Sample Section if all of
the other groups (e.g. Push Button Sections, Spike Sections) are included in
the continuous Sample Section.
4 Select the With Digital Video check box to include digital video for the
marked sections.
5 Click OK.

8-32 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Printing and Saving Selected Sections

When EEG is marked, all of the marked sections (i.e. from the selected
event groups) are shown in gray.
When both digital video and EEG are marked, all of the marked sections
are shown in blue.

Erasing Marked Sections

When you erase a selected section (or part of it), you do not delete the signals
from either the display or the EEG file. By erasing, you simply ‘deselect’ (or
‘unmark’) the section.

To erase a marked 1 Click the Section Eraser button on the Tools toolbar.
section OR
Choose Tools > Section Eraser.
2 Click at one end of the section.
3 Move to the other end of the section and click again.
Until you release the mouse button, the length appears as a tool tip near
the cursor, and the selected area’s begin time, end time and length are
shown on the status bar.
When you release the mouse button, the selected section is erased.
4 You can erase another section now, or you can erase parts of a section.
When you erase a section that is in the middle of a selected section, two
separate sections are formed.
5 To deactivate the tool, choose Section Eraser again.

To erase the 1 Click the Section Eraser button on the Tools toolbar.
smallest OR
enclosing Choose Tools > Section Eraser.
recording section The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
command until you stop the feature (or select a different tool).
2 Select the section you want to erase.
When two sections (other than a Sample section) overlap at the selected
point, a menu containing the names of the sections displays at your cursor.
3 Select the section you want to erase. (After you select one of the sections,
the corresponding section will be erased).

To erase all 1 Click the Multiple Section Marker button on the Tools toolbar.
selected sections OR
Choose Tools > Multiple Sections Marker.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-33

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

The Multiple Sections Marker dialog box displays.

2 Select the Remove any existing marks check box.

3 Click OK.

Finding Marked Sections

When there are several marked sections in an EEG file, you can use the Find
feature to display them.

To find marked 1 Click the Find button on the Goto toolbar.

sections OR
Choose Go to > Find.
The Find dialog box displays.
2 Select <Section Mark> from the Find what list.
This option finds selected sections, not recorded sections.
3 Select the direction that you want to search for the sections.
4 Click Find Next.
The window scrolls to the page that includes the selected section.
If there is no section in the specified direction, the speaker beeps.
After you specify “<Section Mark>” as the search criteria, you can use the
Find Next and Find Previous features to move to other selected sections.

Printing EEG Data

You can print an entire EEG file, or important segments of it on any Windows
compatible printer. When you print EEG signals, the signals are printed using
a time scale that defines the page width that is used for one second of signal.
You specify this time scale at the same time as the time scale for the screen.

8-34 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Printing and Saving Selected Sections

There are 32 time scales to choose from (30.0, 29.1, 28.1, 27.2, 26.3, 25.3, 24.4,
23.4, 22.5, 21.6, 20.6, 19.7, 18.8, 17.8, 16.9, 15.9, 15.0, 14.1, 13.1, 12.2, 11.3, 10.3,
9.4, 8.4, 7.5, 6.6, 5.6, 4.7, 3.8, 2.8, 1.9 and 0.9). Three popular choices are 30.0,
15.0 and 7.5 mm/sec.
Note the following:
• At the top of each page, the patient identification, patient name, date, file
name, montage name, time scale and time line interval are printed.
• The channel bar appears as it does on the screen (i.e. with the same
settings).
• Only the displayed channels of the current montage are printed.
• The channels display using the selected filters (if any).
• The event lines and boxes for annotations and user-defined events are
printed along with the signals.
• The start time of each selected section is printed.
• Time lines are also printed with the signals if they are displayed on the
screen.

To change the Select one of the four last-used time scales from the Time Scale menu.
time scale for OR
printing To view all of the available time scales, choose Time Scale > More.
The Time Scales dialog box displays.

Select mm/s or s/page.

Select a time scale from the list, then click OK.
After you finish printing, you may want to set the time scale back to the
appropriate scale for viewing signals on your screen.
Before you can print EEG signals, you must mark one or more selected sections.
You can preview the selected sections before printing.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-35

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

To preview the 1 Click the Print Preview button on the Main toolbar.
pages to be OR
printed Choose File > Print Preview.
2 The Print Preview window displays.
You can display one or two pages at a time. To move around between the
pages, click Next Page or Prev Page (or use the vertical scroll bar). Click
Zoom In and Zoom Out to view specific pages.
3 Click Print to display the Print dialog box.
OR
Click Close to exit the Print Preview window.

To print all 1 At the Print Preview window, click Print.

selected sections OR
Choose File > Print.
The Print dialog box displays.

2 You can select a printer from the Name list.

3 To change the printer properties (e.g. page size or orientation), click
Properties.
(You can also choose File > Print Setup to change these options).
4 Click OK.

PrintScreen Utility
The Print Screen utility enables you to print either the full screen, or the active
window at the touch of a key. The utility runs in the background, and can be
enabled or disabled at any time. It is particularly useful for printing out
voltage maps and their corresponding EEG data.

8-36 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Printing and Saving Selected Sections

To start the
On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Start > Programs > Stellate
PrintScreen utility HARMONIE > PrintScreen Utility.
The Print Screen icon appears in the lower right hand corner of the
Windows Task Bar.
You can set various options for the Print Screen Utility, including page size,
scaling, and the default printer.

To set the 1 Start the PrintScreen Utility.

PrintScreen 2 Double-click the PrintScreen icon in the lower right-hand corner of the
options Windows Task Bar.
The PrintScreen dialog box displays.

3 Select or clear the Enable Capture check box to activate or disable the
PrintScreen utility.
4 Select the size for printing the image by selecting the appropriate option.
To print the window or screen at its actual size, select No Scaling.
5 To select a printer, click Print Setup.
The Print Setup dialog box displays.

6 To shut down the print utility, click Exit.

When using the Print Screen Utility, you can print either the entire screen or
the active window.

To print using the 1 To print the full screen, press PRINT SCREEN.
PrintScreen utility 2 To print only the active window, press ALT+PRINT SCREEN.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-37

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

Saving EEG Data

Selected sections can be saved as a new file. You can choose where (i.e. the
volume) you want the file saved. The existing file is not affected when you
save.
If you save the new file to the same volume as the original, you must use a
different file identification number. For example, you can append the letter S
(for ‘saved file’) at the end of the number.
If you plan to save or transfer files to a computer that is not running Windows
(e.g. Novell Network OS), you must limit the File Identification to eight
characters. In this case, you cannot include spaces or special characters (e.g.
@#*-/.\).
Before you can save EEG signals, you must mark one or more selected
sections.
If the selected sections do not include the Calibration Section, it is added to the
new file automatically.

When you save an EEG file, none of the attached reports are copied; only the
selected sections are included in the new file.

To save sections 1 In Reviewer, use the Section Marker to mark sections of the file.
of EEG data 2 Choose File > Save Selection As.
The Save As dialog box displays.

3 Under File, enter a file name in the Name box.

Do not enter a file extension as it will be added automatically.
4 Select a format from the Format list.
Usually, you should use the Signal File (HARMONIE) format (the
default).

8-38 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Printing and Saving Selected Sections

5 Under Volume, click Scan, then select a volume from the Name box.

To specify who created the file, select a name from the Created by list.

To specify who the file will be assigned to, select a name from the Assign
to list.

To automatically back up the file, select the Make backup after saving
check box.
6 Click OK.
The selected sections of the HARMONIE signal file (and digital video file)
are copied and saved.
The new file is registered in the database with the patient.
If you want to move or delete the original (or the saved) EEG file, you must
use HARMONIE (i.e. not Windows Explorer). For more information on
EEG files, see “Understanding the Database and Files” on page 9-2.

Exporting Sections of Data to a Text File

The signal data in marked sections can be saved as a text file. When you
export using this feature, the filtered signal points from the displayed
channels of the EEG file are stored as text.
Exporting EEG data is not the same as saving marked sections. A saved signal
file is registered in the HARMONIE database and can be opened in the Reviewer.
Before you can export the EEG data, you must mark one or more sections.

To export EEG 1 In Reviewer, use the Section Marker to mark sections of the file.
data to a text file 2 Choose File > Save Selection as Text.
The Save As dialog box displays.

3 Enter a file name in the File Name box.

The TXT file extension will be added automatically.
4 If you want to save the new file into a different folder, select the new path
(drive and folder) in the Save In box.
5 Click Save.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-39

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

The selected sections are saved as a text file. The file includes a description
of the file and each displayed channel (including the filters that are
applied), and lists the data points in separate columns for each channel.

Generating Reports
When an EEG file is recorded, the Recorder creates a report that describes the
recording session. The Standard Log report is similar to the recording log that
can be viewed in the Observer.
In HARMONIE, you can view the Standard Log and any other reports that
have been attached to the EEG file. You can create reports in HARMONIE or
Reviewer, using Excel and Word report templates.
Data can be imported to, or exported from reports, using the Plain Text
Document, MS Word Document, or MS Excel Document templates.
The first time a report is generated, a name or logo must be entered on the
report template.

To create a report 1 Choose File > Report.

in Reviewer The Create Report dialog box displays.

2 Select a template from the Template list.

To show only the report templates that can be used online, select the Show
template supporting on-line operation only check box.
3 If you are entered in the database, you can select your name from the
Author list.
4 At the report, enter your comments in the Comments field, if appropriate.
You can also write the report using a word processor, or import the data
from another document. To do this, copy the text by pressing CTRL+C,
then paste it in the Report Text field by pressing CTRL+V.
The Report Text field can contain up to 32K of text (32,000 characters).
5 You have the following options for saving the report:
• Choose File > Save.
The Save Report dialog box displays. You can change the default report
name.
Click OK. The report is saved to the database after the document is
closed.

8-40 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Generating Reports

• Choose File > Close or Exit.

You are prompted to save the changes. If you click Yes, the report is
saved to the database after the document is closed. If you click No, the
document closes without saving.
• Choose File > Save As.
The Save As dialog box displays. You can change the file path and
name.
Click Yes. The file is saved outside the database.

To create a report 1 Show a file view format.

in HARMONIE 2 Display the reports and statistics by choosing View > Show Reports and
Statistics.
3 Select the appropriate file.
4 Go to the Reports box and double-click the gray bar.
OR
Go to the Reports box, right-click and choose New from the popup menu.
OR
Choose Edit > New.
The Create Report dialog box displays.

5 Select a template from the Template list.

To show only the report templates that can be used online, select the Show
template supporting on-line operation only check box.
6 If your name is entered in the database, you can select it from the Author
list.
7 At the report, enter your comments in the Comments field, if appropriate.
You can also write the report using a word processor, or import the data
from another document. To do this, copy the text by pressing CTRL+C,
then paste it in the Report Text field by pressing CTRL+V.
The Report Text field can contain up to 32K of text (32,000 characters).
8 You have the following options for saving the report:
• Choose File > Save.
The Save Report dialog box displays. You can change the default report
name.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-41

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

Click OK. The report is saved to the database after the document is
closed.
• Choose or File > Close or Exit. You are prompted to save the changes. If
you click Yes, the report is saved to the database after the document is
closed. If you click No, the document closes without saving.
• Choose File > Save As.
The Save As dialog box displays. You can change the file path and
name.
Click Yes. The file is saved outside the database.

To view/edit a 1 In HARMONIE, show any file view.

report in 2 Select an EEG file from the list.
HARMONIE The attached reports are listed in the Reports box.
3 Click Edit on the view specific toolbar.
OR
Right-click the report and choose Edit from the popup menu.
OR
Double-click on the report.
The Report opens.
4 You can use the Copy to Clipboard and Paste from Clipboard features if
you want to copy text to or paste text from a word processor.
5 Click Print Preview to view and/or print the report.
6 When you have finished viewing or editing the report, click OK to save the
changes (or Cancel).

Viewing File Information

You can view information about an EEG file in the Reviewer. This
information includes the patient identification number, the patient name, the
EEG identification number, and the date and time that the file was recorded.

8-42 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Reviewing Patient Analog Video

To view file 1 Choose File > Information.

information in The File Information dialog box displays.
Reviewer

You cannot edit any of the fields.

2 When you have finished viewing the information, click OK.

Reviewing Patient Analog Video

As you review an EEG file in Reviewer, you can view the patient analog video
recording in another window, using Video-in-a-Window or using a stand-
alone video monitor. When you synchronize EEG signals with video frames,
you can correlate significant events in the EEG file with their corresponding
physical actions.
Throughout this section, the word video includes audio if sound was recorded
with the video.
To synchronize the analog video, Reviewer uses a time code signal that is
recorded with each frame of video. The time code is a video frame number in
the format of hours, minutes, seconds and frames (HH:MM:SS:FF).
Only analog video recorded with a time code signal can be reviewed using the
Video Synchronization mode.
To record a time code signal, the video camera output is encoded by a Time
Code Generator (TCG) that is connected to the computer recording the EEG file.
The computer sets the time code on the video to be synchronized with the time
in the EEG file. For more information, see “Timecode Generator” on page 5-27.
When you review the analog video, the time code is read from the video
signal by a Time Code Reader (TCR). The computer-controlled PlayBack VCR
must have an integrated TCR (e.g. Panasonic AG-2550C with integrated BCD
Control).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-43

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

The PlayBack VCR must be configured in the Hardware Setup function. For more
information, see “Selecting the PlayBack VCR on page 2-24.
For information about reviewing digital video files, see “Reviewing Digital
Video Files” on page 11-12.

Analog Video Synchronization Mode

Before you start Video Sync mode, you should insert the video tape for the
EEG file that is open in Reviewer.
In addition to the video frame number, the time code includes a hidden field that
is used to ensure that the video matches the EEG file. If you try to start Video
Sync mode using a video for the wrong patient or recording session, the
message “Invalid Video Segment at Current Tape Position” displays.
In Video Sync mode, the status of the PlayBack VCR is displayed on
Reviewer’s status bar. For example, the status bar displays “VCR Control:
Initializing” when Reviewer is checking if the video is valid. It displays “VCR
Control: Stopped” when the VCR is stopped.
When Reviewer is in Video Sync mode, your direct commands on the VCR
panel (or remote control) affect both the VCR and Reviewer simultaneously.
The VCR commands include:
• Play
• Pause
• Play Fast Forward
• Play Fast Reverse
• Stop
• Move Fast Forward
• Move Fast Backward
While the video is playing, you can use Pause, Play Fast Forward and Play Fast
Backward. After you stop the video, you can use Move Fast Forward and Move
Fast Backward.
The Sync Cursor appears on the signals while the analog video is playing. This
red vertical line wipes across the old page of signals as a new page of signals
is displayed. The location of the Sync Cursor equals the time code of the
displayed video frame.
When the video is stopped, the Sync Cursor on the Reviewer signals
disappears. The signals stop moving (i.e. the display is not refreshed) until
you use the Play command.

Starting Analog Video Synchronization Mode

There are two ways to start Video Sync mode. Use the method that best
reflects what you want to accomplish:
• If you want to view the EEG signals for the current video frame, select
Follow Video Movement.

8-44 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Reviewing Patient Analog Video

• If you want to view the video frame for a specific time in the EEG signals,
select Show Video at EEG Position.
In Video Sync mode, Reviewer responds to VCR commands as explained
above. The way you start Video Sync mode does not affect how it works after
EEG data and video are synchronized.

Following Analog Video Movement

The video time is the time code that is available to Reviewer when the video is
playing, paused, playing fast forward or playing fast backward. When you
select Follow Video Movement, the page of EEG signals that contains the
video time is displayed with the Sync Cursor at the corresponding location,
and Video Sync mode is enabled.
If the video is stopped, fast forwarding or rewinding, the time code is
unavailable. The time code becomes available to Reviewer when the Play
button is pressed (the VCR is in normal playback mode). Video Sync mode is
enabled immediately but Reviewer waits for a video time before displaying
the Sync Cursor at the corresponding location.

To view the 1 Click the Follow Video Movement button on the Tools toolbar.
current analog OR
video frame EEG Choose Tools > Follow Video Movement.
signals The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
command until you stop Video Sync mode (or select a different tool).
2 Wait until Reviewer has initialized the video. You can see the status (e.g.
“VCR Control: Initializing”) on the status bar at the bottom of the window.
3 If the video is playing, paused, cuing (playback combined with fast
forwarding) or reviewing (playback combined with rewinding), the page
of signals that contains the video time is displayed with the Sync Cursor at
the corresponding location, and Video Sync mode is enabled.
If the video is stopped, fast forwarding, or rewinding, Video Sync mode is
enabled, but Reviewer waits for you to use the Play command before
displaying the Sync Cursor.
4 To stop Video Sync mode, click Follow Video Movement again.

Show Analog Video at EEG Position

After you select Show Video at EEG Position, you must use the mouse
pointer to select an EEG position. Reviewer controls the VCR to find the
corresponding video position. Once the video frame is found, the Sync Cursor
is displayed at the selected EEG position, Video Sync mode is enabled, and
the video starts playing (or remains paused).
While the Show Video at EEG Position command is selected, the mouse pointer
can be used again to select another EEG position.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-45

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

To view an analog 1 Click the Show Video at EEG Position button on the Tools toolbar.
video frame at a OR
specific time in Choose Tools > Show Video at EEG Position.
the EEG signals The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
command until you stop Video Sync mode (or select a different tool).
2 Wait until Reviewer has initialized the video. You can see the status (e.g.
“VCR Control: Initializing”) on the status bar at the bottom of the window.
3 The mouse pointer becomes active.
Click at a time on the signals, and drag the Sync Cursor to the left or the
right. As you drag, the EEG time at the cursor is shown on the status bar.
When you release the mouse button, the VCR Status dialog box displays.
4 Wait as Reviewer finds the video frame with a time code equal to the
target time.
As you wait, you can specify whether Reviewer will start playing or pause
at the target time.
5 If the time code is found, the Sync Cursor is displayed at the selected EEG
position, Video Sync mode is enabled and the video starts playing (or
remains paused).
The mouse pointer becomes active again; you can select another target
time.
6 To stop Video Sync mode, click Show Video at EEG Position again.

Reviewing Stellate DOS Files

In Reviewer you can view an EEG file that was recorded with Stellate
Rhythm, Monitor or Eclipse programs. For these DOS programs, the signal
file has the extension EEG and the status file has the extension STA.

Importing Montage Information from DOS Files

The montages for these programs are not stored with the EEG files. They are
stored in montage files with the extension MTG. Up to 20 montages can be
stored in a montage file.
When a montage is used for an EEG file, the file stores the montage name and
the name of the montage file where the montage is defined. To review a
Stellate DOS file using its own montages, you must identify the path to the
folder where the montage files are stored. (The montage folder is typically
named C:\Stelmtg).
The Rhythm and Monitor Configuration utility is also used to assign types to
specific channel names. The type is used when you review a Stellate DOS file
that includes a channel with a matching name. In Reviewer, channel type is
used for several features:

8-46 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Reviewing Stellate DOS Files

Specific channel types are required for some processors. For example, the
Respiratory Event Detector can only detect events on airflow (FLOW) and
effort (EFF) channels. If the type is not assigned for a channel name, the EEG
type is used by default.
The ranges of sensitivity values depend on channel type.
Filters can be defined for specific channel types.
For example, a Rhythm file is recorded with an airflow channel named NASL.
If you want to use the Respiratory Event Detector on this channel, you must
create a trace type assignment that identifies NASL as a FLOW type channel.
The first time you open a Stellate DOS file in Reviewer, a status file (with the
extension STS) is created for the file. The status file includes montage
information, the trace type for each channel and all of the event information.
If you open an EEG file and notice that the montages or trace type
assignments are incorrect, you can delete the status file. After you fix the DOS
file configuration (i.e. change the montage folder path or trace type
assignments), you can open the file again. A new status file is created.
If you delete the status file, you will lose the event information. The original
events in the EEG file will be added to the new status file, but all changes you
made since first opening the EEG file in Reviewer are lost. For example, events
that you (or a processor) marked are lost.

Importing Events from DOS Files

For files recorded with MONITOR, spike/seizure events and sections are
stored in the STA file and automatically imported into HARMONIE.
For files recorded and reviewed with ECLIPSE, the staging information, the
default cardio-respiratory events and any user defined events are stored in
files with the extension STG and EVT, respectively. These events are
automatically imported into HARMONIE. The staging epochs are positioned
at their original times, not on 20 or 30s boundaries as enforced by
HARMONIE’s Staging Epoch Marker.

Importing Calibration Factors from DOS Files

Calibration factors are retrieved differently, depending if the DOS file was
processed by RHYTHM/MONITOR or by ECLIPSE.
For RHYTHM/MONITOR files, which normally contain only EEG channels
in microvolts, the calibration factors are stored in the EEG file header. These
factors are computed by a separate calibration procedure that is normally
done before a recording is started. For more information, refer to the “Record
Calibration” section in the RHYTHM/MONITOR manual.
For ECLIPSE files, which may contain channel with different types and units
typical of sleep recordings, the above calibration factors cannot be used.
Therefore each channel requires a procedure that must be done in the file
after it has been recorded. Using ECLIPSE’s “Review and Score” function, the
user must select a section that contains calibration signals of known
amplitude and units and use the program to identify the minimum and

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-47

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

maximum values in this section for selected channels. The calibration points
are marked with “labels” with a text of the form “=nnuu”, where “nn” is the
known value of the calibration point and “uu” is a one or two letter code that
designates the units in which this channel is measured. Typical calibration
points that can be found in ECLIPSE files are:
“=-50µV”, “=50µV”, “=0%”, “=100%”, etc.
These labels are stored in a file with an LBL extension. For more information,
refer to the “Review and Score” section in the ECLIPSE manual.
When an ECLIPSE file is read by HARMONIE, the above calibration labels, if
they are present, supersede any calibration factors that are present in the EEG
file header. The values and units of the calibration points are automatically
imported into HARMONIE. The following ECLIPSE units are automatically
recognized by HARMONIE:

If the first character of the units HARMONIE uses the

code in ECLIPSE is: following units for the channel:
“U” or “u” µV
“M”, “m”, “P”, or “p” mV
“V” or “v” V
“B” or “b” BPM
“%” %

The default units used by HARMONIE will be “µV”.

To configure 1 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Programs > Stellate HARMONIE
Stellate DOS files > Rhythm and Monitor Configuration.
for reading The Rhythm/Monitor Configuration dialog box displays.

2 Enter the complete path to the montage folder.

3 To assign a channel type and label, click Add.

8-48 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Reviewing Stellate DOS Files

The Trace Assignments dialog box displays.

Enter a channel label and select a type from the list.

4 Click OK.
5 At the Rhythm/Monitor Configuration dialog box, click OK to save the
configuration changes.
The message, “Configuration completed successfully” displays.
6 Click OK.
The procedure for opening EEG files is explained in “Opening Files” on
page 8-2. Remember to switch the Files of type field to show the DOS files.
When you open a Stellate DOS file in the Reviewer, the corresponding
montage file (in the montage folder) is accessed. If the montage file cannot be
found, a default montage file is used. The channel names are then set to “c01-
ref”, “c02-ref”, . . . “cN-ref” (where N is the number of channels) and all
channels are given type EEG.

Converting a DOS File into a HARMONIE File

HARMONIE EEG files are easy to access because they have corresponding
database entries. You can convert a Stellate DOS file into a HARMONIE file
by archiving it in the Reviewer.

To convert a DOS 1 In Reviewer, open the DOS file.

file 2 Mark the entire file with the Multiple Sections Marker tool.
For more information on selected sections, see “Printing and Archiving
Selected Sections” earlier in this chapter.
3 Archive the file using a different file name.
Specify a path to an existing HARMONIE volume, make sure that the File
Format box is set to Signal File (HARMONIE), and then click OK.
A copy of the DOS file is now saved as a HARMONIE file.
You can also import the file into the database. When you import a file, you are
simply creating a database entry for the EEG file. By doing this, you link it to
a specific patient and a volume. For more information on importing files, see
“Importing Files into the Database” on page 9-34.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-49

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

Converting a HARMONIE File into a DOS File

You can use a Stellate DOS program (e.g. Eclipse) to view a HARMONIE file.
To do this, you must convert the file into a Stellate DOS file by using
Reviewer to save it as a DOS file.

To convert a 1 In Reviewer, open the EEG file.

HARMONIE file 2 Use the Section Marker or Multiple Section Marker to mark the file.
For more information on selected sections, see “Printing and Saving
Selected Sections” on page 8-30.
3 Choose File > Save Selection As.
The Save As dialog box displays.

4 Enter a new file name in the Name box.

Do not enter a file extension as it will be added automatically.
5 From the Format list, select Eeg File (Rhythm/Monitor).
6 Under Volume, click Scan, then select a volume from the Name box.
7 To include digital video with the saved data, select the Include Digital
Video File check box.
8 To specify who created the file, select a name from the Created by list.
9 To specify who the file will be assigned to, select a name from the Assign
to list.
10 To automatically back up the file, select the Make backup after saving
check box.
11 Click OK.
The selected sections of the HARMONIE signal file (and digital video file)
are copied and saved as a DOS file.

8-50 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Reviewing Stellate DOS Files

The new file is registered in the database with the patient.

If you want to move or delete the original (or the saved) EEG file, you must
use HARMONIE (i.e. not Windows Explorer). For more information on
EEG files, see “Understanding the Database and Files” on page 9-2.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 8-51

Chapter 8: Reviewing Files

8-52 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

CHAPTER 9: File Management

This chapter explains how EEG files are managed in the HARMONIE
database. Files can be backed up, assigned, archived and verified.
Roxio's DirectCD software makes your CD-ROM recorder as easy to use as a
disk drive. If you have DirectCD, you can back up one or more EEG files to a
CD-ROM using HARMONIE.
If you do not have DirectCD, you cannot back up EEG files directly to
CD-ROM. Instead, you must back up the files to a hard disk drive known as
the virtual CD-ROM, and then use mastering software to burn the CD-ROM.
This chapter covers:
• Understanding the Database and Files
• Backing Up Files
• Assigning and Reviewing Files
• Archiving and Verifying Files
• Using DirectCD to Archive Files to CD-ROM
• Archiving to CD-ROM Without DirectCD
• Undo Archive Feature
• File Maintenance

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-1

Chapter 9: File Management

Understanding the Database and Files

When you record an EEG file, HARMONIE creates an entry in the database to
describe information about the file. This entry describes the patient and
volume the file belongs to. For example, File 98-549 belongs to Patient 7428
(Barry Smith), and the file belongs to volume Record-D.
A volume is a name used to identify where EEG files are stored. Each hard
disk drive or CD-ROM that stores EEG files has a corresponding volume
name. For example, VOL2000-001 identifies a specific CD-ROM. Record-D
identifies Drive D on the recording workstation.
HARMONIE automatically creates a volume information file named
“Volume.inf” when you create a new volume. It is always stored in a folder
named “HarmEEG” on the hard disk drive or CD-ROM that corresponds to
the volume. (The Volume.inf file contains an identification number and the
volume name).
Each EEG file entry in the database consists of two separate files. The signal
file has the extension SIG, and the status file has the extension STS. These two
files must always stay together. Usually, they are stored in the HarmEEG
folder along with the Volume.inf file.
If you use digital video, the database entry is also associated with two video
files that have the extensions MPG and MPX.
If you have SENSA or LUNA, you can copy, delete, and import spectral files
using the features described in this chapter. Each spectral file entry in the
database consists of two separate files (i.e. the SPC and SPH files).
When you start HARMONIE, you open the central database and the program
opens the EEG files when necessary. The diagram below illustrates several of
the points made above.

The Database has information

about a Volume (VOL2000-001)
and information about the EEG
recordings in the volume:
00-622
00-431
00-107

HARMONIE
The HarmEEG folder on a CD
contains the EEG files and the
Volume information file:
00_622.sig
00_622.sts
00_431.sig
00_431.sts
00_107.sig
00_107.sts
Volume.inf

In this example, the Volume.inf file contains the volume name

“VOL2000-001”.

9-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Understanding the Database and Files

Using the File Views

Each of the HARMONIE file views show a list of EEG files. User View 1
shows all of the EEG files in the database.
In all of the file views, columns can be shown/hidden or sorted in ascending/
descending order by choosing a command from the View menu, or by right-
clicking and choosing a command from the popup menu that appears.
Columns can also be resized and moved around. Right-clicking on a file,
report, or statistic entry displays a popup menu. The reports and statistics of a
selected file are displayed in the Reports and Statistics lists, below the File list.
While a file is being recorded, it is displayed in the database. The file type is
“REC”, the icon is red, and the size is 0 Bytes to indicate the recording status.
While recording, the file cannot be deleted or opened, and the current status
cannot be changed.

To sort files in 1 Show the Patients or Staff view in Files/Reports format.

ascending or 2 Right-click any column header, and choose Sort Ascending or Sort
descending order Descending from the menu that appears.
OR

Click on any column header. If the files are in ascending order, they will be
sorted in descending order and the arrow will appear beside the title. If


the files are in descending order, they will be sorted in ascending order
and the arrow will appear.

To show/hide 1 Show the Patients or Staff view in Files/Reports format.

columns 2 To hide a column, right-click on a column header, and choose Hide
Column from the menu that appears.
OR
Choose View > Show/Hide Columns, and select a column name that has a
check mark beside it. (Displayed columns have check marks beside them).
3 To show a column, right-click on any column header, and choose Show
Columns from the menu that appears. (The menu only lists hidden
columns).
OR
Choose View > Show/Hide Columns, and select a column name that does
not have a check mark beside it. (Hidden columns do not have check
marks beside them).

To filter the list of Applying a filter

files 1 Show a HARMONIE file view.
2 Under Filters, select a value from the appropriate filter list (e.g. select Read
from the Read Status filter) and click Apply.
3 To view files created within a certain range of dates, from the Date filter
list, select Before, At, or After, then enter a date or select Today.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-3

Chapter 9: File Management

The files are shown based on the dates that the files were created.
4 You can also combine filters to create a more specific filter.
The view is refreshed with the list of files generated by the filter.
Removing a filter
5 Select <Any> from the filter list.
6 Click Apply.
The view is refreshed and contains a list of all the files.
The following example illustrates how the three HARMONIE file views
differ. There are three files in a database. The files belong to two different
patients and two different volumes as shown below.

File 00-549
Patient 7428 Volume
(Barry Smith) Record-C
File 00-107
Patient 5106 Volume
(Judy Davies) VOL2000-001
File 00-431

Show the Patients view in List format, then select Barry Smith. Double-click
(or click Files/Reports) to show the Files/Reports format. The list of files
shows 00-549 and 00-107.
Show the Volumes view in List format, then select VOL2000-001. Double-click
(or click Files/Reports) to show the Files/Reports format. The list of files
shows 00-107 and 00-431.
Show the User File View 1 view. The list of files shows 00-549, 00-107, and
00-431.

Backing Up Files
In HARMONIE, files can automatically be backed up to another volume at
the end of a recording. There are two ways to back up files: you can make a
backup copy immediately after recording an EEG file, or backups can be
made from the database.
Before you can back up a file, you must create a volume on a CD-ROM, your
workstation, or another network workstation. See “Creating Volumes” on
page 4-9.

9-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Backing Up Files

To automatically 1 Start the recording session. (See “To start a recording session” on
back up a file page 5-4).
after recording At the Recorder dialog box, select the Automatic backup after end of
recording check box.
2 Use Observer to record and view the recording. (See “To start and stop
recording to disk” on page 6-13).
3 Exit Observer by choosing File > Exit.
4 Exit Observer and Recorder.
The Recorder-Backup Recording dialog box displays.

5 Select a volume from the Backup to destination volume list.

6 If the file contains digital video, select the Backup digital video files (if
applicable) check box.
7 Select one of the following options from the Storage status consideration
box:
• Use the copy as the master file
• Use the original as the master file
8 Click OK.

To back up a file 1 Click Files to Backup on the File View toolbar.

2 You can filter the files by date and volume.
• To filter by date, select <Any>, Before, At, After, or Today from the Date
list.
• To filter by volume, select <Any>, or select a volume from the Volume
list
3 Click Apply.
4 Select the file(s) you want to back up.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-5

Chapter 9: File Management

5 Click Backup.
The Backup File(s) dialog box displays.

6 Select a volume from the Backup to destination volume list.

7 If the file contains digital video, select the Backup digital video files (if
applicable) check box.
8 For Master files, select one of the following options from the Storage status
consideration box:
• Use the copy as the master file
• Use the original as the master file
9 Click OK.

Assigning and Reviewing Files

At the time of recording, or at a subsequent time, a file can be assigned to a
specific staff member for reading. Staff members can then request all the files
assigned to them, and remove them from the list after the interpretation.

To assign a file 1 Click Files to Assign or User File View 2 on the File View toolbar.
OR
Choose Show > Files to Assign.
2 Select the file that will be assigned to a staff member. Then click Assign.

9-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Assigning and Reviewing Files

The Assign Files dialog box displays.

3 Select a staff member from the Assign the files to list.

4 To keep this staff member as the default when assigning files, select the Set
as default check box.
5 Click OK.
The files are now assigned to the staff member you selected.

Reassigning and Renaming Files

You can reassign an EEG file to a different staff member for reviewing. Also,
if you accidentally record an EEG file under the wrong patient name, you can
reassign the EEG file to the correct patient.
After you have reassigned the file to the correct patient, you can rename the
file, if necessary.

To reassign a file 1 Click Files to Assign or User File View 2 on the File View toolbar.
to another staff OR
member from a Choose Show > Files to Assign.
File view 2 You can use the Assigned To filter to find the staff member that was
assigned the file.
3 Select the file to be reassigned.
4 Click Assign.
The Assign Files dialog box displays.

5 Select a new staff member from the Assign the files to list.
6 To keep this staff member as the default when assigning files, select the Set
as default check box.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-7

Chapter 9: File Management

7 Click OK.

To reassign a file 1 Select the file to be reassigned.

to another staff 2 Right-click and choose Properties from the menu that appears.
member from the The File Properties dialog box displays.
File Properties
dialog box

3 Click Re-Assign.
The Selected Staff dialog box displays.

4 Select a name from the Select a member of the staff from the list drop-
down list.
5 Click OK.

9-8 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Assigning and Reviewing Files

To reassign a file 1 Show the Files to Assign view, or the Patient view in Files/Reports
to another patient format.
2 Select the file to be reassigned.
3 Right-click and choose Properties from the menu that appears.
OR
Choose Edit > Properties.
The File Properties dialog box displays.

4 Click Change.
The warning, “Any reports that pertain to this file and were created before
the file was assigned to another patient may still refer to the original
patient. Such reports must be edited manually, since this function does not
update them automatically.” displays.
5 Click OK.
The Change File Ownership dialog box displays.

6 Enter the correct Patient ID1, then click OK.

At the File Properties dialog box, the Owner box now displays the new
patient name.
7 Click OK.

To rename a file 1 Show the Files to Assign view, or the Patient view in the Files/Reports
format.
2 Select a file from the list.
3 Right-click and choose Properties from the menu that appears.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-9

Chapter 9: File Management

OR
Choose Edit > Properties.
The File Properties dialog box displays.

4 In the Identification box, enter the new file name.

5 Click OK.

Archiving Files
In HARMONIE’s Files to Archive view, you can list all files to be archived,
and perform the archiving operation.
After an EEG file is reviewed, and the read status is changed to “Read”, it can
be archived. For more information, see “Changing the Read Status of Files”
on page 8-11.
In order to archive an EEG file, the storage status must be “Master File”, and the
Read Status must be “Read”.
When EEG files are archived, the original files are copied to the storage
volume. The archived copies have the storage status “Archive”. The storage
status of the original EEG files changes from “Master File” to “Backup of
Archive”.
When DirectCD and Easy CD Creator are used for archiving, the default
settings will result in a closed session disc that can be read on another
computer that has a standard CD-ROM drive.
You should always use the default settings, which result in a closed session
disc. If you change the options in order to perform a multi-session CD-R, the
UDF Reader is required to read the UDF formatted disc on Windows 2000
systems that do not have Easy CD Creator installed.
The UDF Reader has been installed on all Stellate systems that do not have
Roxio Easy CD Creator version 5. It is available at http://www.roxio.com/en/
support/udfwin/index.html.

9-10 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Archiving Files

Archiving to CD-ROM Using DirectCD

If you have DirectCD, you can archive files directly to a CD-ROM on your
CD-ROM drive.

Archiving to CD-ROM Without DirectCD

If you do not have DirectCD, before you can burn a CD-ROM, the files that
you want to copy to the CD-ROM must all be stored on the same hard disk
drive. This drive is called the virtual CD-ROM, because the volume on it will
be transferred to a real CD-ROM. Initially, this hard disk drive is used for
temporary storage.
The EEG files that are stored on different volumes (drives) are archived to the
virtual CD-ROM. When the virtual CD-ROM is full, you can burn a CD-ROM.
The virtual CD-ROM has a volume in the database just like other hard disk drives
where EEG files are stored.
The Verify Files function will not work on the virtual CD-ROM unless you create a
storage device for it.

Using DirectCD to Archive Files to CD-ROM

Roxio's DirectCD software is Compact Disk-Recording (CD-R) software for
Windows that makes it much easier to record data to CD-ROM than in the
past. DirectCD allows your CD-ROM drive to appear just like any other drive
volume. In other words, your CD-ROM drive handles files like a hard disk
drive does. DirectCD is available bundled with compatible CD-ROM
recorders.
If you have DirectCD, you can copy one or more EEG files to a CD-ROM
using HARMONIE’s Archive Files function.
EEG files that are stored on one volume (e.g. hard disk drive) can be copied to
another volume (e.g. CD-ROM).
There are several ways to check whether the active CD-ROM is full:
• In HARMONIE, show the Volumes view in List format. Double-click the
CD-ROM volume, then look at the Free Space box.
• Select the CD-ROM drive in Windows Explorer, and look at the status bar.
• Display the Properties dialog box for the CD-ROM drive, then select the
General tab and look at the Free Space box.
You should not record an EEG file directly to CD-ROM. CD-ROM drives are too
slow to write EEG data as it is recorded. Instead, record to a hard disk drive and
then copy the EEG file to the CD-ROM using HARMONIE.
You must copy files to the CD-ROM drive that is connected to the computer. (You
cannot copy EEG files over the network). For example, if the CD-ROM drive is at
the Reviewing workstation, you cannot copy a file from a volume on the
Recording workstation to the CD-ROM. Instead, copy the file to a volume on the
Reviewing workstation, and then copy the file from the Reviewing workstation to
the CD-ROM.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-11

Chapter 9: File Management

DirectCD does not work with all CD-ROM recorders. The Roxio website
(www.roxio.com) provides a list of compatible drives. If you own a compatible
CD-ROM recorder and do not have DirectCD, you should purchase the software.
Contact Roxio Inc. or Stellate Systems for more information.
When archiving to CD-ROM using DirectCD, you must perform the
following steps:
1 Create a storage device for the CD-ROM drive.
2 Use the DirectCD Wizard to prepare a blank CD-ROM.
3 Use HARMONIE to create a volume on the CD-ROM.
4 In HARMONIE, archive EEG files from a hard disk drive volume to the
CD-ROM volume.

1 Creating the Storage Device for the CD-ROM Drive

Storage devices can either be local, or on the network. Two examples of
storage devices are your local hard disk drive D: and a CD-ROM drive
connected to a network computer (e.g. \\Recording\CD).
The network drive share name must be defined before it can be added to the
Storage Device list.
You should not change the network drive share name. If you do, the Storage
Device List on other computers will not be updated, and HARMONIE will not be
able to find the drive.
HARMONIE can access storage devices that are included in the Storage Device
List.

To create a 1 Choose Options > Storage Devices.

storage device for The Storage Device List dialog box displays.
the CD-ROM drive

2 Click Add.

9-12 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Archiving Files

The Edit Storage Device dialog box displays.

3 Enter the path of the CD-ROM drive.

OR
Click Browse to search for the path.
4 Click OK.

2 Preparing the Blank CD-ROM

You must prepare the CD-ROM before you can write data to it.
Turn on the CD-ROM drive before starting the computer. If the drive and the
computer are already on, check that the CD-ROM icon on the taskbar does not
have a red cross through it.

To prepare a 1 Insert a blank CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

blank CD-ROM 2 To start DirectCD, you have the following options:
using DirectCD Double-click the DirectCD icon on the taskbar.

OR
On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Programs > Roxio Easy CD
Creator 5 > Applications > DirectCD Format Utility.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-13

Chapter 9: File Management

The DirectCD format utility window displays.

3 You can select a CD-ROM drive from the select CD list. Then click format
CD.
4 At the following dialog box, enter a name for your CD-ROM (i.e. volume
name).

It is recommended that you use the same volume name at this screen and at
the HARMONIE New Volume Identification dialog box.
Note that this does not create a volume on the CD-ROM (see “Step 3:
Creating the CD-ROM Volume” below). This is the name of the CD-ROM
that will appear in Windows Explorer.
Volume names are limited to 11 characters (e.g. VOL2000-001).

9-14 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Archiving Files

5 Click Start Format.

When the formatting is completed, the CD Ready dialog box displays.

You are about to archive files to the CD-ROM.

6 Click OK.

3 Creating the CD-ROM Volume

There must be one volume on each drive where EEG files are stored. Since
CD-ROMs are removable storage media, there must be a different volume on
each disc where the files are stored.
You should follow a volume naming convention for the CD-ROMs to make it
easier to keep track of multiple CD-ROMs. For example, you can include the
calendar year and the disk number in that year. (e.g. VOL2001-001, VOL2000-
002 … VOL2002-001, VOL2002-002, etc.).
You must create a volume on a drive before you can record to it.
Before you can copy EEG files to a CD-ROM, you must use HARMONIE to
create a volume on the disc.

To create a new 1 Show the Volumes view in List format.

volume on the 2 Click Create on the Volume toolbar.
CD-ROM OR
Choose Edit > Create.
OR
Double-click the gray bar at the bottom of the list of volumes.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-15

Chapter 9: File Management

The New Volume Identification dialog box displays.

3 Enter a unique name in the Volume Name box, with up to 16 characters

(e.g. VOL2000-003).
It is recommended that you paste (CTRL+V) the volume name you copied
from the DirectCD Name Your Disk screen. This ensures that the volume
name is identical in both places.
Although HARMONIE allows you to enter a 16 character name (e.g. VOL2000-
001), you should limit the name to 11 characters, since this is the maximum
length allowed by the DirectCD program.
4 In the Description box, enter “Active CD” to indicate that the CD-ROM is
formatted and in the CD-ROM drive.
5 From the Disk Drive list, select the CD-ROM drive that contains the blank
CD-ROM.
(If the CD-ROM drive is not in the list, the blank CD-ROM is not in the
drive, or the CD-ROM in the drive already has a HARMONIE volume on
it).
6 Click OK.

4 Archiving Files to the CD-ROM

In HARMONIE’s Archive Files View, you can list all files to be archived, and
perform the archiving operation.
After an EEG file is reviewed, and the read status is changed to “Read”, it can
be archived.
In order to archive an EEG file, the storage status must be “Master File”, and the
Read Status must be “Read”.
When EEG files are archived, the original files are copied to the storage
volume. The archived copies have the storage status “Archive”. The storage
status of the original EEG files changes from “Master File” to “Backup of
Archive”.
You should verify that the archived files are stored properly, using the Verify
Files function. If the files are readable, delete the original “Backup of Archive”
and “Backup of Master” files. If the files are unreadable, use the Undo
Archive function to rename the “Backup of Archive” files back to “Master
File”, and then repeat the Archive function, using a new CD-ROM.

9-16 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Archiving Files

If you have DirectCD, you can archive files directly to a CD-ROM on your
CD-ROM drive.

To archive a file 1 Click Files to Archive on the File View toolbar.

Master files with Read Status set to “Read” are listed in the Files to
Archive view.
2 You can filter the files by volume and date.
• To filter the files by volume, select <Any>, or an existing volume from
the Volume list.
• To filter the files by date, select <Any>, Before, At, After, or Today from
the Date list.
Click Apply.
3 Select one or more files and click Archive.
The Archive Files dialog box displays.

4 Select a volume from the Archive the files to list. (The file will be archived
here).
The free space on the volume and total required space are shown.
5 To archive digital video files, select the Archive digital video files if
applicable check box.
6 To set the selected volume as the default volume for archiving files, select
the Set as default check box.
7 Click OK.
The file is copied to the target volume with an “Archive” status. The status
of the original “Master File” is changed to “Backup of Archive”.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-17

Chapter 9: File Management

To eject the 1 Double-click the DirectCD icon on the taskbar.

CD-ROM The DirectCD format utility window displays.

2 Click eject.

Verifying the CD-ROM Files

In HARMONIE’s Verify Files View, you can list all archived files and perform
the verification, unarchive files, and delete files that have been backed up.
You should verify that the archived files are stored properly. The Verify
function is used to verify that a file is readable. After archiving a file to CD-
ROM or another computer volume, you should verify that the file is stored
properly before deleting the backup file.
To ensure that files on a CD-ROM are readable, we recommend that you place
the CD-ROM you want to verify in a CD-ROM Reader (NOT in the CD-ROM Writer
where the CD-ROM was created).
If the files are readable, delete the original “Backup of Archive” and “Backup
of Master” files. If the files are unreadable, you should undo the archive and
delete the volume. Use the Undo Archive function to rename the “Backup of
Archive” files back to “Master File”, and then repeat the Archive function,
using a new CD-ROM. See “Undo Archive Feature” on page 9-34.
There are two methods for verifying EEG files. Full verification tests each file
by reading each byte, while Quick verification reads random bytes.

9-18 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Deleting the Original Files

To verify files 1 Click Files to Verify on the File View toolbar.

2 You can filter the files by volume and date.
• To filter the files by volume, select a volume from the Volume list.
• To filter the files by date, select a date from the Date list.
Click Apply.
3 Select the appropriate file(s) and click Verify.
The Verify Files dialog box displays.

4 To perform the minimum test, select Quick Verify.

OR
To perform full verification of the file(s), select Full Verify.
5 Click OK.
After the verification is complete, a message will show the verification
result.
• If the verification was successful, you can delete the backup files.
• If archived files were unsuccessfully stored on the target volume, you
can use the Undo Archive feature.

Deleting the Original Files

When EEG files are archived, the original files are copied to the storage
volume. The archived copies have the storage status “Archive”. The storage
status of the original EEG files changes from “Master File” to “Backup of
Archive”.
After verifying the archived files, you can delete the associated backup files.
Before you delete any backup files, you must verify that the files were
successfully copied to the CD-ROM.

To print a list of 1 Show the Verify Files view.

archived files 2 To print the list of files on the CD-ROM, select the Archive CD volume
from the Volume filter list and then click Apply.
3 Choose File > Print.
(This list verifies that the files have been copied to the CD-ROM).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-19

Chapter 9: File Management

To delete the 1 Show the Verify Files view.

“Backup of 2 Insert the CD-ROM volume where the original files are stored into the
Archive” files CD-ROM drive.
3 Select the volume (e.g. VOL2002-001) from the Volume filter list, then click
Apply.
4 Select all of the original files. (These files now have the storage status
“Backup of Archive” and “Backup of Master”).
5 Click Delete Backup.
The Delete Backup Files dialog box displays.

All of the backup files for the selected archived files are listed.
6 Click OK to delete the file(s).

Modifying the CD-ROM Volume Description

When you created the volume, “Active CD” was entered in the Description
field to indicate that the CD-ROM was ready. The disc was formatted and
files could be copied to it because it was in the CD-ROM drive.
After the active CD-ROM was closed, the full disc was ejected. You should
now modify the volume description to indicate that the CD-ROM is no longer
active.

To modify the 1 Show the Volumes view in List format.

CD-ROM volume 2 Select the CD-ROM volume (e.g. VOL2000-001).
description 3 Click Modify on the Volume toolbar.
OR
Choose Edit > Modify.

9-20 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Archiving to CD-ROM Without DirectCD

The Volume Definition dialog box displays.

4 Enter “CD” in the Description box.

5 Click OK.

Archiving to CD-ROM Without DirectCD

If you do not have Roxio's DirectCD software, you cannot copy EEG files
directly to CD-ROM using HARMONIE. Instead, you store the EEG files in a
hard disk drive volume until you have around 600 MB of data. (This drive is
called the virtual CD-ROM because you use HARMONIE to store files to it as
if it is a CD-ROM). Then, you use CD-ROM mastering software to copy the
entire volume from the hard disk drive to a CD-ROM. Finally, you delete the
virtual CD-ROM off the drive, using Windows Explorer.
CD-ROM mastering software is also known as “CD-ROM Burner” software
because it is used to burn up to 650 Mb of data onto a CD-ROM. The ‘CD-ROM
Burner” software is used to copy the entire volume on the virtual CD-ROM in one
session.

You cannot copy EEG files directly to CD-ROM. You must copy the files to a hard
disk drive, known as the virtual CD-ROM, and then use mastering software to
burn the CD-ROM.
When archiving to CD-ROM without using DirectCD, you must perform the
following steps:
1 Prepare a virtual CD-ROM.
2 Create a storage device for the virtual CD-ROM drive.
3 Create a volume for the CD-ROM.
4 Archive files to the virtual CD-ROM.
5 Use “CD-ROM Burner” software to copy files to the CD-ROM.
6 Verify the files on the CD-ROM.
7 Delete the original files.
8 Create a new volume for the virtual CD-ROM.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-21

Chapter 9: File Management

1 Preparing the Virtual CD-ROM

If you plan to archive HARMONIE files to CD-ROM, you need a hard disk
drive for temporary storage of the files. There are two ways to do this:
• Install a hard disk drive that is exclusively used for the temporary files.
The drive capacity must be around 600 MB.
• Make a 600 MB partition on a hard disk drive.
The storage capacity of a CD-ROM is 650 MB, however you do not want to
use up all of the available space.
Partitions are usually made by formatting the hard disk drive before
storing anything on it. If you want to partition it afterwards, you can use
the software program, PartitionMagicTM (by PowerQuest Corporation
1-800-379-2566).
In HARMONIE, the partition (or exclusive hard disk drive) is called a virtual
CD-ROM. It is used to store EEG files until you can archive them.
Archiving to CD-ROM becomes easier if you have two virtual CD-ROM
drives. For example, a recording workstation may have a drive with two 600
MB partitions. Record EEG files to the first partition until it is full. Then, you
can continue recording on the second partition until you have time to archive
the files on the first partition.
If you want to archive EEG files to CD-ROM, you must have at least one virtual
CD-ROM drive.

2 Creating the Storage Device for the Virtual CD-ROM

Storage devices can either be local, or on the network. Two examples of
storage devices are your local hard disk drive D: and a CD-ROM drive
connected to a network computer (e.g. \\Recording\CD).
The network drive share name must be defined before it can be added to the
Storage Device list.
You should not change the network drive share name. If you do, the Storage
Device List on other computers will not be updated, and HARMONIE will not be
able to find the drive.
HARMONIE can access storage devices that are included in the Storage Device
List.

To add a storage 1 To add a new storage device, enter the path of the virtual CD-ROM.
device You can click Browse to search for the path.
2 Click OK when you have finished.

9-22 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Archiving to CD-ROM Without DirectCD

3 Step 3: Creating the CD-ROM Volume

There must be one volume on each drive where EEG files are stored. Since
CD-ROMs are removable storage media, there must be a different volume on
each disc where the files are stored.
When you create a volume, you should enter a name that indicates where the
volume can be found. For example, you can enter “Review-E” to indicate
Drive E on the Reviewing workstation. (For remote drives, avoid including
the network mapping drive letter because it can change later).
You should follow a volume naming convention for the CD-ROMs to make it
easier to keep track of multiple CD-ROMs. For example, you can include the
calendar year and the disk number in that year. (e.g. VOL2001-001, VOL2001-
002 … VOL2002-001, VOL2002-002, etc.).
You must create a volume on a drive before you can record to it.

To create a 1 Show the Volumes view in List format.

volume for the 2 Click Create on the Volume toolbar.
virtual CD-ROM OR
Choose Edit > Create.
OR
Double-click the gray bar at the bottom of the list of database volumes.
The New Volume Identification dialog box displays.

In the Volume Name box, enter a unique name for the volume.
Although HARMONIE allows you to enter a 16 character name (e.g. VOL2002-
001), you should limit the name to 11 characters, since this is the maximum
length allowed by the DirectCD program.
It is recommended that at DirectCD Name Your Disk screen, you copy
(CTRL+C) the volume name and then, at the HARMONIE New Volume
Identification dialog box, you paste (CTRL+V) the name. This ensures that the
volume name is identical in both places.
3 Enter an optional volume description (e.g. “Active CD”), in the
Description box.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-23

Chapter 9: File Management

4 Select an available drive from the Disk Drive list.

The list shows locally available drives. (It also shows drives that contain a
volume for another HARMONIE database. If you select one of these
drives, the volume information file for the other database will be deleted).
You can click Scan to check if any drives have recently become available.
5 Click OK.

4 Archiving Files to the Virtual CD-ROM

In HARMONIE’s Archive Files View, you can list all files to be archived, and
perform the archiving operation.
After an EEG file is reviewed, and the read status is changed to “Read”, it can
be archived.
In order to archive an EEG file, the storage status must be “Master File”, and the
Read Status must be “Read”.
If you do not have DirectCD, before you can burn a CD-ROM, the files that
you want to copy to the CD-ROM must all be stored on the same hard disk
drive. This drive is called the virtual CD-ROM, because the volume on it will
be transferred to a real CD-ROM. Initially, this hard disk drive is used for
temporary storage.
The EEG files that are stored on different volumes (drives) are archived to the
virtual CD-ROM. When the virtual CD-ROM is full, you can burn a CD-ROM.
Figure 9.1 Archiving the files to the virtual CD-ROM

Reviewing Workstation Recording Workstation

Volume on Drive D: Volume on Drive D:

Review-D Record-D

Virtual CD-ROM
Volume on Drive E:

VOL2002-002

Blank Compact Disk

The virtual CD-ROM has a volume in the database just like other hard disk drives
where EEG files are stored.
The Verify Files function will not work on the virtual CD-ROM unless you create a
storage device for it.

9-24 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Archiving to CD-ROM Without DirectCD

When EEG files are archived, the original files are copied to the storage
volume. The archived copies have the storage status “Archive”. The storage
status of the original EEG files changes from “Master File” to “Backup of
Archive”.
After the CD-ROM is created, you should use the Verify Files function to
verify that the archived files on the CD-ROM are stored properly. If the files
are readable, delete the original “Backup of Archive” files. If the files are
unreadable, use the Undo Archive function to rename the “Backup of
Archive” files back to “Master File”, and then repeat the Archive function,
using a new CD-ROM.

To archive a file 1 Click Files to Archive on the File View toolbar.

Master files with Read Status set to “Read” are listed in the Files to Archive
view.
2 You can filter the files by volume and date.
• To filter the files by volume, select <Any>, or an existing volume from
the Volume list.
• To filter the files by date, select <Any>, Before, At, After, or Today from
the Date list.
Click Apply.
3 Select one or more files and click Archive.
The Archive Files dialog box displays.

4 Select a volume from the Archive the files to list. (The file will be archived
here).
The free space on the volume and total required space are shown.
5 To archive digital video files, select the Archive digital video files if
applicable check box.
6 To set the selected volume as the default volume for archiving files, select
the Set as default check box.
7 Click OK.
The file is copied to the target volume with an “Archive” status. The status
of the original “Master File” is changed to “Backup of Archive”.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-25

Chapter 9: File Management

5 Burning the CD-ROM

Usually, one of the HARMONIE workstations in a network (e.g. a Reviewing
workstation) has a CD-ROM recorder. This peripheral device copies (burns)
files from a local hard disk drive to a blank compact disk. A new CD-ROM is
usually burned when 600 MB of data accumulates on the hard disk drive.
The “CD-ROM Burner” software guides you through selecting the files to
copy to the CD-ROM. It calculates the space requirements of the selected files,
arranges them into an efficient sequence, and sends the data to the CD-ROM
recorder.
The name of the “CD-ROM Burner” software varies for different CD-ROM
recorders.
Burning a CD-ROM is a resource-intensive procedure. It is very important
that the computer feeds a fast, smooth flow of data to the CD-ROM recorder.
One interruption in the data stream can cause errors on the CD-ROM. Since a
single mistake can ruin the entire disk, you will have to start again with
another blank compact disk.
To avoid this potential problem, do not run any other programs on the
workstation while you run the “CD-ROM Burner” software.
Avoid using programs that may temporarily interrupt the transfer of data to
the CD-ROM recorder. For example, you should disable screen savers, E-mail
programs and alarm programs.
The workstation with the CD-ROM recorder often has the HARMONIE
database on the hard disk drive. When another HARMONIE workstation on
the network uses the database, this hard disk drive is accessed. If the files for
the CD-ROM are stored on the same hard disk drive, the data stream to the
CD-ROM recorder may be interrupted.
To avoid this potential problem, you should disconnect your workstation from
the network before you run the “CD-ROM Burner” software.
On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Shut Down. At the Shut Down
Windows window, select Close all programs and log on as a different user
and then click Yes. This option closes all your programs and disconnects your
computer from the network. Do not enter a password at the Enter Network
Password dialog box and then click Cancel. (After the new CD-ROM is
finished, you can connect to the network again).
The volume information file is always stored in the HarmEEG folder.
Usually, this folder also contains the EEG files. When the “CD-ROM Burner”
software is run in this example, the D:\HarmEEG folder (on the Reviewing
workstation) is selected.
By copying the entire HarmEEG folder to the CD-ROM, the EEG files and the
Volume.inf file are copied. This diagram shows the contents of the drives
instead of the HARMONIE volumes. The CD-ROM now has a copy of the
files for volume VOL2000-001. The original files are still on the virtual
CD-ROM.

9-26 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Archiving to CD-ROM Without DirectCD

Figure 9.2 Using “CD-ROM Burner” software to burn a CD-ROM

Reviewing Workstation Recording Workstation

Files on Drive D: Files on Drive D:

HarmEEG Folder HarmEEG Folder

Files on Drive E:

HarmEEG Folder

Files on CD-ROM:
HarmEEG Folder

To burn a After the files have been archived to the virtual CD-ROM, start the CD-ROM
CD-ROM using Burner software.
Roxio Easy CD It is recommended that this program is used for for one-time-only archiving.
Creator 1 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Programs > Roxio Easy CD
Creator 5 > Project Selector.
OR
Double-click the Easy CD Creator shortcut on your desktop.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-27

Chapter 9: File Management

The Select a Project window displays.

2 Select make a data CD > dataCD project.

9-28 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Archiving to CD-ROM Without DirectCD

The Easy CD Creator window displays.

3 Go to the Explorer box (upper left) and expand the virtual CD-ROM
directory.
4 Select the HarmEeg folder and move it to the dataCD project box, under
the CD-ROM volume name.
5 You can change the CD-ROM volume name, if necessary.
6 Click record on the toolbar.
The Record CD Setup dialog box displays.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-29

Chapter 9: File Management

Click Options to set up the closing session.

The default options should be:

• Record CD
• Disc-At-Once
7 Click Start Recording.
The Record CD Progress window displays while the CD is formatted and
the files are copied.

8 After the processing is completed, click OK.

9-30 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Archiving to CD-ROM Without DirectCD

9 At the Easy CD Creator screen, click Yes.

The Launch CD Label Creator dialog box displays.

10 Click Close.

6 Verifying the Files on the CD-ROM

After burning files to CD-ROM using CD-ROM Burner software, the files
must be verified to determine that they can be opened and read.
If the archived files cannot be opened and read, undo the archive. See “Undo
Archive Feature” on page 9-34.

To verify a 1 Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM Burner.

CD-ROM file 2 Insert the CD-ROM into a CD-ROM Reader.
3 Start HARMONIE, and show any file view.
4 Open the files to verify that they were properly written to the CD-ROM.
5 After the files are verified, remove the CD-ROM.

7 Deleting the Original Files

Windows Explorer is used in this part of the archiving procedure because
only the original files are deleted, not their database entries.
Before you delete any files, you must verify that the files were successfully
copied to the CD-ROM.
It is important to delete all of the original files, as well as the Volume.inf file.
The volume information file is always stored in the HarmEEG folder. Usually,
this folder also contains the EEG files. By deleting the entire HarmEEG folder,
the EEG files and the Volume.inf file are deleted.
When you delete files, they are not immediately removed from the hard disk
drive. Instead, the files are moved to the Recycle Bin, where they continue to
consume a large amount of valuable disk space. Therefore, you should empty
the Recycle Bin after the archiving procedure.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-31

Chapter 9: File Management

You should not set the Recycle Bin to “Remove files immediately on delete”
because you may make a mistake selecting the files. Instead, you can set the
size of the Recycle Bin by right-clicking it. Choose Properties and then click
the Global tab. Adjust the maximum bin size as a percentage of each drive’s
size.
This is the only time you should use the Windows Explorer to delete EEG files.
For more information on deleting EEG files in HARMONIE, see “Understanding
the Database and Files” on page 9-2.
Figure 9.3 Using Windows Explorer to delete the original files

Reviewing Workstation Recording Workstation

Files on Drive D: Files on Drive D:

HarmEEG Folder HarmEEG Folder

Files on Drive E:

HarmEEG Folder

Recycle Files on CD-ROM:

Bin HarmEEG Folder

In this example, the original files are the EEG files and the Volume.inf file in
the D:\HarmEEG folder (on the Reviewing workstation). After you delete
this folder, there is no volume on the virtual CD-ROM drive.
This diagram shows the contents of the drives instead of the HARMONIE
volumes. The CD-ROM is now volume VOL2002-002 and it includes all of its
files.

To delete the 1 Start Windows Explorer.

original files 2 Expand the virtual CD-ROM drive.
using Windows 3 Select the HarmEeg folder and delete it.
Explorer

8 Creating a New Volume for the Virtual CD-ROM

The volume that used to be on the virtual CD-ROM is now on the real CD-
ROM. Therefore, you need to create a new volume for the virtual CD-ROM.
If you are using a sequential volume naming convention, use the next name in
the order (e.g. VOL2002-003).

9-32 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Archiving to CD-ROM Without DirectCD

You can edit the Description field of the previous virtual CD-ROM volume to
reflect that it has been moved to a real compact disk. To avoid confusion, you
should write the volume name on the compact disk.
Figure 9.4 Use HARMONIE to create a new volume

Reviewing Workstation Recording Workstation

Volume on Drive D: Volume on Drive D:

Review-D Record-D

Volume on Drive E:

VOL2002-003

Volume on CD-ROM:
VOL2002-002

In this example, the name of the new volume is VOL2002-003. This virtual
CD-ROM drive volume will be used the next time you archive to CD-ROM.
When you want to access the EEG files for VOL2002-002, the CD-ROM must
be inserted.

To create a new 1 Show the Volumes view in List format.

volume for the 2 Click Create on the Volume toolbar.
virtual CD-ROM OR
Choose Edit > Create.
OR
Double-click the gray bar at the bottom of the list of volumes.
The New Volume Identification dialog box displays.

3 Enter a unique name in the Volume Name box, with up to 16 characters

(e.g. VOL2002-003).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-33

Chapter 9: File Management

4 In the Description box, enter “Active CD” to indicate that the CD-ROM is
formatted as a DirectCD disc, and is in the CD-ROM drive.
5 From the Disk Drive list, select the CD-ROM drive that contains the blank
CD-ROM.
(If the CD-ROM drive is not in the list, the blank CD-ROM is not in the
drive, or the CD-ROM in the drive already has a HARMONIE volume on
it).
6 Click OK.

Undo Archive Feature

The Undo Archive feature is used for changing archived files back to master
files when the archived files are unreadable.
The “Backup of Archive” files are changed back to “Master File” files through
this function.
The status of the selected files will change from “Backup of Archive” to “Master
File”, and the “Archive” files are deleted from the database list.

To undo the 1 Click Files to Verify on the File View toolbar.

archive 2 Select “Backup of Archive” type files.
3 Click Undo Archive.
A message informs you whether the undo archive was successful or not.

File Maintenance
Importing Files into the Database
You can import an EEG file that is not registered in the database. There are
two reasons why it may not be registered:
• The file was recorded with Stellate RHYTHM, MONITOR, or ECLIPSE.
In this case, the signal file has the extension EEG and the status file has the
extension STA.
• The file was recorded with HARMONIE on a remote computer that did
not have access to the central database and did not use a mobile database.
In this case, the signal file has the extension SIG and the status file has the
extension STS.
When you import a file, you are simply creating a database entry for the EEG
file. (The file location does not change). Importing links the file to a specific
patient and volume.

9-34 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 File Maintenance

To import a file 1 The EEG file must be stored on a drive that has a corresponding volume in
into the database the database. If the file is stored elsewhere, do one of the following:
• Since this EEG file is not registered in the database yet, you can use
Windows Explorer to move the EEG and STA (or SIG and STS) files to
an appropriate drive and HarmEEG folder.
• In HARMONIE, create a new volume for the drive where the file is
stored.
2 Show the Patients view in List format.
3 Select the patient associated with the file.
If there is no entry for the patient, create a new one.
4 Choose File > Import File.
The Open dialog box displays.
5 Locate and select the unregistered EEG or SIG file.
6 Click Open.
After the file is imported, a window displays.
7 Click OK.

Deleting Files
EEG files can be deleted using any of the HARMONIE views that show a list
of EEG files. These are the Patients view (in Files/Reports format), the
Volumes view (in Files/Reports format) and the File views.
Files of “REC” Type cannot be deleted if they were recorded less than 24
hours ago. (These files are considered to be in the recording state).
When you use HARMONIE to delete an EEG file, the file entry in the
database and the actual EEG file on the hard disk drive are deleted.
Remember that each EEG file entry in the database consists of two separate
files in the HarmEEG folder (i.e. the SIG and STS files). Both of these files are
deleted when you delete an EEG file using HARMONIE.
Do not use Windows Explorer to delete EEG files. When you delete a file in the
Windows Explorer, the corresponding database entry is not deleted.

To delete a file 1 From the Patient view in Files/Reports format, select one or more files,
then click Delete on the Patient toolbar.
OR
Show a List view and then select one or more files. Right-click and choose
Delete from the menu that appears.
OR
Show a List view and then select one or more files. Choose Edit > Delete.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 9-35

Chapter 9: File Management

The Delete files dialog box displays.

2 Select one of the following options:

• Delete all files, including the database entries
The SIG and DV files, SPC file, or SXT file will be deleted from the
volume. In addition, the associated reports and statistics will be deleted
from the database.
• Delete all files from their physical volumes only
The SIG and DV files, SPC file, or SXT file will be deleted from the
volume. The file entries will remain in the database with Size, DV Size,
and Volume fields empty. The reports will remain.
• Delete Digital Video files from their physical volumes only
Only the DV files will be deleted from the volume. The file entries will
remain in the database with DV Size fields empty.
• Delete Reports and Statistics only
Only the associated reports and statistics will be deleted.
3 Click OK.
Only “REC” type files that are older than 24 hours are deleted.

9-36 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

CHAPTER 10: Processors

This chapter explains how to use processors online and offline. If your
software license only includes HARMONIE, two processors are available: the
Scheduled Section Processor and the Signal Averaging Processor. Other
processors are included if you have the SENSA or LUNA add-on modules.
This chapter covers:
• Introduction to Processors
• Using Processors Online and Offline
• Scheduled Section Processor
• Digital or Analog Trigger Detector
• Signal Averaging Processor

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 10-1

Chapter 10: Processors

Introduction to Processors
In HARMONIE, a processor is a program that examines signals and marks
events in an EEG file. Most processors are used for detecting a specific type of
event.
The output of a processor includes:
• One or more event groups
• Events (if any are detected or marked)
Most processors can either be used online (while recording the file) or offline
(from the Reviewer).
HARMONIE includes:
• Scheduled Sections Processor
• Digital and Analog Trigger Processor
• Signal Averaging Processor
Before a processor can mark events in an EEG file, it creates a corresponding
event group. An event group contains the properties, and defines the extent,
color, montages, and channels for the events in that group.
Some processors create more than one event group. For example, the Spike
Pattern Detector (SENSA) creates the “Spike Detection” and “Spike Section”
event groups. The “Spike Section” event group is used to mark recorded
sections.

EXAMPLE 1
When you configure the Spike Pattern Detector (SENSA), you select the
montage that includes spike detection channels. Spike events are only marked
on the detection channels in that one montage. The extent of a spike event is
automatically set to “Instantaneous”, but you can change the name of the
event group and the color of the spike event lines.

EXAMPLE 2
When you configure the Respiratory Event Detector (LUNA), you select a
montage with an airflow channel (and choose the channel). Therefore, the
apnea and hypopnea events are only marked on that one channel and
montage. The extent of a respiratory event is automatically set to “With
Duration”, but you can change the name of the event group and the color of
the respiratory event boxes.
To use processors, you must understand events and event groups. See
“Working with Events” on page 8-14.

10-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Using Processors Online and Offline

Using Processors Online and Offline

There are two differences between using processors online and offline:
• How you start them
• How you specify the duration of signals that they will process
To use processors online, you must activate and configure them when you
start the Recorder. The recording template accesses the processors. For most
processors, you can specify start and stop times (i.e. for the processing) in the
settings file. If these times are not specified, the entire recording session is
processed.
For online processing, you can specify the start and stop times for detection.
To use processors offline, you mark sections of an EEG file in the Reviewer
and then choose Analysis > Processors. If you do not mark any sections, a
warning message prompts you to select the entire file. (Click OK to process
the entire file). After you activate and configure one or more processors, the
selected sections are processed.
While processing offline (in Reviewer), you cannot start a processor if the event
group that will be created already exists in the file. (In this case, none of the
active and configured processors are started). You must use a different name for
the event group in the settings file, or you must delete the existing event group
that uses the name.
For example, you want to use the Desaturation Detector with the default name
“Oximetry”. If this group already exists in the file, you can change the name in
the settings file to “Oximetry 2”, or you can delete the existing “Oximetry” event
group.

To use a 1 [Offline] Mark one or more sections of the EEG file.

processor For more information, see “Marking Sections” on page 8-30.
2 Create a settings file for the processor.
For detailed instructions, see “General Settings Files” below.
3 Activate, configure, and start the processor.
The processor may already be active and configured in the recording
template (for online processing) or the Processors window (for offline
processing).

General Settings Files

Each processor has its own type of general settings file. For example, there are
general settings files for the Spike Pattern Detector and general settings files
for the Seizure Pattern Detector.
A general settings file is used when you configure a processor. Usually, you
create a general settings file in HARMONIE before you run the processor.
You can also create it without running the processor. For example, you must
select an airflow or effort channel, and set a few other parameters for the

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 10-3

Chapter 10: Processors

Respiratory Event Detector. After you define the recording montage in the
Global Montages view, you can create a general settings file for the montage.
Later, when you want to detect respiratory events for the montage, you can
simply select its general settings file.
If you want to use a processor online, and you want to set the start and stop
times (i.e. the processor is not “always on”), then you should create the
settings file before you run the processor.
To use a processor, you activate it, configure it (using a general settings file),
and then start it. You can use more than one processor at the same time.
The general settings file is the same regardless where you create it.
General settings files are not saved in the database; they are saved in
processor-specific folders inside the C:\HARMONIE\Extend\Settings folder.

All of the processors that are available are listed in the recording template or in
Reviewer’s Processors dialog box. If the processor you want to use is not
available, contact Stellate Systems.

To create a 1 In HARMONIE, show the Global Montages view, or the Patients view in
general settings Montages format (for a patient-specific montage).
file without The view includes a list of electrode sets with corresponding lists of
recording and reformatting montages.
running the
For more information about montages and electrode sets, see “Creating
processor Electrode Sets and Montages” on page 4-15.
2 Select a montage from the Recording Montages box, or the Reformatting
Montages box.
3 Choose a processor settings option from the Processors menu.
4 The processor’s settings window displays.
Initially, the window shows the default settings.
5 You can load another settings file by clicking Load, or set the parameters
to the default values by clicking Default.
6 Specify the processor’s settings.
For information about a specific processor, refer to the appropriate manual
(i.e. HARMONIE processors in the Stellate HARMONIE Reference Guide,
LUNA processors in the Stellate LUNA Reference Guide, and SENSA
processors in the Stellate SENSA Reference Guide).
For online processing, you can specify the duration of signals to be
processed. However, when you create a general settings file without starting
the processor, it may be difficult to know the exact times. In this case, you
may want to create (or edit) the settings file as you start the processor. See
“To create a general settings file before running the processor online” on
page 10-6.
7 To save the general settings file, click Save or OK.
(You must save the settings file before you can use it).

10-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Using Processors Online and Offline

The General Settings: save dialog box displays.

8 Accept the proposed file name, or enter another name in the File Name
box.
The proposed file name is ideal because it includes the names of the
processor and montage. This is important for selecting a settings file.
If you want to save more than one settings file for a processor-montage
combination, you should append a few characters to the end of the file
name.
9 Click OK.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 10-5

Chapter 10: Processors

To create a 1 At the Template dialog box, select a processor from the Processors box.
general settings (For more information, see “Creating or Editing Recording Templates” on
file before page 5-5).
running the
processor online

2 Select a montage from the Montage list.

3 Click Setup.
The processor’s settings window displays.
If you click Setup after selecting a general settings file, the settings in that
file are displayed. Otherwise, the dialog box shows the processor’s default
settings.
4 You can load another settings file by clicking Load, or set the parameters
to the default values by clicking Default.
5 Specify the processor’s settings.
For information about a specific processor, refer to the appropriate manual
(i.e. HARMONIE processors in the Stellate HARMONIE Reference Guide,
LUNA processors in the Stellate LUNA Reference Guide, and SENSA
processors in the Stellate SENSA Reference Guide).

10-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Using Processors Online and Offline

For online processing, you can specify the duration of signals to be

processed. However, when you create a settings file before you start the
processor, it may be difficult to know the exact times. In this case, you may
want to create (or edit) the settings file as you start the processor. See “To
create a general settings file before running the processor online” on
page 10-6.
6 To save the general settings file, click Save or OK.
(You must save the settings file before you can use it).
The General Settings: save dialog box displays.

7 Accept the proposed file name, or enter another name in the File Name
box.
The proposed file name is ideal because it includes the names of the
processor and montage. This is important for selecting a settings file.
If you want to save more than one settings file for a processor-montage
combination, you should append a few characters to the end of the file
name.
8 Click OK.

To create/edit a 1 In Reviewer, mark one or more sections of the EEG file.

general settings See “Marking Sections” on page 8-30.
file before 2 Choose Analysis > Processors.
running the The Processors dialog box displays.
processor offline

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 10-7

Chapter 10: Processors

3 Select a processor.
4 Click Setup.
The Session Settings dialog box displays.

5 Select a montage from the Montage list.

To create or edit a settings file, see “Creating or editing a settings file”
below.
6 Select a general settings file from the General Settings File list. If
necessary, select a parameters file from the Parameters File list.
7 Click OK.
Creating or editing a settings file
8 To create a settings file, click Set.
OR
To edit, select a general settings file from the General Settings File list,
then click Set.
9 The processor’s settings window displays.
If you click Setup after selecting a general settings file, the settings in that
file are displayed. Otherwise, the window shows the processor’s default
settings.
10 You can load another settings file by clicking Load, or set the parameters
to the default values by clicking Default.
11 Specify the processor’s settings.
12 To save the general settings file, click Save or OK.
For information about a specific processor, refer to the appropriate manual
(i.e. HARMONIE processors in the Stellate HARMONIE Reference Guide,
LUNA processors in the Stellate LUNA Reference Guide, and SENSA
processors in the Stellate SENSA Reference Guide).
For online processing, you can specify the duration of signals to be
processed. However, when you create a settings file before you start the
processor, it may be difficult to know the exact times. In this case, you may
want to create (or edit) the settings file as you start the processor. See “To
create a general settings file before running the processor online” on
page 10-6.

10-8 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Using Processors Online and Offline

The General Settings: save dialog box displays.

13 Accept the proposed file name, or enter another name in the File Name
box.
The proposed file name is ideal because it includes the names of the
processor and montage. This is important for selecting a settings file.
If you want to save more than one settings file for a processor-montage
combination, you should append a few characters to the end of the file
name.
14 Click OK.

Activating, Configuring and Starting Processors

To use a processor, you activate it, configure it (using a general settings file),
then start it. You can use more than one processor at the same time.

To activate, Activating the processor

configure, and 1 In HARMONIE, display the Template dialog box.
start an online (For more information, see “Creating or Editing Recording Templates” on
processor page 5-5).
2 To activate a processor, under Processors, select the processor’s check box.
OR
To clear the settings for a processor, select the processor. Click Clear, then
click Yes.
If the processor is already activated and configured, proceed to step 7.
Otherwise, follow steps 3 to 6 for each processor that you want to use.
Configuring the session settings
3 To activate digital video, select the DV check box.
4 If necessary, select a montage from the Montage list.
5 Select a general settings file from the General Settings File list.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 10-9

Chapter 10: Processors

6 If necessary, select a file from the Additional Parameters File list.

Starting the processor
7 Click Save and Go.

To activate, 1 In Reviewer, mark one or more sections of the EEG file.

configure, and See “Marking Sections” on page 8-30.
start an offline 2 Choose Analysis > Processors.
processor The Processors dialog box displays.

3 Select a processor’s check box.

OR
To clear the settings for a processor, select the processor. Click Clear, then
click Yes.
If the processor is already activated and configured, proceed to step 9.
Otherwise, follow steps 4 to 8 for each processor that you want to use.
Configuring the session settings
4 If necessary, select a montage from the Montage list.
5 Select a general settings file from the General Settings File list.
6 If necessary, select a file from the Additional Parameters File list.
7 To activate digital video, select the Digital Video check box.
8 Click OK.
Starting the processor
In the Processors dialog box, the settings file name appears next to the
processor name.
9 Click Start PROCE SSING.

10-10 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Scheduled Section Processor

The Processing Status window displays.

For each section and each processor, the “Processing started” and
“Processing stopped” messages are listed in the log. (You can click Stop to
interrupt processing). When the progress bar reaches 100%, the Stop
button becomes the Close button.
10 Click Close.

Scheduled Section Processor

There are two types of automatic recordings. For scheduled start and stop
times, the result is one recorded section. For scheduled automatic sampling,
the result is multiple sections of a set length, separated by a set interval when
signals are not recorded. For more information, see “Automatic Recording”
on page 5-26.
The start and stop times can only be used for online processing.
The Scheduled Section Processor is used to configure automatic sampling.
This processor is always used online because using it offline is not very useful
(the intervals between the scheduled sections are already recorded in the EEG
file).
You do not select a montage in the Scheduled Section Processor settings file
because recorded sections do not depend on specific channels. Therefore, it is
easy to create the settings file as you start the Recorder. (As explained in
“General Settings Files” on page 10-3, the other method is to create the
settings file in the HARMONIE window).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 10-11

Chapter 10: Processors

Scheduled Section Processor Parameters

Processors are explained earlier in this chapter. This section describes the
parameters used to configure the Scheduled Section Processor.

The Settings for Scheduled Section Processor dialog box has the following
settings:
• Scheduled Section Interval
• Section Length
• Section Color
• Start Time and Date
• Stop Time and Date
• Detection Always On

Scheduled Section Interval and Section Length

The Interval Between Sections is the time between the end time of a sample and
the start time of the next sample.
The Section Length is the duration of the sample.
For example, if you want to store ten minutes on the hour every hour, you
should set the Start Time to the beginning of an hour (e.g. 21:00:00), the
Interval Between Sections to 50 minutes (00:50:00) and the Section Length to
ten minutes (00:10:00).
Figure 10.1 Multiple Automatic Sections

Section Length

Interval Between
Sections
Start Time Stop Time

10-12 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Digital or Analog Trigger Detector

Section Color
Sets the color of the section. This color is used for the recorded section bars.

Start Time and Date

The time and date the detector will begin analyzing data. Only used for online
processing.

Stop Time and Date

The time and date the detector will finish analyzing the data. Only used for
online processing.

Detection Always On
Enables the Detection Always On feature. Usually this option is used, so
Detection Start and Stop times do not need to be set.
If the Scheduled Section Processor is already active and configured in the
Template dialog box, you do not need to do this procedure.

Event Marking
The Scheduled Section Processor creates the Scheduled Section event group.
This group is a type of recorded section.
As explained earlier in this manual, there are several types of recorded sections.
Four of them are the Calibration Section, Scheduled Section, Sample Section,
and Push Button Section. For more information, see “Viewing Recorded
Sections” on page 4-3 of the Stellate SENSA Reference Guide.
In the settings file, you can change the color of the Scheduled Section event
group. The default color is yellow. You cannot specify the name of the group;
it is always “Scheduled Section”.
The extent of the recorded section is automatically set to “With Duration”.
The sections are linked to any montage and all channels. You can review the
sections in the Observer (i.e. LookBack window) or the Reviewer. To display
the recorded section bars, choose View > Recorded Section Bars.
For more information about events, see “Working with Events” on page 8-14.

Digital or Analog Trigger Detector

The Digital or Analog Trigger Detector can be used online or offline to detect
different types of analog or digital triggers by performing a threshold analysis
on any input channel. Detected triggers are marked with special annotations
to identify them. This output can subsequently be used by the Signal
Averaging Processor (offline).
The results of computer-assisted detection are marked events. These events
indicate times in an EEG recording when the signals have characteristics of
digital or analog triggers. Only an appropriately trained physician or
electroencephalographer can interpret and classify EEG events.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 10-13

Chapter 10: Processors

Digital or Analog Trigger Detection Methods

Digital and analog triggers are detected using three detection methods:
Detection of Analog Triggers, Detection of Digital Triggers in List, and
Detection of Non-Zero Digital Triggers.

Method 1: Detection of Analog Triggers

The analog signal must move above or below the Minimum or Maximum
Detection Threshold, until it reaches a peak that is within the range of the Min
and Max values of any specified trigger, then it must move back across the
Minimum or Maximum Detection Threshold value. If the peak meets these
requirements, the detector marks the signal at the rising edge of the peak,
where the signal crosses the Detection Threshold.
However, if the peak is outside the trigger range, does not cross the Detection
Threshold, or if it lasts for more than 1 minute, the detection will be
discarded.

EXAMPLE
In Figure 10.2, the Minimum Detection Threshold is -0.1 µV, the Maximum
Detection Threshold is +0.1 µV, the Min value of Trigger A is 1.5 µV, and its
Max value is 2.5 µV.
Figure 10.2 Analog Triggers Example

10-14 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Digital or Analog Trigger Detector

Method 2 - Digital Triggers in List

Any peak that matches the specified digital trigger value is marked with the
trigger name.
Figure 10.3 Digital Triggers in List Example

Method 3 - Non-Zero Digital Triggers

Non-zero digital triggers are not specified before running the detector. After
the Trigger Event Template Name and AD type detection channels are
selected, the detector will find and mark any peak that is a non-zero integer.
The peaks are marked with the template name and a suffix composed of the
integer.
Figure 10.4 Non-Zero Digital Trigger Example

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 10-15

Chapter 10: Processors

Digital or Analog Trigger Detector Parameters

Processors are explained earlier in this chapter. This section describes the
parameters used to configure the Digital or Analog Trigger Detector.

The Settings for Digital and Analog Trigger Detector dialog box has the
following settings:
• Use Analog Triggers in List
• Minimum and Maximum Detection Thresholds
• Use Digital Triggers in List
• Use Non-Zero Digital Triggers
• Trigger Event Template Name
• Trigger List
• Detection Channels
• Detection Start Time and Date
• Detection Stop Time and Date
• Detection Always On
• Event Group Name
• Color

10-16 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Digital or Analog Trigger Detector

Use Analog Triggers in List

Specifies that the listed analog triggers are to be used.

Minimum and Maximum Detection Thresholds

This threshold filters signal noise, and is used to determine the starting point
of the rising edge of the peak that has been detected.
There is no limit for these values.

Use Digital Triggers in List

Specifies that the listed digital triggers are to be used.

Use Non-Zero Digital Triggers

Specifies that non-zero digital triggers are to be detected.

Trigger Event Template Name

Specifies the name that will be used to mark the non-zero digital triggers that
are detected. A maximum of 20 characters can be used.

Trigger List
This box lists the user-defined trigger names, along with their corresponding
Minimum and Maximum Values.

Add: This button is used for adding new triggers.

Delete: This button is used for removing triggers.

Detection Channels
For analog trigger detections, all types of channels can be selected.
For digital trigger detections, only AD type channels can be selected. These
channels must come from a digital input source, not an analog source.

Get Label(s): This button is used for selecting the detection channels.

Delete Label(s): This button is used for removing selected detection channels.

Detection Start Time and Date

The time and date the detector will begin analyzing data. Only used for online
processing.

Detection Stop Time and Date

The time and date the detector will finish analyzing the data. Only used for
online processing.

Detection Always On
Enables the Detection Always On feature. Only used for online processing.
Usually this option is used, so Detection Start and Stop times do not need to
be set.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 10-17

Chapter 10: Processors

The Digital and Analog Trigger Detector should be set to "Detection always
on".

Event Group Name

The detector creates an event group before marking any events. The Event
Group Name is the name used for the event group.

Color
Sets the color that is used for the event group. This color is used for the
recorded section bars, event locators, and event lines (detections).

Analog Trigger Settings

The Analog Trigger Settings dialog box is used for adding an analog trigger.

Trigger Name
The name of the analog trigger. A maximum of 20 characters can be used.

Minimum Value
This value must be less than the Maximum Value.
For an analog trigger to be detected, it must fall within the range of the
Minimum and Maximum Values.

Maximum Value
This value must be greater than the Minimum Value.
For an analog trigger to be detected, it must fall within the range of the
Minimum and Maximum Values.

Digital Trigger Settings

The Digital Trigger Settings dialog box is used for adding a digital trigger.

Trigger Name
The name of the digital trigger. A maximum of 20 characters can be used.

10-18 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Digital or Analog Trigger Detector

Trigger Value
Specifies the value of the trigger.

Configuring the Digital and Analog Trigger Detector

To detect analog 1 Select Use Analog Triggers in List.
triggers 2 Under Detection Thresholds, enter the Minimum and Maximum values.
3 Define the triggers. They are listed in the Trigger List box.
• To add a new trigger, click Add.
The Analog Trigger Settings dialog box displays.
Enter a Trigger Name, Minimum Value, and Maximum Value. Then
click OK.
• To remove a trigger from the list, select a trigger and click Delete.
4 Select the Detection Channels. (All types of channels can be used).
• Click Get Label(s) to select the detection channels.
• Click Delete Label(s) to remove selected detection channels.
5 For online processing, you should use select the Detection Always On
check box.
6 You can change the Event Group Name and Color.
7 Click OK.
Any peak that matches the specified analog trigger value is marked with the
trigger name.

To detect listed 1 Select Use Digital Triggers in List.

digital triggers 2 Under Detection Thresholds, enter the Minimum and Maximum values.
3 Define the triggers. They are listed in the Trigger List box.
• To add a new trigger, click Add.
The Digital Trigger Settings dialog box displays.
Enter a Trigger Name and Trigger Value. Then click OK.
• To remove a trigger from the list, select a trigger and click Delete.
4 Select the Detection Channels. (Only AD type channels can be used).
• Click Get Label(s) to select the detection channels.
• Click Delete Label(s) to remove selected detection channels.
5 For online processing, you should use select the Detection Always On
check box.
6 You can change the Event Group Name and Color.
7 Click OK.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 10-19

Chapter 10: Processors

Any peak that matches the specified digital trigger value is marked with the
trigger name.

To detect 1 Select Use Non-Zero Digital Triggers.

non-zero digital 2 Enter a Trigger Event Template Name.
triggers 3 Select the Detection Channels. (Only AD type channels can be used).
• Click Get Label(s) to select the detection channels.
• Click Delete Label(s) to remove selected detection channels.
4 For online processing, you should use select the Detection Always On
check box.
5 You can change the Event Group Name and Color.
6 Click OK.
The detector will find and mark any peak that is a non-zero integer. The peaks
are marked with the template name and a suffix composed of the integer.

Signal Averaging Processor

After marking an EEG file, you can use the Signal Averaging Processor to
calculate the average of EEG segments around the instantaneous events.
The processor defines averaging intervals around every event on the selected
channels. Then, each channel is averaged using the data contained in the
averaging intervals. The result is saved in a new SIG file.
This processor can only be used offline (in Reviewer).
Events may be ignored if they are too close to a discontinuity (the “closeness” is
defined with the lengths kept before and after the events.

10-20 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Signal Averaging Processor

Signal Averaging Processor Parameters

Processors are explained earlier in this chapter. This section describes the
parameters used to configure the Signal Averaging Processor.

The Addon Parameter Settings dialog box has the following settings:
• Channels to average
• Event Group
• Event Definitions
• Length Kept Before
• Length Kept After
• Closest Peak Search
• File Name

Channels to Average
The channels that will be included in the calculation. You can select one,
several, or all of the channels used in the recording.

Event Group
The event group that will be considered. Only those instantaneous events that
appear in the section(s) of the file being averaged are available from the list.
Events with duration will not be considered.

Event Definitions
The event type that will be considered. Only the events that are contained in
the event group are available.
The Event definitions list always contains the item “<All Events>” that is
selected by default.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 10-21

Chapter 10: Processors

When the event group contains default events, the Event definitions box lists
“<All Events>”, and the instantaneous events that appear in the section(s) of
the file being averaged. When the event group has no event name defined, the
Event definitions box only contains “<All Events>”.
If you forget to select an item from the Event definitions list, the error message,
“You must select at least one event definition” displays.

Length Kept Before Event and Length Kept After Event

The duration (in milliseconds) to be averaged around each event. The total of
these two times represents the length of the averaged SIG file that will be
produced by the Signal Averaging Processor.
For example, if you keep 1000 ms before the event, and 1000 ms after the
event, the averaged SIG file produced by the processors will be 2 seconds
(2000 ms) long.

Closest Peak Search

The Closest Peak Search can locate the positive or negative peak closest to the
events being averaged.
It can also move the events to coincide with the peaks that are found.
Select the Enable Closest Peak Search check box to enable the Signal
Averaging Processor to search for the peak closest to the events being
averaged.
Select Search for Positive Peaks or Search for negative peaks to indicate the
type of peak (positive or negative) to be found.
Select the Move events to match found peaks check box to enable the Signal
Averaging Processor to move the event to coincide with the peaks found. If
the events you are averaging are defined for all of the channels you selected,
this option will be disabled. (The peak search can only take place on a specific
channel).
You can limit the search for peaks by indicating the range of time before or
after the event that the peak must occur within.

File Name
The name for the resulting SIG file. The proposed name is the name of the
original EEG recording, with the suffix _AVG. You can accept the name or
enter another one.
By default, the file is stored with the original EEG file and is registered in the
database for the patient.
The SIG file that is created contains the averaged signal(s) for the duration of
signals kept. An annotation, “Avg_<Event Name>”, appears at the event’s
trigger point. Also, an “Averaged Signal Section” event group is created.

10-22 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

CHAPTER 11: DIVA

This chapter explains how to use DIVA for recording and reviewing digital
video. DIVA is only available if it is included in your license. It can be used in
conjunction with all three of the main modules: HARMONIE, SENSA, and
LUNA.
This chapter covers:
• Introduction to Digital Video
• Digital Video File Size
• Hardware Setup for Digital Video
• Digital Video Recording
• ATI Player
• Viewing Digital Video
• Saving Digital Video

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 11-1

Chapter 11: DIVA

Introduction to Digital Video

HARMONIE’s DIVA module enables you to record digital video files, using
the MPEG-1 format. The digital format offers greater flexibility and
functionality than analog video recording. Digital video can be recorded for
all sections of recorded EEG, or for selected types of EEG events. For example,
you can set digital video to record only those segments where a HARMONIE
or SENSA processor detects an event. Digital audio and video recordings are
stored with EEG files, and can be reviewed synchronously with the EEG file.
Digital video is recorded in a separate file from the EEG data. For example, an
EEG recording labelled 990202.SIG would have a digital video file labelled
990202.MPG. Both of these files are always stored in the same directory.
After digital video is configured through the HARMONIE Hardware Setup,
video recording can be turned on by selecting a check box when you set up
the parameters for a recording session. Video can either be recorded
continuously, or it can be linked to processors, push-buttons, and scheduled
samplings. Then, the recording can easily be reviewed in coordination with
the EEG file, and archived in whole or in part, in the same way as an EEG file.
Although we refer to “digital video” recording, both audio and video signals are
always recorded simultaneously.

Digital Video File Size

It is important to understand the issue of video file size in order to use digital
video efficiently. One hour of digital video recording requires approximately
550 MB of disk space, aside from the space required for the EEG file. Because
of this large utilization of disk space, it is important to verify whether enough
disk space is available before starting a recording. In addition, the computer
operating system imposes limitations on file size. Under Windows 98 the
maximum file size is 4 GB (7 hours of continuous video recording at regular
video capture rate).
The maximum video length on NTFS formatted drives is 24 hours. The maximum
video file size on FAT32 formatted drives is 4 GB (or a length of 7 hours at
regular video capture rate).
When recording longer periods of digital video, there are two options:
1 Replace the continuous video recording with an “event-triggered” video
recording, where the video signal is only recorded when an event takes
place (push-button, seizure-pattern detection, scheduled section). A delay
of several minutes can be placed on the event so the video signal is
recorded before the actual event. “Event-triggered” video recording can be
combined with continuous EEG recording.
2 Use the Automatic Restart function, allowing the recording to stop after a
fixed number of hours (e.g. 6 hours). After the restart interval, the program
will close the EEG and video files, and restart immediately.

11-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Hardware Setup

Hardware Setup
Before you can begin to record digital video, you must select and configure
the video recording device you will use. For details, see Appendix A,
“Hardware Setup”.
To record digital audio you must also configure a microphone. This must be
done directly through the digital video card setup. For more information, see
Appendix J, “Video Boards”.
Stellate Systems configures and tests your hardware devices. Call Stellate for
help and further information about your hardware setup.

Recording Digital Video

You activate digital video recording when you set up the recording
parameters in the template. The recording parameters include annotation
definitions, automatic start and stop, photic stimulation, and other recording
features that can be associated with digital video segments.
The level of video picture quality and storage space requirement can be
selected. For information about specifying the digital video image size and
encoding speed, see Appendix A, “Hardware Setup”.

To record digital 1 At the Template dialog box, the following digital video options are
video available:
• To record a digital video segment with each sample section, under
Manual, select the Digital Video check box.
• To record a digital video segment with each pushbutton sample, under
PushButton, select the Digital Video check box.
• To record digital video during detections, you must select the
processor(s) you want to use.
Select the Digital Video check box to record a digital video segment for
each processor event.

If you are planning a long-term recording, select the Restart New
Recording Session check box to set a restart interval for the recording.
It is important that you click Save and Exit (see below) when you use this
feature. The recording is restarted based on the last saved template, not the
last used template.
2 Select the Use Time Code Generator check box.
3 Click Save and Go.
A list of templates appears in the Choose the template you wish to save
dialog box. The proposed template name is the patient name plus the date.
4 Use the proposed template name or enter a different name. Then click
Save.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 11-3

Chapter 11: DIVA

To view a summary of the current template, click View Template.

To begin recording
5 At the Recorder dialog box, click OK.
The Observer window displays. (The Recorder also starts, but its window
is minimized).
For more information, see “Introduction to Observer” on page 6-2.

6 To start recording to disk, click Activate/Deactivate Recording on the

Main toolbar.
For more information about the recording parameters, see “Creating or
Editing Recording Templates” on page 5-5.
You can monitor the size of your video and EEG files during recording. To do so,
choose View > Disk Status in the Observer window. The Disk Status window
displays. It contains the size and duration of the video, and EEG files being
recorded. It also indicates how much space remains available on the disk where
the files are being recorded.

ATI Player and Matrox PC-VCR

To view the video signal entering the computer from the camera, you must
use the ATI Player or the Matrox PC-VCR.
The ATI Player is included on the diskette that is provided with your ATI
board. See “Appendix I: Video Boards.

11-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 ATI Player and Matrox PC-VCR

ATI Player
ATI Player - Button Names

CD AUDIO mode SVHS connector

MPEG mode Set zoom ratio to 1:1

TUNER mode Increase preset window size

Display help information for Decrease preset window size

the player
Minimize the player Play full screen video

Exit the player application Capture still

Cable connector Open setup dialog where you can

specify player options
VHS connector Mute audio volume

The ATI Player shows the video signal entering from the camera. It is completely
independent of the Stellate Recorder.

To set up the ATI 1 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Programs > ATI Multimedia >
Player ATI Player.
The ATI Player window displays.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 11-5

Chapter 11: DIVA

2 Click the TUNER mode button, then select one of the following
buttons:

• For standard Video, click the VHS connector button.

• For super Video, click the SVHS connector button.

3 Click the Open setup dialog where you can specify player options
button.
The ATI VIDEO PLAYER SETUP dialog box displays.

4 Click the Display tab and select the Always on Top and the Fixed Aspect
Ratio check boxes.
You can keep the default options.
5 Click the TV Tuner tab. You must select one channel to ensure that the
tuner configuration is saved.

11-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 ATI Player and Matrox PC-VCR

6 Click the Video tab and select one of the following options from the
Connector box:

• Composite for normal video output.

• S-Video for super video output.
7 From the Standard Field list, select NTSC (North America) or PALNCOMB
(most of Europe and Asia).
8 From the Audio Input list, select Wave.
9 Keep the defaults in the Video Capture and Color Setting boxes.
10 Click OK to conclude setting up the ATI Player.

To start the ATI On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Programs > ATI Multimedia > ATI
Player Player.
The ATI Player window displays, showing the video signal that is entering
the computer.

Matrox PC-VCR
To start the 1 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Programs > Matrox Video Tools >
Matrox PC-VCR Matrox PC-VCR.
2 Hide the remote by right-clicking the menu (upper left corner) and
choosing Hide Remote.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 11-7

Chapter 11: DIVA

The Matrox PC-VCR window displays, showing the video signal that is
entering the computer.

Observing Recording Sessions

In Observer, there is a Real Time DV Monitor for monitoring patients. There
is also a LookBack DV Player that is bi-directionally synchronized with the
corresponding EEG viewed in the LookBack window. Both can be used to
monitor local or remote recording sessions.
The video you are observing with the Real Time DV Monitor is a copy of what
is potentially recorded. When glitches occur, they are usually due to video
drifts, therefore it does not mean the recorded video will suffer from the same
problems.
Running the Real Time DV Monitor from the Recording station is not
recommended. It is better to use the ATI Player or the Matrox PC-VCR to monitor
the recording.

Running the Real Time DV Monitor and the LookBack DV Player at the same time
is not recommended.
The LookBack DV Player displays the patient’s name, date, and time. It is
fully synchronized with all Observer features, and remains visible while other
tools are used.
The digital video player window remains visible while other Observer tools are
used.

11-8 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Observing Recording Sessions

To use the Real 1 Click the Real Time DV Monitor button on the Tools toolbar.
Time DV Monitor OR
Choose View > Real Time DV Monitor.
The Real Time DV Monitor opens. The video file displays at the time that
corresponds to the EEG file segment currently displayed in the Observer
Real Time window.

The blue vertical cursor moves synchronously on the EEG display, always
indicating the instant that corresponds to the video being displayed.

You can select the tools that will be visible on the player.
• Choose View > All Tools to show the Zoom toolbar and Patient
information.
• Choose View > Minimal Tools to only show the Zoom toolbar.
• Choose View > No Tools if you want to show the full window.

To zoom, right-click on the video picture.
OR
Choose View > Half Size, Original Size, or Double Size.

To return the frame to normal view, click Zoom 1:1.
OR
Choose View > Zoom Reset.
2 To close the Real Time DV Player, click in the upper right hand corner
of the Real Time DV Player.

To use the 1 Click the DV Player button on the Tools toolbar.

LookBack DV OR
Player Choose Tools > DV Player.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 11-9

Chapter 11: DIVA

The DV Player opens. The video file displays, paused at the time that
corresponds to the EEG file segment currently displayed in Reviewer.

A blue vertical cursor appears on the EEG display, indicating the instant
that corresponds to the current video frame.

You can select the tools that are visible on the player.
• Choose View > All Tools to show the Playback, Speed, Zoom, and
Tracker toolbars.
• Choose View > Minimal Tools to show the Playback, Zoom, and
Tracker toolbars.
• Choose View > No Tools if you do not want to show any of the
toolbars.
2 Start the video display in the LookBack DV Player by clicking the Play
button or anywhere on the video picture.

Clicking anywhere on the picture will start or pause the video display.
The blue vertical cursor moves synchronously on the EEG display, always
indicating the instant that corresponds to the video being displayed.

To pause the video and EEG display, click the Pause button or the
video picture.

To restart the display, click the Play button or the video picture.

To skip sections, or repeatedly play the same section, click anywhere on
the EEG display while the video and EEG display are underway.
The blue vertical cursor and the video will jump to the new position.

If you want to move to another section of the EEG file, use either of the
following methods:

11-10 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Observing Recording Sessions

• Pause the video display, move to the appropriate section, then click on
the EEG display where you want the video display to restart. Click the
Pause button or the video picture to restart the video display.
• Close the video display, move to the appropriate section, and reopen
the video display.

You can use the LookBack DV Player Tracker toolbar to move around in
the digital video file.
• Click on the tracker to move forward or backward 1 minute at a time.
• Press the LEFT SCROLL or RIGHT SCROLL key to move forward or
backward 1 second at a time.

To move to the beginning of the file, click the Rewind to Start button .
OR
Choose Play > Rewind to Start.

To move to the end of the file, click the Forward to End button .
OR
Choose Play > Forward to End.

To change the playback speed, click , , or on the Speed

toolbar.
OR
Choose Play > Speed 1/4x, Speed 1/2x, or Speed 1x.

To zoom, right-click on the video picture.

To return the picture to normal view, click the Zoom Reset button on
the Zoom toolbar.

You can resize the DV Player window:
• Choose View > Half Size to make the LookBack DV Player window
half its normal size.
• Choose View > Double Size to make the LookBack DV Player window
twice its normal size.
• You can click on the edge of the LookBack DV Player window and
resize it.
• Choose View > Original Size to return the LookBack DV Player
window to its normal size.

You can use Observer tools while running the LookBack DV Player.
You should pause the LookBack DV Player before using any Observer tools.

3 Close the LookBack DV Player by clicking the Close button in the

upper right hand corner of the LookBack DV Player.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 11-11

Chapter 11: DIVA

Reviewing Digital Video Files

You can view digital video files in conjunction with an EEG file you are
viewing in Reviewer.

To use the DV 1 In Reviewer, open an EEG file.

Player
2 Click the DV Player button on the Tools toolbar.
OR
Choose Tools > DV Player.
The DV Player opens. The video file displays, paused at the time that
corresponds to the EEG file segment currently displayed in Reviewer.

A blue vertical cursor appears on the EEG display, indicating the instant
that corresponds to the current video frame.

You can select the tools that are visible on the player.
• Choose View > All Tools to show the Playback, Speed, Frame, Zoom,
and Tracker toolbars.
• Choose View > Minimal Tools to show the Playback, Zoom, and
Tracker toolbars.
• Choose View > No Tools if you do not want to show any of the
toolbars.

3 Start the video display in the DV Player by clicking the Play button or
anywhere on the video picture.
Clicking anywhere on the picture will start or pause the video display.
The blue vertical cursor moves synchronously on the EEG display, always
indicating the instant that corresponds to the video being displayed.

11-12 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Reviewing Digital Video Files

To pause the video and EEG display, click the Pause button or the
video picture.

To restart the display, click the Play button or the video picture.

To skip sections, or repeatedly play the same section, click anywhere on
the EEG display while the video and EEG display are underway.
The blue vertical cursor and the video will jump to the new position.

If you want to move to another section of the EEG file, use either of the
following methods:
• Pause the video display, move to the appropriate section, then click on
the EEG display where you want the video display to restart. Click the
Pause button or the video picture to restart the video display.
• Close the video display, move to the appropriate section, and reopen
the video display.

You can use the LookBack DV Player Tracker toolbar to move around in
the digital video file.
• Click on the tracker to move forward or backward 1 minute at a time.
• Press the LEFT SCROLL or RIGHT SCROLL key to move forward or
backward 1 second at a time.

To move to the previous or next video frame, click the Previous Frame
button or the Next Frame button on the Frame toolbar.
The picture will reverse or advance by 1 video image (NTSC=1/30th of a
second, PAL=1/25th of a second).

To move to the beginning of the file, click the Rewind to Start button .
OR
Choose Play > Rewind to Start.

To move to the end of the file, click the Forward to End button .
OR
Choose Play > Forward to End.

To change the playback speed, click , , , , , or on

the Speed toolbar.
OR
Choose Play > Speed 1/4x, Speed 1/2x, Speed 1x, Speed 2x, Speed 5x, or
Speed 10x.

To zoom, right-click on the video picture.

To return the picture to normal view, click the Zoom Reset button on
the Zoom toolbar.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 11-13

Chapter 11: DIVA

You can resize the DV Player window:

• Choose View > Half Size to make the DV Player window half its
normal size.
• Choose View > Double Size to make the DV Player window twice its
normal size.
• You can click on the edge of the DV Player window and resize it.
• Choose View > Original Size to return the DV Player window to its
normal size.

You can use Observer tools while running the LookBack DV Player.
You should pause the LookBack DV Player before using any Observer tools.

4 Close the DV Player by clicking the Close button in the upper right
hand corner of the DV Player.

Saving Digital Video Sections

When an EEG file has an attached video file, you can choose whether to save
only the EEG data, or to include the corresponding section(s) of video file.
A selected EEG section is shown in gray, and a selected digital video section is
shown in blue in the Reviewer window (or window pane). When two EEG or
digital video sections overlap, they become one section.

Marking Sections
While you are marking (or erasing) sections, you can still use the keyboard to
move around in the recording. The active keys include: HOME, END, PAGE
UP, PAGE DOWN, RIGHT ARROW, and LEFT ARROW. This feature is
useful when you are trying to mark (or erase) a section that extends beyond
the current page.

To mark sections 1 Click the Section Marker for Saving DV button on the Tools toolbar.
of digital video OR
Choose Tools > Section Marker for Saving DV.
The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
command until you stop the feature (or select a different tool).
2 Click at a time to mark the beginning of the section, then click again to
mark the end of the section. (The marked section, which contains both
digital video and EEG, is shown in blue).
You can mark another section now. When sections overlap, they are joined
to become one section.
3 To deactivate the tool, choose Section Marker for Saving DV again.

11-14 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Saving Digital Video Sections

To mark the 1 Click the Section Marker for Saving DV button on the Tools toolbar.
smallest OR
enclosing Choose Section Marker for Saving DV.
recording section The button remains pressed and a check mark appears beside the menu
with digital video command until you stop the feature (or select a different tool).
2 Double-click at a specific recording section.
When two sections (other than a Sample section) overlap at the selected
point, a popup menu containing the names of the sections will display at
your cursor.
3 Select the section you want to mark. (After you select one of the sections,
the corresponding section will be marked).

To mark multiple 1 Click the Multiple Section Marker button on the Tools toolbar.
sections OR
Choose Tools > Multiple Sections Marker.
The Multiple Sections Marker dialog box displays.

2 If you want to erase all selected sections, select the Remove any existing
marks check box.
3 Select the event groups that you want to mark.
The window shows all of the recorded sections and user-defined event
groups that are defined for the recording. Only the event groups that mark
a duration of time are included, because you cannot mark an instant in
time. (For example, you must manually select a section to mark an
annotation that is in that section).
OR
To mark the entire file, select all of the event groups by clicking Select All.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 11-15

Chapter 11: DIVA

You do not have to select an event group if it is included in another group.

For example, you can select Calibration Section and Sample Section if all of
the other groups (e.g. Push Button Sections, Spike Sections) are included in
the continuous Sample Section.
4 Select the With Digital Video check box to include digital video for the
marked sections.
5 Click OK.
When EEG is marked, all of the marked sections (i.e. from the selected
event groups) are shown in gray.
When both digital video and EEG are marked, all of the marked sections
are shown in blue.

Saving Digital Video

To save sections 1 Use the Section Marker for Saving DV to mark digital video sections.
of digital video 2 Choose File > Save Selection As.
The Save As dialog box displays.

3 Under File, enter a file name in the Name box.

Do not enter a file extension as it will be added automatically.
4 Select a format from the Format list.
Usually, you should select Signal File (HARMONIE) (the default).
5 Under Volume, click Scan, then select a volume from the Name box.

To specify who created the file, select a name from the Created by list.

To specify who the file will be assigned to, select a name from the Assign
to list.

To automatically back up the file, select the Make backup after saving
check box.

11-16 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Saving Digital Video Sections

6 Click OK.
The selected sections of the HARMONIE signal file (and digital video file)
are copied and saved.
The new file is registered in the database with the patient.
If you want to move or delete the original (or the saved) EEG file, you must
use HARMONIE (i.e. not Windows Explorer). For more information on EEG
files, see “Understanding the Database and Files” on page 9-2.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 11-17

Chapter 11: DIVA

11-18 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

CHAPTER 12: Database Management

This chapter explains the key concepts for managing the HARMONIE
database. You need to know how to back up the database because the security
of your database is important. If you need access to the shared HARMONIE
database while your computer is disconnected from the network, you also
need to know how to create a mobile database.
This chapter covers:
• Backing up the Database
• Extracting and Merging the Mobile Database
• Repairing the Database
• Compacting the Database
• Troubleshooting Volume Errors

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 12-1

Chapter 12: Database Management

Backing up the Database

Making a backup copy of the database is a simple task that is very important
for the security of your data.
If the central database becomes corrupted and you are unable to repair it
using the Repair function, you can use the latest backup copy instead. If you
made a backup copy yesterday, you have only lost one day’s work. The
longer you wait to make a backup copy, the more work you lose if something
unfortunate happens to the original database.
Remember that EEG files are stored in separate files outside the database. If
the database becomes corrupted, the actual EEG files on the hard disk drive
are not affected. After you open the latest backup copy, you can recreate any
lost file entries in the database by importing the EEG files. For more
information, see “Importing Files into the Database” on page 9-34.
For extra security, you should save backup files to a storage device other than
where the central database is stored. For example, you can use a removable
storage device (e.g. an optical disk) or another hard disk drive on the
network.
You should back up the HARMONIE database daily. If you follow the same
procedure at the end of every day, it will become a good habit.
Before you back up the database, you must exit HARMONIE on all other
workstations so that your workstation is the only one running HARMONIE. For
more information, see “Exiting HARMONIE” on page 12-3.
The only time you should open the backup copy of the database is when you
cannot use the central database because it is corrupted and cannot be repaired.
To avoid accidentally opening a backup copy of the database, you should store
the backup file in a separate folder (e.g. M:\Backups where M is a network hard
disk drive other than the drive where the central database is stored).
When you exit HARMONIE, a warning asks if you want to back up the
database. If you do not want the message to display, click the “Don’t show
this message next time” check box at the bottom of the warning. In
HARMONIE, you can also set this option on or off by choosing Options >
Backup Database on Exit.

To back up the 1 Choose File > Backup Database.

database The Save a backup copy dialog box displays.
2 From the Save in list, select the path to the folder where you want to save
the backup file.
It is important that the backup file is not confused with the central database.
Since the central database is stored in the HarmDb folder, you should save
the backup file to a Backups folder elsewhere on the network. (If this folder
does not exist, you can create it). See below for more information on the
Backups folder.
3 Enter a name in the File name box (e.g. Backup.mdb).
To avoid confusion, you should not use the name of the central database.

12-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Extracting and Merging the Mobile Database

4 Click Save.
After the backup database is created, a window displays.
5 Click OK.
6 The next time you back up the database, you can save the backup file using
the same name. Since this will replace the existing file, a warning message
displays.
7 You can click Yes.

Exiting HARMONIE
When you exit HARMONIE, the database closes automatically.
You can exit HARMONIE while you are recording or reviewing an EEG file.
Recorder, Observer, and Reviewer will continue to run while the HARMONIE
database is closed.
For example, the Recorder only accesses the database when you start and end
a recording session. If the database is closed when you end the recording
session, the Recorder can still access the database directly, provided that the
central workstation remains online and accessible through the network.
When you back up the database, you do not want other stations to access the
database. Therefore, you should communicate with the other stations before
and after you perform these procedures.
For example, you can use a program like Microsoft Win Popup to inform the
Recording workstation: “I plan to back up the master database. You must exit
HARMONIE. If you are recording now, do not stop the recording until I tell
you that I am finished”. When you are done, send another message such as:
“The action that required exclusive access to the database is complete. You
can start HARMONIE again. If you are recording now, you are free to stop
the recording”.

Extracting and Merging the Mobile Database

To perform a portable recording, a computer needs to access the central
HARMONIE database while it is disconnected from the network. Before a
computer is disconnected from the network, you must use the Extract utility
to extract data from the central database and create a special copy of the
database, called a mobile database, on the computer. (When you create a mobile
database, the central database on the network is called the master database).
After you use the Extract utility, you can create new patients and recordings
in the mobile database. These will be added to the master database after you
use the Merge utility.
If you are recording files for a patient that is already registered in the master
database, you should select the patient in step 3 of the wizard, so the patient will
be included in the mobile database. This will ensure a smoother merging of the
two databases.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 12-3

Chapter 12: Database Management

Data that is extracted from the master database cannot be modified. Only
patients and recordings that are created in the mobile database can be modified.

Performing Portable Recordings

You can add patients, EEG files, and other data to the mobile database, but
you cannot modify or delete existing data. Other workstations on the network
can continue to use the central database as usual.

Example: You have a Recording workstation and a Reviewing workstation

networked together. The central database is on the Reviewing workstation.

Reviewing Workstation Recording Workstation

Drive C: Drive C:

HARMONIE HARMONIE

Drive D:

Central Database

After you have created a mobile database, the recording workstation can be
disconnected from the network. You can use the mobile database to run
HARMONIE, and perform portable recordings.

Reviewing Workstation Recording Workstation

Drive C: Drive C:

HARMONIE HARMONIE

Drive D:
Slave Database

Central Database

The Extract and Merge utilities are wizards that take you through each
process step by step. If, at any time you want to change the choices you made,
click Previous to return to the previous step.

12-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Extracting and Merging the Mobile Database

To create a mobile 1 On the taskbar of the Recording workstation, click Start, then choose
database Programs > Stellate HARMONIE > Extract from Master.
The Extract from Harmonie Master Database: Step 1 of 4 window
displays.

Enter the location of the master database.

OR
Click Browse to find the master database.
2 Click Next.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 12-5

Chapter 12: Database Management

The Extract from Harmonie Master Database: Step 2 of 4 window

displays.

3 Enter the location and name of the mobile database.

OR
• Click Browse to change the name and location of the mobile database.
(The mobile database must be stored on the recording workstation).
4 Click Next.

12-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Extracting and Merging the Mobile Database

The Extract from Harmonie Master Database: Step 3 of 4 window

displays.

5 The patients contained in the master database are listed alphabetically by

letter in the upper portion of the screen.
Click a letter to view patient names beginning with that letter.
6 Select the patients you want to include in the mobile database, and click
Add Selected.
The patients are added to the List of selected patients box.
7 To remove a patient from the List of selected patients, select the patient
and click Remove selected.
8 Continue until you have selected all of the patients that are to be included
in the mobile database.
9 Click Next.
If you do not select any patients and click Next, a mobile database will still be
created. It will include every patient from the central database, who has at
least one EEG file recorded on the local volume of that workstation.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 12-7

Chapter 12: Database Management

The Extract from Harmonie Master Database: Step 4 of 4 window

displays.

10 Confirm the details. Then click Extract to create the mobile database.
You can now disconnect the recording workstation and run HARMONIE
using the mobile database. You can add patients, EEG files, and other data to
the mobile database, but you cannot modify or delete existing data. Other
workstations on the network can continue to use the central database as
usual.
After the computer is reconnected to the network, you must merge the mobile
database with the central (master) database.

To perform a 1 Create a mobile database on the recording workstation (e.g.

portable C:\HarmDb\mobile.mdb).
recording Instructions are given above.
2 Disconnect the Recording workstation from the network.
3 Start HARMONIE on the Recording workstation.
HARMONIE will automatically open the most recent mobile database that
is available.
To access another mobile database, choose File > Open.
4 Record the EEG file(s).
5 Reconnect the Recording workstation to the network.

12-8 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Extracting and Merging the Mobile Database

6 Merge the mobile database with the central (master) database. Instructions
are given below.
7 Start HARMONIE on the Recording workstation.
HARMONIE will automatically open the central database that was used to
create the most recent mobile database.
To access another mobile database, choose File > Open.
The HARMONIE window displays.

Merge With Master

If you have performed a portable recording and want to reconnect to the
network, you must use the Merge utility.
After you reconnect the recording workstation to the network, you must
merge the mobile database with the central (master) database.
When you successfully merge the mobile database with the central database,
the mobile database is automatically deleted. (You must create a new mobile
database the next time you want to disconnect from the central database). If
the merge is not successful, the mobile database is saved so you can attempt
another merge.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 12-9

Chapter 12: Database Management

To merge a 1 On the taskbar of the recording workstation, click Start, then choose
mobile database Programs > Stellate HARMONIE > Merge with Master.
with the central The Merge with Harmonie Master Database: Step 1 of 4 window
displays.
database

2 Click Next.

12-10 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Extracting and Merging the Mobile Database

The Merge with Harmonie Master Database: Step 2 of 4 window

displays.

3 Enter the location and name of the mobile database (e.g.

“C:\HarmDb\MobileDb.mdb”).
OR
Click Browse to find the appropriate mobile database.
The last mobile database that was created is the default selection.
4 Click Next.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 12-11

Chapter 12: Database Management

The Merge with Harmonie Master Database: Step 3 of 4 window

displays.

5 Enter the location and name of the master database (e.g.

“\\Reader-1\Harmdb\Database.mdb”).
OR
Click Browse to find the master database on the recording workstation.
The master database that was used for the last extraction is the default
selection.
6 Click Next.

12-12 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Extracting and Merging the Mobile Database

The Merge with Harmonie Master Database: Step 4 of 4 window

displays.

7 Confirm the details. Then click Merge to start the process.

After the mobile database is merged, the message, “The Merge operation
was SUCCESSFUL. Click Finish to quit the application.” displays.
8 Click Finish.
Unsuccessful merge
9 If a conflict is detected between the Mobile and Master databases, the
Patient Conflict dialog box displays.
10 The following options are available:
• A) One patient record is correct. Select the patient that has the most
accurate information.
If you select this option, you must select either the Master database
patient, or the Mobile database patient.
• B) The Mobile database patient has the wrong identification number.
If you select this option, you must enter a new Mobile Patient ID1.
11 Click OK to complete the merge operation.
OR
Click Postpone to postpone the operation until another time.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 12-13

Chapter 12: Database Management

Repairing the Database

The Repair utility can potentially help to recover a damaged database. It
automatically checks the database each time it is opened and will prompt you
to repair the database if it detects any damage.
Before you start the Repair utility, you must exit HARMONIE on all workstations
so that the central database is closed.
You can exit HARMONIE at a workstation while you are recording or reviewing an
EEG file. For more information, see “Exiting HARMONIE” on page 12-3.

To repair a 1 Choose Tools > Repair Database.

database 2 A message prompts you to make a copy of your database before
attempting to repair it.
Click Yes to continue.
The Save a copy before Repair dialog box displays.

3 Enter a filename and location for the database copy, then click Save.
The utility will proceed with the database repair.
A message informs you whether the repair was successful.
If the database was not successfully repaired, you will need to use the backup
database. For more information, see “Backing up the Database” on page 12-2.

Compacting the Database

The Compact utility can help to recover unused space within your database.
Before you start the Compact utility, you must exit HARMONIE on all
workstations so that the central database is closed.
You can exit HARMONIE at a workstation while you are recording or reviewing an
EEG file. For more information, see “Exiting HARMONIE” on page 12-3.

12-14 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Troubleshooting Volume Errors

To compact a 1 Choose Tools > Compact Database.

database 2 A message prompts you to make a copy of your database before you
compact it.
Click Yes to continue.
The Save a copy before Compact dialog box displays.

3 Enter a filename and location for the database copy, then click Save.
The utility will proceed to compact the database.
A message informs you that the procedure was successful.

Troubleshooting Volume Errors

Several errors may result from problems with the volumes in your database.
This section explains the different error messages and the actions you can take
to solve the problems.
1 Cannot find the volume location.
You are trying to open an EEG file in the Reviewer from one of the
HARMONIE File views. (If you have the SENSA add-on module, you can
also get this message when you are trying to open a spectral file).
HARMONIE scans all of the drives on the workstation and mapped on the
network. (The floppy disk drives are not scanned if No volume on floppy
drive A: and B: is selected. You can set this option from the Options
menu). The volume exists in the database, but the corresponding volume
information file cannot be found.
Possible reasons include:
• The Volume.inf file is on a CD-ROM that has not been inserted into the
CD-ROM drive. Insert the correct CD-ROM and try again.
• The Volume.inf file is on a drive that cannot be accessed.
If possible, change the access level of the drive and try again.
• The Volume.inf file has been deleted.
For more information, see “Recovering Volume Information Files” on
page 12-16.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 12-15

Chapter 12: Database Management

2 The volume is not found on any available disk drive.

You are trying to delete a volume from the database. The volume exists in
the database, but the corresponding volume information file cannot be
found.
In this situation, you should verify that the volume drive is accessible. If it
can be accessed, you can safely remove the volume from the database
without deleting the volume information file.
3 The volume is not available.
You are trying to modify the volume name and description in the Volumes
view. To do this, the drive with the volume information file cannot be
read-only. For example, if the volume is on a CD-ROM, you cannot modify
the volume name but you can change the Description field.
4 The disk already contains a volume created by another database.
You are trying to create a volume or recover the volume information file
for an existing volume. However, the drive that you selected from the
Disk Drive list is already used by another HARMONIE database. In other
words, the HarmEEG folder on this drive already contains a Volume.inf
file.
If you choose to overwrite this file, the other HARMONIE database will
lose access to the EEG files in this volume. The EEG files are not deleted.
You are trying to create a volume or recover the volume information file
for an existing volume. However, the drive that you selected from the
Disk Drive list is read-only.
If it is a CD-ROM drive, you must select another drive. If the drive is on the
network, the access level may be set to read-only. In this case, you can go
to the remote computer and change the access level to Full Access. For
instructions, see “Configuring the Central Workstation” on page 4-3.

Recovering Volume Information Files

When you create a new volume, HARMONIE adds an entry in the database
and automatically creates a volume information file on the hard drive. This
Volume.inf file is stored in the HarmEEG folder, on the hard drive that
corresponds to the volume.
For more information on volumes, refer to “Understanding the Database and
Files” on page 9-2.
Since EEG files belong to volumes, it is important that the Volume.inf file is
not deleted because it helps HARMONIE find EEG files. If this file is
somehow lost or deleted, you can recover it. (To do this, HARMONIE
recovers the volume information from the database entry and creates another
Volume.inf file).

To recover a 1 Show the Volumes view in List format.

volume 2 Select the volume that does not have a volume information file.
information file 3 Choose File > Recover Volume Label.

12-16 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Troubleshooting Volume Errors

The New Volume Identification dialog box displays.

4 From the Disk Drive list, select the drive where the EEG files are located.
• If the list does not contain the drive you want, the volume information
file is not lost. Click Cancel to abort the recovery.
• The drive may be listed as “Volume created by other database”. If you
select it, the volume information file for the other database will be
deleted.
You cannot change the Volume Name or Description fields.
5 Click OK.
The Volume.inf file is created in the HarmEEG folder.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide 12-17

Chapter 12: Database Management

12-18 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

APPENDIX A: Hardware Setup

After HARMONIE is installed, the Hardware Setup function is used to

configure hardware devices such as the recording device, photic stimulator,
and time code generator. There are also some computer settings that need to
be changed.
This chapter covers:
• Screen Calibration
• Hardware Setup Function
• Setting Up the Recording Device
• Setting Up the Photic Stimulator Device
• Setting Up the Time Code Generator
• Setting Up the Play Back VCR
• Setting Up the Digital Video Recording Device
• Testing
• Troubleshooting During Hardware Setup
• System Setup
• TCP/IP Network Protocol

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide A-1

Appendix A: Hardware Setup

Screen Calibration
The Screen Calibration feature is used to calibrate your screen by applying a
ruler directly over the calibration sample line that has been generated. This
information will be used in Reviewer and Observer to correctly display time
scales so they are equivalent to paper speeds (e.g. an event of 1 second at 30
mm/second actually measures 30 mm on the computer screen).
• The vertical and horizontal lines are used for measuring the unit length.
(As their lengths change, the corresponding pixel number changes).
• The horizontal Increase and Decrease buttons increase and decrease the
length of the horizontal line.
• The vertical Increase and Decrease buttons increase and decrease the
length of the vertical line.

To calibrate your 1 Start the Hardware Setup function.

screen 2 At the Select and Configure Devices dialog box, click Cancel.

3 Click Screen Calibration on the toolbar.

OR
Choose Edit > Screen Calibration.
The Screen Calibration dialog box displays.

4 To measure the vertical line, place a ruler against the line. Then click the
corresponding Decrease or Increase button until the line measures 30 mm.
5 To measure the horizontal line, place a ruler against the line. Then click the
corresponding Decrease or Increase button until the line measures 50 mm.
6 Click OK to save the settings.

A-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Hardware Setup Function

Hardware Setup Function

The Hardware Setup function is used for screen calibration, and configuring
the recording device, photic stimulator, time code generator, and PlayBack
VCR. This function is used after HARMONIE is installed.
You cannot use the Hardware Setup function during a recording session. Stop
the Recorder before changing the hardware configuration.

To start the From the HARMONIE window, choose Start > Hardware Setup.
Hardware Setup OR
Function On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Programs > Stellate HARMONIE >
Hardware Setup.
After the Hardware Setup window opens, the Select and Configure Devices
dialog box displays.

The following sections describe how to configure hardware using the

Hardware Setup function. When you have finished, you must save the
changes.

To save changes Click Save on the toolbar.

in Hardware OR
Setup Choose File >Save Current Selection.
If you exit without saving, a warning displays.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide A-3

Appendix A: Hardware Setup

Setting Up the Recording Device

Before you can record with HARMONIE, a recording device must be selected.
If you have installed a data acquisition board, you can select it as your
recording device. Otherwise, select the Synthetic Data Generator to record
artificial signals instead.
To do this, you select the Synthetic Data Generator as the recording device.
The Synthetic Data Generator is a software program that generates artificial
signals. It is not a real data acquisition board.
You should use the Synthetic Data Generator to learn how to record signals
(even if you have installed a data acquisition board) because it allows you to
learn HARMONIE without using real data.

After you select a data acquisition board as the recording device, you must
configure the board.

Grass Model-15 Boards

The Grass Model-15 acquisition board supports the following A/D cards:
• AT-MIO-64E-3
• PCI-6023E
• PCI-6033E

To set up the 1 Start the Hardware Setup function.

recording device OR

If the Hardware Setup window is open, click Devices on the toolbar.

The Select and Configure Devices dialog box displays.

2 Select a device from the ADC Device list of supported boards.

A-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Setting Up the Digital Input Device

The Synthetic Data Generator also appears on this list.

3 If the selected ADC device is not the Synthetic Data Generator, configure it
as explained in the procedure below.
4 Click the ADC Device Configure button to configure the recording
device.
A dialog box displays for the specific board that is selected. All of the fields
are initially set to the default values.
5 Set up the various fields according to your board configuration.
Hardware settings and configuration instructions for various types of
boards are given in the following Appendices.
6 Click OK.
The configuration window may contain different fields for certain boards.
Four of the possible fields are explained below. For specific information, refer
to the user documentation from the board manufacturer.
Most boards are programmed through Input/Output ports. A DIP switch on
the board sets the base address for these ports. If you change this DIP switch,
you must also set the Base Address field. (Usually, the base address is only
changed if there is a port conflict).
The ADC Range field is set to the amplitude setting for the inputs. If your
inputs always fall within a smaller amplitude range, you may want to
decrease this setting.
If the board uses Direct Memory Access (DMA), then the DMA Channel
must be specified. (Usually, a DIP switch on the board sets the channel that is
used).
While you record, the board stores data into a memory buffer to ensure that
some data is available while the computer is busy with other tasks. You can
select the Delay (in seconds) that is stored in the buffer. If the time is too low,
a long task (while recording) could cause a buffer overflow interrupt. Also,
remember that more memory is required as the value increases.

Setting Up the Digital Input Device

If the selected board has a digital input device such as a Push Button device, it
should be configured according to the instructions contained in the
appropriate Appendix.

Setting Up the Digital Output Device

If you select a digital output device such as an alarm, the digital output signal
switches from 0 to 5 volts for 100 milliseconds.
The device should support multiple alarms. In HARMONIE, Alarm 1 is used
by the Seizure Onset Pattern Detector, and alarm 2 is used by the Seizure
Pattern Detector.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide A-5

Appendix A: Hardware Setup

Setting Up the Photic Stimulator Device

If you want to use a photic stimulator while you record, you must select a
photic stimulator device.
If you are using the HPS95 Photic Stimulator Interface, you must specify the
printer port where it is attached. For more information on this device, see
Appendix D.

To set up the 1 Start the Hardware Setup function.

photic stimulator OR
device
If the Hardware Setup window is open, click Devices on the toolbar.
The Select and Configure Devices dialog box displays.
2 Select a device from the Photic Device list.
Instructions for configuring photic stimulator devices can be found in
Appendix D.
3 Click OK.
You can learn how to enter and play photic stimulator protocols without
connecting the HPS95 Interface. To do this, select Photic Stimulator Demo in
step 2 above.

Setting Up the Time Code Generator

A time code generator (TCG) is used to synchronize the EEG signal recorded
on the computer, and the video signal on a VCR. There is no need to use a
time code generator with digital video.
HARMONIE supports two types of time code generators:
• A device that encodes the output from the video camera with a time code
signal, and superimposes the time of day on the video image (e.g. BCD TC-
100 Time Code System).
• A device that only superimposes the time of day (and other information)
directly on the video image (e.g. MULTIM Video Print Screen).
If you only superimpose the time of day directly on the video image, you cannot
use Video Synchronization mode when you review the EEG file. Only video
recorded with a time code signal can be reviewed using this mode.
For information on the MULTIM Video Print Screen device, see Appendix E.
For information on the BCD TC-100 Time Code System, see Appendix F. Each
appendix explains how to connect the TCG, computer, video camera,
microphone, and recording VCR.
In Hardware Setup, you select and configure the time code generator. After
you connect the device, you can enable the Time Code Generator feature
when you start the Recorder. For more information, see “Creating or Editing
Recording Templates” on page 5-5.

A-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Setting Up the Time Code Generator

To set up the time 1 Start the Hardware Setup function.

code generator OR

If the Hardware Setup window is already open, click Devices on the

toolbar.
The Select and Configure Devices dialog box displays.
2 Select a device from the Time Code Generator list.
3 Click the Time Code Generator Configure button.
A dialog box displays for the specific device that is selected. See the section
below that corresponds to your device.
4 All of the fields are initially set to the default values. If necessary, change
the various fields according to your device configuration.
5 Click OK.
Remember to save the changes before you exit the Hardware Setup
function.

To configure the If the selected TCG is the BCD TC-100 Time Code System, the AV Device
BCD TC-100 Time Configuration dialog box displays.
Code System

1 From the Serial Port list, select the COM port where the TCG is connected.
Check that the port is added and not conflicting with any other device (e.g.
a mouse). See below for instructions.
2 Under Time Code Overlay (Recording), you can change the following
options:
• Screen Position
• Character Size
• Overlay Style when Recording EEG
• Overlay Style when NOT Recording EEG
This sets the characters used to display the time code on the video monitor
(or window if you are using Video-in-a-Window).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide A-7

Appendix A: Hardware Setup

The character and background colors are reversed when the Recorder
starts and stops recording to disk.

To configure the 1 When the selected TCG is the MULTIM Video Print Screen the MULTIM
MULTIM video Configuration dialog box displays. Select the COM port where the TCG is
connected.
print screen

2 Check that the port is added and not conflicting with any other device (e.g.
a mouse).
The MULTIM Video Print Screen superimposes the time of day directly on
the video image. The date and the first eight characters of the patient name
are also displayed on the video.
3 If you want to use the patient ID number instead of the patient name,
select Send Patient ID.

To check that the 1 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Start > Settings > Control Panel.
COM port is 2 Double-click the System icon.
added 3 Click the Device Manager tab.
4 Double-click the Ports (COM & LPT) device type.
5 If the COM port you selected in Hardware Setup is listed, the time code
generator is configured properly. Otherwise, you must add the COM port.

To add the COM 1 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Settings > Control Panel.
port 2 Double-click the Add New Hardware icon.
The wizard for this procedure starts.
3 Click Next.
4 Select No so Windows will not search for new hardware.
Click Next.
5 Double-click the Ports (COM & LPT) hardware type.
6 Select Standard port types (Communications Port).
Click Next.
7 Accept the displayed settings by clicking Next.
8 The next COM port is added. Click Finish.
A warning message displays.

A-8 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Setting Up the PlayBack VCR

9 Restart the computer.

The time code generator should now be properly configured.

Setting Up the PlayBack VCR

If you use a TCG that encodes the output from the video camera with a time
code signal (e.g. BCD TC-100 Time Code System), you must use a time code
reader (TCR) when you review the video later. In other words, the PlayBack
VCR must have an integrated TCR (e.g. Panasonic AG-2550C with integrated
BCD Control) to read the time code from the video.
If you only superimpose the time of day directly on the video image, you cannot
use Video Synchronization mode when you review the EEG file. Only video
recorded with a time code signal can be reviewed using this mode.
In Hardware Setup, you select and configure the PlayBack VCR. For
information on the BCD Control, see Appendix F. The appendix explains how
to connect the computer and PlayBack VCR.
After you connect the device, you can use the Video Synchronization mode in
Reviewer. For more information, see “Reviewing Patient Analog Video” on
page 8-43.

To set up the 1 Start the Hardware Setup function.

PlayBack VCR OR

If the Hardware Setup window is already open, click Devices on the

toolbar.
The Select and Configure Devices dialog box displays.
2 Select a device from the VCR Player list.
3 Click the VCR Player Configure button.
4 If you selected the Panasonic AG-2550C with integrated BCD Control, the
AV Device Configuration dialog box displays.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide A-9

Appendix A: Hardware Setup

5 From the Serial Port list, select the COM port where the PlayBack VCR is
connected.
Check that the port is added and not conflicting with any other device (e.g.
a mouse).
6 Under Time Code Overlay (Recording), you can change the following
options:
• Screen Position
• Character Size
• Overlay Style when Recording EEG
• Overlay Style when NOT Recording EEG
This sets the characters used to display the time code on the video monitor
(or window if you are using Video-in-a-Window).
The character and background colors are reversed when the Recorder
starts and stops recording to disk.
7 Click OK.
Remember to save the changes before you exit the Hardware Setup function.

Setting Up the Digital Video Board

Before you can begin to record digital video, you must set up the video
recording device you will use. You can configure the digital video image size
and encoding speed in order to specify the video picture quality and storage
space requirements. Picture quality can be set higher or lower than the
current standard MPEG1 to save space.
To enable full motion digital video playback at 5x speed and prevent Observer
and Reviewer from crashing while playing digital video files, it is strongly
recommended that you follow the instructions below.
The Digital Video Capture Configuration dialog box is used to select the
digital video image size and encoding speed, in order to specify the level of
video picture quality and storage space requirements.
Video capture is configured by selecting an MPEG1 encoding option from the
list. Various MPEG1 encoding bit rates and picture sizes (quarter size or
normal size pictures with low, normal, or high bit rates) are offered.
The frame rate will remain at the maximum of 30 fps NTSC or 25 fps PAL.

If you are using a black and white camera, it is strongly recommended that the
Digital Video Capture Configuration be set to Black and White.

A-10 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Setting Up the Digital Video Board

Performance Issues
Consider the following equations:
• Lower image quality = lower capture rate = lower RAM & HD storage
needed = lower CPU% needed = lower network bandwidth needed
• Better image quality = higher capture rate = more RAM & HD storage
needed = more CPU% needed = more network bandwidth needed

To enable full 1 On every digital video station, open one HARMONIE generated DV
motion digital “.MPG” file with Microsoft MediaPlayer 6.4.
video playback at 2 Choose File > Properties.
5x speed 3 At the Properties dialog box, select the Advanced tab.
4 Select MPEG Audio Decoder from the Filters in use list, then click
Properties.
5 Under Sound Quality, select AM radio. Then click Set As Default.
6 Click Apply and then click OK.
7 Close the Properties dialog box.
8 Close the MediaPlayer 6.4 program.

To select the 1 Start the Hardware Setup function.

digital video OR
board
If the Hardware Setup window is already open, click Devices on the
toolbar.
The Select and Configure Devices dialog box displays.

2 Select a device from the Digital Video Recording Device list.

For more information, see Appendix J, “Video Boards”.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide A-11

Appendix A: Hardware Setup

To set up the 1 At the Select and Configure Devices dialog box, select Optibase
Optibase MovieMaker S-Family from the Digital Video Recording Device list.
MovieMaker 2 Click the corresponding Configure button to specify the MPEG1 encoding
option.
S-Family
The Digital Video Capture Configuration dialog box displays.

3 Select the type of Video Standard, Input and Color. Then select a
configuration from the list.
4 Click OK.
5 At the Select and Configure Devices dialog box, click OK to save the
settings and close the window.

To set up the 1 At the Select and Configure Devices dialog box, select Optibase
Optibase MovieMaker XPress from the Digital Video Recording Device list.
MovieMaker 2 Click the corresponding Configure button to specify the MPEG1 encoding
option.
XPress
The Digital Video Capture Configuration dialog box displays.

3 Select the type of Video Standard, and then select a configuration from the
list.
4 Click OK. At the Select and Configure Devices dialog box, click OK to
save the settings and close the window.

A-12 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Testing

Testing
Testing the Recording Device
After you have installed and configured the data acquisition board, you can
test that it is working properly.
The data acquisition board must be physically installed in your computer before
you can test it.
If your data acquisition board has a DIO device (e.g. a Push Button device), you
can test it while you test the board. The status (e.g. Button Pressed) is shown at
the bottom of the window.

To test the 1 Click Test ADC / DIO on the toolbar.

recording device OR
Choose Test >Recording.
The ADC Input dialog box displays.

2 Select the Sampling frequency.

3 Select the Number of channels.
4 Click OK.
A warning message displays. Make sure that the board is installed. (If you
are testing the Synthetic Data Generator, ignore this message).
5 Click OK.
The Hardware Setup window displays the input signal traces in real time.
These signals are not being recorded because you are only testing the
board.
6 If you are using an amplifier that allows computer controlled impedance
measurement, you can click the Impedance Mode button .
OR
Choose Options > Impedance Test Mode.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide A-13

Appendix A: Hardware Setup

Impedance (E-TEST) mode sets the amplifier into an impedance testing

mode that is equivalent to pressing the corresponding (Ohm) button on
the amplifier.
7 If you are using an amplifier that allows computer controlled calibration,
you can click the Calibration Mode button .
OR
Choose Options > Calibration Mode.
If you have an amplifier that allows computer-controlled calibration, you do
not need to set your amplifier to ‘Calibration mode’. When you click the
Calibrate button, the amplifier will automatically go into Calibration mode.
8 If you are using the Schwarzer 66-ch EEG amplifier for electrical
stimulation, you can click the Electric Stimulation button .
OR
Choose Options > Electric Stimulation.
9 You can change the channels that are displayed, and you can change their
sensitivities by choosing Options > Display Channels and Gains.
For more information, see “Changing the Channel Settings” on page A-16.

10 When you have finished viewing the signals, click the Stop button on
the toolbar.
OR
Choose Test > Stop.

Testing the Alarms

After you have connected Alarm 1, which is used for the Seizure Onset
Pattern Detector, and Alarm 2, which is used for the Seizure Pattern Detector,
you can test that they are working properly.

To test the alarms 1 To test Alarm 1, click the Alarm1 button.

OR
Choose Test > Alarm1.
The alarm should sound.

2 To test Alarm 2, click the Alarm2 button.

OR
Choose Test > Alarm2.
The alarm should sound.

A-14 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Testing

Testing the Photic Stimulator

After you have connected a photic stimulator to a photic stimulator interface,
you can test that it is working properly.
Make sure the photic stimulator interface is connected before testing it.

To test the photic 1 Click Test Photic on the toolbar.

stimulator OR
Interface Choose Test > Photic Stimulator.
The Test Photic Stimulator dialog box displays.

2 Select a frequency (between 1 and 63 Hz) from the Frequency list.

3 Click Start.
4 If the photic stimulator is flashing correctly, click Stop.
5 Click Close.

Enabling/Disabling the Digital Readout Display

When you view a signal trace from the data acquisition board, the channel bar
displays the channel name and the voltage of each channel. The displayed
values are from the current record's last sample.
You can specify how often the displayed values are updated, or freeze the
value. The Digital Readout value must be +/- 100 V.

Digital Readout
The Digital Readout dialog box is used to specify how often the displayed
values are updated.

Update Digital Readout each n seconds: Specifies the interval between

Digital Readout updates.

Freeze Digital Readout check box: Select this check box to disable the Digital
Readout feature. Clear this check box to enable the Digital Readout feature.

To enable/disable 1 Click Display Digital Readout on the toolbar.

the Digital OR
Readout display Choose Options > Display Digital Readout.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide A-15

Appendix A: Hardware Setup

The Digital Readout dialog box displays.

2 To specify how often the displayed values are updated, enter a value.
OR
To disable this feature, select the Freeze Digital Readout check box.
3 You can toggle this feature from enabled to disabled by pressing the SHIFT
key.

Changing the Channel Settings

When you view a signal trace from the data acquisition board, you can select
the channels that you want to display. You can also change the following
channel properties: sensitivity, polarity, baseline, and width. For more
information, see “Displaying Channels” on page 7-5.
The sensitivity units cannot be changed while testing because the signals are
not calibrated yet. For more information, see “Calibrating Signals” on page 5-9.

To change the 1 Click Channels and Gains on the toolbar.

channel settings OR
while testing Choose Options > Display Channels and Gains.
2 The Channel Properties dialog box lists all of the channels that were
selected for the test.

3 Select a channel from the list.

A-16 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Testing

OR
Select multiple channels using the CTRL and SHIFT keys.
OR
Click Select All.
4 You can display or hide the channels in the Hardware Setup window by
using the Include or Exclude button.
You can also double-click an entry to toggle this setting.
5 Initially, Sensitivity is selected in the Property list. You can increase or
decrease the sensitivity of the selected channels, using the Increase or
Decrease button.
The next lower or higher sensitivity value for each selected channel is
taken from the EEG-type range.
6 To enter a specific sensitivity value, select a channel and click Edit.
The Edit Channel Sensitivity dialog box displays.

7 Change the value, then click OK.

(The value must be within the range of sensitivity values for the EEG
type).
8 To edit the range of sensitivity values, click Range.
The Sensitivity Ranges dialog box displays.

9 To display the set of values for a different trace type, select the type from
the Trace Type list.
You can add and delete values to and from the range:
• To clear all of the values for the displayed trace type, click Delete All.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide A-17

Appendix A: Hardware Setup

• To return to the default range for the displayed trace type, click Default.
10 Click OK to return to the Channel Properties dialog box.
11 To change (or view) the channel polarity, select Polarity from the Property
list.
You can set the polarity of the selected channels by clicking Pos. Up or
Neg. Up.
12 To change (or view) the channel baseline, select Baseline from the Property
list.
You can set the baseline of the selected channels by clicking Edit.
13 Click OK to accept the new settings.

Troubleshooting
You may experience problems while testing your data acquisition board. For
example, your computer may stop responding. There are a few reasons why
this can happen:
• The data acquisition board you specified is not installed properly.
• The configuration parameters you specified do not match the actual
settings of the board.
• The board’s settings conflict with the other devices already installed on
your system.

To troubleshoot 1 Shut down Windows and turn off the computer.

during Hardware 2 Disconnect the computer power supply.
Setup 3 Remove the data acquisition board.
4 Verify that the hardware settings are correct.
5 Install the board firmly in its slot on the motherboard.
6 Restart the computer and start Hardware Setup again.
If you have problems with the data acquisition board, you can select the
Synthetic Data Generator and then test it. When it works properly, you know
the problems are caused by your board (and not the Hardware Setup
function).

System Setup
In HARMONIE, three important system settings are: the system time, printer
settings, and virtual memory settings.
HARMONIE uses the system time when you record EEG files. Therefore, it is
important that the date and time are correct. You can set the date and time in
the Control Panel.

A-18 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 System Setup

To set the date 1 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Settings > Control Panel.
and time The Control Panel window displays.
2 Double-click the Date/Time icon.
The Date/Time Properties dialog box displays.

3 Select the correct year, month, and day on the left side.
4 Enter the time in the digital time display on the right side.
5 Click OK.
Your laser printer must be set up to print the data labels (e.g. text for
annotations) on the EEG signal traces (i.e. graphics) properly.

To set up the 1 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Settings > Printers.
printer 2 Select the laser printer that you will use for printing.
3 Choose File > Properties.
4 Click the Fonts tab.
5 Select Print TrueType as graphics.
6 Click the Device Options tab.
Check that the amount of Printer memory matches the actual memory
installed in the printer.
7 Click OK.
You must set the size of your virtual memory to 100MB so that HARMONIE
can handle EEG files if you run out of hard disk space (i.e. when you are
recording an EEG file).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide A-19

Appendix A: Hardware Setup

TCP/IP Network Protocol

To use the Observer over a network that contains routers, you it is
recommended that you use the TCP/IP network protocol. NetBEUI can still
be used, but TCP/IP is required to allow remote observing. (In HARMONIE
Version 5.0, NetBEUI was required for remote observing).
Also, the TCP/IP protocol allows remote observing through the Internet (via
a Virtual Private Network or VPN).

About Observer and Network Protocols

Using Observer, you can connect to any ongoing recording session on the
network. For example, the Observer function on the Reviewing workstation
can be connected to the Recorder function on the Recording workstation.
A protocol is the “language” a computer uses to communicate over a
network. Computers must use the same protocol to communicate with each
other. TCP/IP is a protocol used to connect to Windows NT, Windows for
Workgroups or LAN Manager servers, and for connections over the Internet.
Each computer needs to be assigned a unique IP address. If the TCP/IP network
protocol is not installed, you should contact your Network Administrator for this
information.

A-20 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

APPENDIX B: BMSI Board

This appendix includes:

• Jumper Settings for BMSI-519 Boards

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide B-1

Appendix B: BMSI Board

Jumper Settings for BMSI-519 Boards

The DMA channel is set to 6 as default. It is also possible to assign it to
channel 5 or 7. A simple hardware modification will be necessary. Contact
Biomedical Monitoring Systems Inc. for more details.
The base address is set to 280 as the default. All other jumpers settings should
use the factory configuration.
Figure B.1 Input Mode Selection Connections Between the BMSI-519 Board and a Polygraph

50 Pin Male Header

Input #0 has a pulse extender and a internal pull-up. It
should be connected to the patient push-button. When
Input #0 is brought low, it will be held low for ~1 second.

1 2
PushButton In0 Out0 Alarm1
3 4
Patient Connect In1 Out1 Alarm2
5 6
In2 Out2
7 8
In3 Out3
9 10
In4 Out4
11 12
In5 Out5
13 14
In6 Out6
15 16
DGND DGND
17 18
Ch0 Ch1
19 20
Ch2 Ch3
21 22
Ch4 Ch5
23 24
Ch6 Ch7
25 26
Ch8 Ch9
27 28
Ch10 Ch11
29 30
Ch12 Ch13
31 32
Ch14 Ch15
33 34
Ch16 Ch17
35 36
Ch18 Ch19
37 38
Ch20 Ch21
39 40
Ch22 Ch23
41 42
Ch24 Ch25
43 44
Ch26 Ch27
45 46
Ch28 Ch29
47 48
Ch30 Ch31
49 50
CR AGND

Channel Return (CR) should be connected

to ground at the signal source

These are the 32 channel inputs numbered 0 to 31

The CR line is common to all channels

B-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

APPENDIX C: National Instruments
Boards

This appendix includes:

• National Instruments 64-ch A/D Cards

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide C-1

Appendix C: National Instruments Boards

National Instruments 64-ch A/D Cards

The following illustrations show the I/O Interface Cables for the 64-ch A/D
cards.
Figure C.1 PCI-6023E, PCI-6034E & PCI-DAQ Card Cables

ACH8 34 68 ACH0
ACH1 33 67
32 66 ACH9
ACH10 31 65 ACH2
ACH3 30 64
29 63 ACH11
ACH4 28 62 AISENSE AGND
27 61 ACH12
ACH13 26 60 ACH5
ACH6 25 59
24 58 ACH14
ACH15 23 57 ACH7
22 56
21 55
20 54
19 53
DGND 18 52 DIO0 PB
PC DIO1 17 51
16 50 DGND
DGND 15 49 DIO2 ALARM1
+5 V 14 48
13 47 DIO3 ALARM2
12 46
11 45
10 44
9 43
8 42
7 41
6 40
5 39
4 38
3 37
PS SYNCIN GPCTR0_OUT 2 36
1 35

PB Pushbutton (Normally Open)

PC Patient Connect Switch (Normally Open)
PS Photic Stimulator
ALARM1 External Alarm Trigger (Harmonie 5.0 only)
ALARM2 External Alarm Trigger (Reserved)
AGND Analog Ground (must be tied to AISENSE)

C-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 National Instruments 64-ch A/D Cards

Figure C.2 AT-MIO-64-E3 & PCI-6033E

1 51 ACH16
2 52 ACH25
ACH0 3 53 ACH17
ACH8 4 54 ACH25
ACH1 5 55 ACH18
ACH9 6 56 ACH26
ACH2 7 57 ACH19
ACH10 8 58 ACH27
ACH3 9 59 ACH20
ACH11 10 60 ACH28
ACH4 11 61 ACH21
ACH12 12 62 ACH29
ACH5 13 63 ACH22
ACH13 14 64 ACH30
ACH6 15 65 ACH23
ACH14 16 66 ACH31
ACH7 17 67 ACH32
ACH15 18 68 ACH40
AGND AISENSE 19 69 ACH33
20 70 ACH41
21 71 ACH34
22 72 ACH42
23 73 ACH35
DGND 24 74 ACH43
PB DIO0 25 75 AISENSE2 AGND
26 76
PC DIO1 27 77 ACH36
28 78 ACH44
ALARM1 DIO2 29 79 ACH37
30 80 ACH45
ALARM2 DIO3 31 81 ACH38
32 82 ACH46
DGND 33 83 ACH39
+5 V 34 84 ACH47
35 85 ACH48
36 86 ACH56
37 87 ACH49
38 88 ACH57
39 89 ACH50
40 90 ACH58
41 91 ACH51
42 92 ACH59
43 93 ACH52
44 94 ACH60
45 95 ACH53
46 96 ACH61
47 97 ACH54
48 98 ACH62
PS SYNCIN GPCTR0_OUT 49 99 ACH55
50 100 ACH63

PB Pushbutton (Normally Open)

PC Patient Connect Switch (Normally Open)
PS Photic Stimulator
ALARM1 External Alarm Trigger (Harmonie 5.0 only)
ALARM2 External Alarm Trigger (Reserved)
AGND Analog Ground
(must be tied to AISENSE1 and AISENSE2)

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide C-3

Appendix C: National Instruments Boards

C-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

APPENDIX D: LA MONT Data Acquisition
Boards

After you install a data acquisition board, you must configure it. This
appendix explains how to configure LA MONT HXAT-32/64, Cardinal-I,
Emerald, and WARATAH data acquisition boards.
To ensure data quality and patient safety, do not place the flat jackbox on a metal
surface while recording. Use the dedicated jackbox stand when available, or
ensure the jackbox is resting on a non-conductive (i.e. plastic/wooden) surface.
This appendix includes:
• Jumper Settings for LA MONT HXAT-32 Boards
• Installation
• Configuration
• Amplifier Settings
• Working With Mapping Configurations

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-1

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

The following diagram summarizes the various accessories used by the

LA MONT system.
Ceiling Mic

Shotgun Microphone 17", 19", 20" LCD or CRT

Regular or Multimedia Monitors
B&W or Color Camera Motorized Lens
AV AV
Wall Plate Wall Plate
Manual Lens
Isolation Transformer

Audio Pre-Amp Digital Video

Capture Card
(PCI Bus)
120Gb Hard Disk

Pan-Tilt-Zoom Graphic Card

Desktop Computer
Pan-Tilt-Zoom with Video Input ASUS Motherboard
Controller (PCI Bus) P4, 1.6Ghz
Fixed Wall Mount
512Mb RAM, 20Gb HDD
Photic/Alarm Out
Alarm Alarm Interface Card Photic Lamp
Unit Wall Plate (PCI Bus) Photic Controller
Pan-Tilt-Zoom Mount

Interface
Cards
Amp/PB Wall Plate DIO and Aux Inputs
(single or dual) PS and Alarm Out Cardinal-I Interface Card
Dual Amp Inputs (PCI Bus)
Cart Mount 17", 19", 20" LCD or CRT
OR Regular or Multimedia Monitors

Intra-Mural Cabling
DIO Input HXAT-64 Interface Card
(up to 77m)
Pushbutton (ISA Bus) Isolation Transformer
Dual Amp Inputs
Host PC
OR
120Gb Hard Disk
Amplifier Extension Cable (10m typ) DIO & Aux Inputs HXAT-32 Interface Card
Amp/PB Wall Plate
(single or dual) Amp Input (ISA Bus)
Amplifier Extension
Mini-Tower Computer
Cable (3m typ)
ASUS Motherboard
Snap-On P4, 1.6Ghz
Amp & Snap-On Pouch 512Mb RAM, 20Gb HDD
(EEG or Sleep) (single or dual)

Emerald Interface
with isolation transformer
(PCMCIA Bus)
Single or Dual
Optically Isolated Amplifiers

EEG 16, 24 or 32-ch
Aux In Cable

Sleep 16, 24 or 30-ch

Optional SpO2 Interface
Amp & Snap-On PCMCIA
Support Stand Interface Card
Jackbox Cable (3m typ) (single or dual)
Amp & Snap-On
Support Clamp
(single or dual)

Laptop computer
Safety Jackbox
(EEG or Sleep)
Laptop Power

System Carrying Case

Jackbox Stand

D-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Jumper Settings

Jumper Settings
LA MONT HXAT-32 Boards
The LK5 and LK6 jumpers should be at positions A-B. This enables the card’s
digital inputs 1 & 2.

LK5 LK6

Push Button Connection

• HARMONIE only uses IN1 to detect the Push Button.
• A Push Button is connected on the HXAT-32 auxiliary connector between
pins 18 and 36.
• In HARMONIE, the DIO setting you must select is “LA MONT HXAT-32/
64”.

Push Button Tests

If the Push Button and cable are suspect, the Push Button function can be
tested independently of the actual Push Button and cable.

To test the Push Short pins 18 and 36 together with a paper clip.
Button function
independently

To test the Push 1 In HARMONIE, after selecting the “LA MONT HXAT-32/64” DIO setting,
Button with the maximize the window once the waveforms are displayed.
“Test Recording” The Patient Disconnect and Push Button states can be seen on the status
bar in the lower right corner of the window.
function
2 Disconnect the amplifier to change the state of the Patient Disconnect.
3 Press the button to change the Push Button for approximately 1/3s.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-3

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

Installation
Figure D.1 Interface Card DIP Switch Location

DS1

J1

Interrupt Selection
The HXAT-32/64 interface card(s) that are supplied with an onboard
interrupt generator are shipped with IRQ5 selected, and interrupt
acknowledge (IACK) disabled. If your computer system already uses IRQ5, or
your operating system requires another IRQ, jumper J1 must be reconfigured
to select a new IRQ line. Jumper J1, positioned near the bottom left corner of
the board, selects one of the interrupt lines IRQ2 to IRQ15.
To select an IRQ, simply move the small shorting block to the location
required, as shown in Figure D.2. Only one IRQ jumper should be installed at
any one time; the IACK jumper must be removed. Table D.1 lists some of the
common uses for each IRQ line.

Table D.1 Interrupt Request Line Usage

IRQ Line Usage
0 Timer
1 Keyboard
3 Asynchronous Communications (SDLC) - COM2
4 Asynchronous Communications (Primary/RS-232) - COM1
5
6 Diskette
7 Parallel Printer
10 Mouse
14 AT Fixed Disk

Figure D.2 Interrupt Selection - HXAT 32/64

IACK 15 12 11 10 7 5 4 3

J1

D-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Installation

LA MONT HXAT-32/64 Installation

The hardware should be installed in the following order:
1 [Windows NT] Install the low level driver.
2 Set the IRQ and DS1.
3 Install the LA MONT HXAT-32/64 board.
4 Start the computer.
5 Start Hardware Setup and configure the hardware.

Windows NT To use HXAT-32/64 boards you must first install the required driver.

To install the Verify the Available Resources

LA MONT HXAT- Before installing the LA MONT board, you must check the available resources
32/64 board on on your computer.
Windows 98 1 Right-click the My Computer icon, and choose Properties from the menu
that appears.
2 Click the Device Manager tab.
3 Select Properties and look for an available IRQ number.
4 Select Memory and look for an available one.
Reserve the Resources
You should always reserve the resources for your board to ensure that no
plug and play device will use it.
5 Right-click the My Computer icon, and choose Properties from the menu
that appears.
6 Click the Device Manager tab.
7 Select an IRQ and click Add.
8 Enter the IRQ value for your LA MONT board.
9 Select Memory and click Add.
10 Enter the memory for your board.
11 Click OK until you return to the desktop.
12 Restart the computer.
• If the computer starts without any problems, there should be no conflict
with another device.
• If the computer does not start properly, you will have to change the
address you chose.
13 Shut off the computer.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-5

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

To set the You must set up the IRQ and the memory on your board after you have
LA MONT board determined that they are good settings for your computer.
address 1 The IRQ is a jumper that must be placed at the correct value.
On the side of the board is a list of IRQ values. Make sure the setting
matches the value you reserved earlier.
2 Higher up on the board, there should be a blue box containing DIP
switches.
Set the switches to correspond to the memory that you chose.
The settings for each address are listed below.

Base Address Number

0000 0
0001 1
0010 2
0011 4
0101 5
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 9
1010 A
1011 B
1100 C
1101 D
1110 E
1111 F

For example:
000D0000 = OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0
ON
1

D-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Installation

000E8000 = OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0
ON
1

To install the 1 Install the board and connect the amplifier to it.
LA MONT HXAT 2 Start the computer.
board

To install the 1 Copy the HXAT 11 folder from the LA MONT WinNT 4.0 API Driver
LA MONT Setup disk to your hard drive.
HXAT-32/64 board 2 Open the DRIVERS folder, and copy the driver to
\WINNT\system32\drivers.
onWinNT/2000
3 Copy the contents of the CPANEL foler to \WINNT\system32.
4 Open the HXAT folder and double-click lmhxat1_1.reg. (Windows needs
this registry to find the driver).
At the message that displays, click Yes. At the next message, click OK.
5 From the La Mont Drivers folder on your HARMONIE CD-ROM, run
Install.bat.
6 From the La Mont Drivers folder, double-click the following file:
• [To install HXAT 32] hxat32_a0.reg (HXAT32)
At the message that displays, click Yes. At the next message, click OK.
• [To install HXAT 64] hxat64)a0.reg (HXAT64)
At the message that displays, click Yes. At the next message, click OK.
7 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Settings > Control Panel.
At the Control Panel window, double-click the LaMont Data Acquisition
icon.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-7

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

At the LaMont Data Acquisition Devices window, click Properties.

At the Non-Pnp Properties window, specify the ISA address and

Interrupt to match the jumper settings on the adapter card. Click OK.

Restart the computer.

8 From the Control Panel window, double-click the Devices icon.
For new installations and upgrades, Lmhxatnt needs to be disabled. At the
Devices window, select Lmhxatnt and then click Startup. At the Device
window, select Disabled and then click OK.

D-8 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Installation

At the Devices window, select Lmhxat and then click Startup.

At the Device window, select Automatic and then click OK.

Run the Test Program

9 Open HXAT11\SAMPLES and then double-click TestDrv.exe.
Choose Card > Start.
If something moves, the test is OK.

Cardinal-I Installation
1 Employ appropriate ESD precautions, such as wearing a grounded wrist
strap.
2 Connect the amplifier extension cable to the 6-pin circular LEMO™ socket
on the rear panel of the computer interface card(s).
3 Connect a suitable/compliant auxiliary input cable supplied by Stellate
Systems to the 44-pin D-socket on the rear panel of the computer interface
card if additional or alternative DC-150 Hz signals are needed or desired.
4 Connect the 10 m-extension cable to the 1m amplifier cable or direct to the
amplifier, if appropriate.
5 Connect the patient amplifier with the safety jackbox system:
• Connect the LA MONT safety jackbox, using a jackbox cable with a D-
37 connector secured at the patient amplifier end, and the 45-pin, quick
release LA MONT connector at the jackbox end.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-9

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

OR
• For the LA MONT snap-on jackbox, slide the jackbox shell over the
patient amplifier body to mate the D-37 connectors, and push together
to ensure a positive fit.
6 Connect the patient safety electrodes to the patient (not supplied by LA
MONT) and to the appropriate safety jackbox jacks through the 1.5 mm
reverse-gender safety electrode connectors, using the 10/20-electrode
placement system.
7 When you are sure all connections have been correctly made, and confirm
the computer system has been connected to an approved isolation
transformer, then turn ON the computer system and start the data
acquisition software.

D-10 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Installation

LA MONT EMERALD Installation

Figure D.3 Configuration for EMERALD Controller

LAPTOP SOLD SEPERATELY

LAPTOP COMPUTER

EMERALD PCMCIA
Interface Card w/ cable
AMP-CIO-LPCMCIA
Laptop Power Supply
and Cable

Ferrite Bead

IEC-320
C EMERALD Controller
with Internal Power Supply
and Isolation transformer
Power
AMP-CIO-LEMRLD-D
Adapter Cord
CS-CBL-
PWR100KS
Hospital Grade AC cordset
CS-CBL-PWR110K

LEMO Cable P/P (10m)

AMP-CBL-L6PP-10
Accessory
Aux Input Cable
AMP-CBL-SAUX104
Kit Variations AMP
PB X1 X2 X3 X4
Lamont 16-ch EEG AMP
AMP-DEV-L016E
Accessory
Lamont 24-ch EEG AMP
Pushbutton (10m)
AMP-DEV-L024E
AMP-CBL-SPBB-10
Lamont 32-ch EEG AMP Kit Variations
AMP-DEV-L032E
Accessory
16-ch EEG Snap-On
AMP-HBX-L016EP
Accessory
24-ch EEG Snap-On
AMP-HBX-L024EP
Kit Variations Accessory Carrying Case
Jackbox Cable (3m) 32-ch EEG Snap-On AMP-XTR-SEMCASE
AMP-CBL-LHIR-03 AMP-HBX-L032EP
Jackbox Cable (1m)
AMP-CBL-LHIR-01

Kit Variations
16-ch Headbox w/ Insert Card
AMP-HBX-L016E
24-ch Headbox w/ Insert Card
AMP-HBX-L024E
32-ch Headbox w/ Insert Card
AMP-HBX-L032E

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-11

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

LA MONT EMERALD PCMCIA Interface Cards

The EMERALD Controller must be connected to an IBM AT compatible
notebook PC or equivalent PC, through a type 2 or type 3 PCMCIA port, and
use the EMERALD Interface Card and PCMCIA Connecting Cable.
There are no specific minimum requirements for the PC, other than that it
have a suitable PCMCIA port.
The EMERALD Interface Card utilizes standard PCMCIA protocols and
electrical interface. Thus, the host PC must support standard PCMCIA port
operation and must be configured to operate with the PCMCIA port. The
configuration of PCMCIA ports for general use varies with different brands
and models of PCs, so PCMCIA port configuration is not covered in this
manual. Information is provided with notebook PCs, or is available from the
PC manufacturer.
The EMERALD Controller provides power directly to the Patient Amplifier
(using a closed loop voltage correction system).

LA MONT Patient Amplifiers

The LA MONT Patient Amplifier is a stand-alone unit that receives its power
from the EMERALD Controller. All communication and isolation between the
Amplifier and the Controller is handled by the Amplifier itself through the
Amplifier Extension Cable. There is no installation procedure per se for the
Patient Amplifier.

LA MONT Amplifier Extension Cables

A ten meter Amplifier Extension Cable is provided as standard. One end of
this cable plugs directly into the mating circular LEMO socket of the
EMERALD Controller back panel. The other end of the cable mates with the
Patient Amplifier LEMO connector.
The Amplifier Extension Cable is provided to allow patient mobility, and is
normally allowed to lie on the floor of the testing area.
The following instructions assume that the host PC has been pre-configured to
operate with acquisition software. For information on how to configure the PC
under Windows 95/98 operating systems, see the Configuration section.

To install 1 Install the EMERALD Interface Card into a type 2 or type 3 PCMCIA port
in the computer system, with the card’s EMERALD label facing upwards.
The PCMCIA port must be configured in accordance with the PC
supplier’s instructions and supplied utilities in order to ensure that the
port will operate with standard memory type PCMCIA plug in modules.
2 Connect the EMERALD PCMCIA Connecting Cable between the
EMERALD Interface Card and the EMERALD Controller; into the
EMERALD Interface Card 33-way connector and the Controller 44-way D-
connector.
Note that the 33-way connector is polarized and has spring release clips
that should be fully engaged when the connector is correctly inserted.
3 Connect the power cable to the power connector of EMERALD Controllers
with internal power supply.

D-12 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Configuration

4 Connect the provided Ferrite Bead to the end of the Amplifier Extension
Cable that will be connected to the EMERALD Controller (as indicated by
the instructions provided with the Ferrite Bead).
5 Connect the Amplifier Extension Cable to the circular LEMO socket on the
EMERALD Controller back panel.
6 Connect an Auxiliary Input cable (if used) to the 37-pin D-socket on the
EMERALD Controller back panel.
7 Connect the Patient Amplifier to the far end of the Amplifier Extension
Cable.
8 Connect the Amplifier to a Jackbox:
• The LA MONT Safety Jackbox connects through a Jackbox Cable with a
D-37 connector at the amplifier end, and a 45-pin HIROSE connector at
the jackbox end.
• For the Snap-On Jackbox, slide the jackbox shell over the Patient
Amplifier body to mate the D-37 connectors, and push together firmly.
9 Connect the patient electrodes to the patient, and to the appropriate
jackbox jacks. 1.5 mm plugs are required for the Safety Jackbox.
10 Turn on the power supply for the EMERALD Controller.
The green indicator on the EMERALD Controller front panel indicates that
the power is applied.
11 Turn the computer system ON, and start the acquisition software.
Note that several parameters must be set by the configuration software
(refer to the Configuration section) before the PC can acquire the data.

Configuration
HARMONIE supports the following models of LA MONT digital data
acquisition boards: HXAT 32-ch, HXAT 64-ch, the Cardinal-I, WARATAH,
and Emerald. The HXAT 32/64, Cardinal-I, and WARATAH boards are
configured from the Hardware Setup Function.
Information is transferred between the PC and the LA MONT board through
blocks of memory. The HXAT boards use 4 Kb blocks, while the WARATAH
128–ch board uses 2 Kb blocks. A DIP switch on the board sets the base
address for this memory. If you change this DIP switch, you must also set the
Base Address field. (Usually, the base address is only changed if there is a
memory conflict). The default address is D0000.
HARMONIE requires that the LA MONT card have an onboard interrupt
generator. The HXAT 32, 64, and Waratah cards are shipped with IRQ5
selected, but if you change it to another IRQ, you must also set the IRQ
Number field. For all of these cards, the IRQ can be set to 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 11, 12,
or 15. For the Cardinal-I, the operating system automatically determines the
IRQ setting (plug-and-play).
While you record, the board stores data into a memory buffer to ensure that
some data is available while the computer is busy with other tasks. In the

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-13

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

Delay field, you can select the delay (in seconds) that is stored in the buffer. If
the time is too low, a long task (while recording) could cause a buffer
overflow interrupt. Also, remember that more memory is required as the
value increases. You do not need to select a delay for the LA MONT 128–ch
WARATAH.

LA MONT HXAT 32/64 Configuration

After you have installed the LA MONT HXAT 32/64 data acquisition board,
you must select it as your recording device, and then configure the board.

To select a 1 Start the Hardware Setup function.

LA MONT HXAT OR
32/64 data
If Hardware Setup is already started, select Devices on the menu bar.
acquisition board
The Select and Configure Devices dialog box displays.

2 Select LA MONT HXAT 32, LA MONT HXAT 64, or LA MONT 128 from
the ADC Device list.
3 Configure the device as explained below.
4 Click OK.

D-14 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Configuration

To configure the 1 At the Select and Configure Devices dialog box, click the ADC Device
LA MONT HXAT Configure button.
32-ch data [Windows 98] The La Mont HXAT32 Configuration dialog box displays.
acquisition board

Windows NT
The La Mont HXAT32(NT) Configuration dialog box displays.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-15

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

Windows 98
2 Specify the Base Address and the IRQ Number.
The base address must match the DIP Switch 1 (DS1) settting, or you will
not be able to start the hardware.
The IRQ number you select must match the Interrupt selection on the
board.
3 Select the type of amplifier you will be using from the Amplifier 1 list.
When None is selected, only the auxiliary channels are used. Since there is
no channel mapping, the Channel Mapping Setup buttons are disabled.
(Only signals that are connected to the HXAT-32 auxiliary inputs will be
recorded).
4 Under Channel Mapping use the HB1 Setup button to configure the
headbox, and use the HB2 Setup button to configure the auxiliary inputs.
In both cases, the Edit Channel Mapping dialog box displays.
For instructions, see “Working with Mapping Configurations” on
page D-24.
5 Under Oximeter Data, you can select two input channels to include them
in the channel mapping list. They are unique to the Blue/Red Diamond
models, which include pulse oximetry.
To use the oximetry inputs, your system must use the HXAT-32 interface card
Rev L or higher.
Select the Oximeter Support check box.
• To include an oxygen saturation channel, select the Oxygen Saturation
check box. Use the default channel name, or enter a new name for the
channel.
• To include a heart rate channel, select the Heart Rate check box. Use the
default channel name, or enter a new name for the channel.
The oxygen saturation and heart rate channels that you specify must be
entered as they appear in your electrode set. You must also add the
channels to your recording montage.
6 If there are existing DC inputs for oxygen saturation and heart rate
channels that are being replaced by the integrated SpO2, you must remove
these channel names from the original channel mapping.
1 To do this, under Channel Mapping, click the HB2: Auxiliary Setup
button.
2 Delete the channel label for SpO2 and Heart Rate, then click OK.
7 Click OK.

D-16 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Configuration

To configure the 1 At the Select and Configure Devices dialog box, click the ADC Device
LA MONT HXAT Configure button.
64-ch data Windows 98
acquisition board The LA MONT HXAT 64 Configuration dialog box displays.

Windows NT
The La Mont HXAT64 (NT) Configuration dialog box displays.

Windows 98
2 Specify the Base Address and the IRQ Number.
The base address must match the DIP Switch 1 (DS1) settting, or you will
not be able to start the hardware.
The IRQ number you select must match the Interrupt selection on the
board.
3 Select the type of amplifier(s) you will be using from the Amplifier 1 and/
or Amplifier 2 lists.
When None is selected, the amplifier will be disabled. The Channel
Mapping Setup button is also disabled.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-17

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

4 Under Channel Mapping, use the HB1 Setup button to configure channel
mapping for the first headbox, and use the HB2 Setup button to configure
the channel mapping for the second headbox.
In both cases, the Edit Channel Mapping dialog box displays.
For instructions, see “Working with Mapping Configurations” on
page D-24.
5 Click OK.
After you have finished configuring the data acquisition board, you should
test it. For more information on testing, see “Selecting a Recording Device” in
Chapter 1.

Cardinal-I Configuration
The Cardinal-I board is only supported in Windows 2000 sp2 and higher.
Before installing the Cardinal card, make sure all other La Mont products are
properly uninstalled.

Installation 1 Install the Cardinal board in a PCI Bus.

2 Start the system.
3 Windows will find the new hardware. Click Next.
4 Select Search for the best driver.
5 Insert the installation CD, and select the disk drive and path “LaMont
Drivers\Cardinal NT Driver V2.00” to show where is the driver is located.
6 Windows will find the file "CI.INF".
7 Click Next to install the driver.
8 Restart the system.

Lamont Driver installs

1 Device Manager in Devices \ Data Acquisition \ Cardinal I Dual or Single
Limo.
2 OEM# .INF and OEM# .PNF in C:\ WINNT \ INF directory.
3 C:\ WINNT \ System32 \ Drivers \ lmcp.sys.
4 C:\ WINNT \ System32 \ Lamontres.dll.
5 C:\ WINNT \ System32 \ Drivers \ etc \ Cardinal.cfg.
6 In the Registry, the following files will be installed:
• HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ SYSTEM \ CurrentControlSet \ Services
\ lcmp.
• HKELOCAMACHIN \ SYSTEM \ CurentControlSet \ Services \
Eventlog \ System \ lmcp.

D-18 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Configuration

Verifying the installation

On the LA MONT card, check that the last 2 LEDs that are closest to the
interface connector are lit up. If these LEDs are not lit, there is a problem with
the installation.

Clock Polarity Jumpers

The polarity of the outputs from each of the clock generators (for the 2 clock
lines), can be inverted by removing jumpers J5A for CLK2, and J5B for CLK1.
If the jumpers are left in place, then the polarity of the clock generator is not
changed.
The initial power-up state (PLD not configured) of the clock generator output
is logic '0' (0V), and the outputs remain low when the PLD is configured. One
application of the jumpers could be to prevent false triggers of external
equipment before and during PLD configuration.

LA MONT WARATAH 128 Configuration

After you have installed the WARATAH128 data acquisition board, you must
select it as your recording device, and then configure the board.

To configure the 1 At the Select and Configure Devices window, click the ADC Device
LA MONT Configure button.
WARATAH 128-ch The LA MONT WARA Configuration dialog box displays.
data acquisition
board

2 Specify the Base Address and the IRQ Number.

The base address must match the DIP Switch 1 (DS1) settting, or you will
not be able to start the hardware.
The IRQ number you select must match the Interrupt selection on the
board.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-19

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

3 Insert in Drive A the driver diskette (128 Channel Interface Card

Configuration Disk) supplied with the board.
Click Install/Update Low Level Drivers to install the necessary drivers for
the LA MONT WARATAH board.
4 Under Amplifier Type, select the amplifiers that will be connected to the
board.
If the 64-Ch EEG amplifier is selected, you must also select the the 64-Ch
EEG as the second amplifier.
No mapping is available for the 64-ch amplifier. You cannot select one
amplifier without mapping and another amplifier that uses channel
mapping.
5 To use an auxiliary channel input, select it from the Auxiliary list.
6 Channel mapping is available for 16, 24 and 32-ch EEG, and 32-ch Sleep
amplifiers. To map the channels, click the appropriate Setup button(s) in
the Channel Mapping box.
No channel mapping is available for 64 and 128-ch amplifiers.
For more information about selecting the amplifiers that will be used with
your 128-channel board, see “Amplifier Settings” on page D-23.
7 Click OK.
After you have finished configuring the data acquisition board, you should
test it.

LA MONT EMERALD Configuration

LA MONT Patient Amplifiers
The LA MONT Patient Amplifier does not have any field configurable
parameters. The Patient Amplifier is factory set to the customer requirements
for filtering and gain on each channel, and is therefore not adjustable in the
field.

LA MONT EMERALD PCMCIA Interface Cards

There are no configurable parameters for the EMERALD Interface Card, and
the card is totally transparent in operation to the host PC once the card is
inserted and the PCMCIA port is operational.

LA MONT EMERALD Controllers

The EMERALD Controller is configured entirely by the host PC, and there is
no need to directly configure any parameters in the Controller module.
The following sections explain how to change the configurable parameters for
the EMERALD Controller. The parameter settings will depend on the existing
computer configuration. Depending on the host PC operating system, some of
the following steps must be performed every time the PC is turned on (e.g.
DOS operating system). For others, the PC needs to be configured only once,
then the operating system will automatically set up the PC correctly
whenever an EMERALD DAD is connected to the PC (e.g. Windows 95/98).

D-20 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Configuration

Setting Up the Host PC

The configuration of the host PC and its PCMCIA port will depend on the
operating system being used. The following sections define the steps
necessary to set up a PC Windows 95/98 operating system.
Information is transferred to and from your PC to the EMERALD Controller
through a 4K block of memory. It is necessary to allocate to each EMERALD
Controller a 4Kb memory segment in the first 1Mb of memory address space.
Also, the PC must have an unused interrupt request line for the EMERALD
Controller, which is assigned to respond to interrupts.
The EMERALD Interface Card has a flash memory on board that contains a
default base memory and interrupt number allocation, as well as a list of
alternative memory addresses and interrupts that can be used. The flash
memory is read automatically when the Interface Card is installed, and the
operating system uses the information to set up the interrupts and memory
location to be used by the specific PCMCIA port. Third-party supplied
utilities are available for the different operating systems to change the
interrupt and memory allocation from the default settings to alternative
settings.
Due to the wide variety of laptop computers available, with a vast array of
performance characteristics, Stellate Systems cannot guarantee that the
LA MONT EMERALD is compatible with any and all laptop computers.

Windows 95/98 Operating System

Configuration only has to be done the first time the EMERALD Interface Card
is to be used. Thereafter the configuration settings are saved in the PC. If a
new version of the configuration is required, see “To uninstall EMERALD
configuration data under Windows 95/98” on page D-23.

To install the 1 Start Windows 95/98.

configuration file 2 Connect the EMERALD Interface Card to the EMERALD Controller unit,
using the cable provided.
3 Connect the EMERALD Controller to the power supply and turn it ON.
4 Insert the EMERALD Interface Card into a free PCMCIA socket. A
message will display, saying that new hardware has been found. Note that
this will only happen the first time the EMERALD Interface Card is
installed.
5 Select the Driver from disk provided by hardware manufacturer option
and click OK. A window will display, prompting for a manufacturer’s
supplied disk.
Do NOT select the “do not install any driver” option, as the system will not
prompt to load the configuration file required to run the EMERALD Interface
Card until the Windows 95/98 registry has been modified.
6 Insert the provided floppy disk containing the emerald.inf file in drive A
and click OK.
The configuration file installation is now complete.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-21

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

Configuring the Installation

• When the EMERALD Interface Card is inserted in the computer’s
PCMCIA slot, the computer should beep twice and an icon should appear
on the taskbar. (Clicking on the icon should give the option of stopping the
EMERALD installation).
• From the Control Panel, select the PC Card icon. When the card is inserted
you should see the following: “PCMCIA DAD System - Socket?”. “?” is the
socket number.
Ejecting the card should cause the display to change to: “(Empty) - Socket?”.
• To determine the address and interrupt that has been allocated, see below.
A card that has conflicting resource requests will not be displayed on the
task bar or beep when inserted.

To check 1 Insert the EMERALD Interface Card, then open the Control Panel and
resource select the System icon.
allocations 2 Click the Device Manager tab.
3 Select the + adjacent to the PCMCIA socket icon in the tree.
4 Double-click the EMERALD PCMCIA DAD System item.
5 Click the Resources tab in the EMERALD PCMCIA DAD System
Properties window.
6 Check that there are no conflicts listed in the Conflicting Device List. Also
check that your application software can use the Interrupt and Memory
allocated automatically. If there are conflicts, use the manual configuration
button to change the allocations, as required. Otherwise, deselect the Use
automatic settings check box to manually configure.

To modify 1 Clear the Use automatic settings check box.

resource 2 You can now step through the list of pre-set configurations in the Settings
allocations based on list to see whether any are suitable.
If none are suitable, select the last entry (usually 000B). This allows you to
independently modify interrupts and memory settings. Double-click the
Interrupt Request or Memory Range settings to make changes as
required.
Note that only configuration 000B will allow these alterations.
a) Be sure to check the conflicting device list when making changes.
b) Try to avoid using the C000 to C7FF address range. Conflicts at C000 to
C7FF may be experienced despite Windows reporting no conflicts.

D-22 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Amplifier Settings

To alter manually When you try to modify previously modified resources, you may find that the
allocated controls are grayed out. This can be overcome as follows:
resources under 1 Insert the EMERALD Interface Card and go to the Device Manager (as
described above).
Windows 95/98
2 Select the EMERALD PCMCIA DAD System item and click Remove.
3 Ignore the warning and click OK.
4 Eject and re-insert the EMERALD Interface Card. The software will
automatically reinstall itself from the previous copy of emerald.inf. The
resources window will be restored.

To uninstall To completely remove the EMERALD installation, the EMERALD INF file
EMERALD must be removed from the \windows\inf directory.
configuration 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 of the previous procedure, to remove EMERALD
information from the registry.
data under
2 Go to the \windows\inf directory (or \windows\inf\other, depending on
Windows 95/98 the Windows 95 version), and look for file names “oem? .inf”. “?” is a
number starting from 0.
3 If you have more than one of these files, use a text editor to open each file
to determine the one that belongs to EMERALD. The file to delete contains
a section labeled [strings], with an entry string 0 = MSI, and the next line
has string 1 = LaMont.
a) The file to be deleted is a copy of the file on the installation floppy,
“emerald.inf”. Windows 95/98 renames it when it copies the file from the
floppy disk.
b) If you are using Explorer to view the files in the \windows\inf directory,
select Options > View, and select “show all files” to ensure that the INF files
are visible.

Amplifier Settings
LA MONT WARATAH
The following must be considered when selecting the amplifier settings for
the LA MONT WARATAH 128-ch board:
• For the first amplifier, you can select a 16, 24, 32, 64, or 128-ch amplifier.
When you select a 128-ch amplifier, the remaining lists are disabled.
Similarly, when you select a 64-ch amplifier, the third and fourth
amplifiers cannot be 64-ch amplifiers.
• For the second amplifier you can select a 16, 24, 32, or 64-ch amplifier.
• For the second and third amplifiers you can select a 16, 24, or 32-ch
amplifier.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-23

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

• 128-ch and 64-ch amplifiers cannot be mapped, whereas 16, 24 and 32-ch
amplifiers must be mapped.
For more information about mapping channels, see “Working with
Mapping Configurations” below.
• When using auxiliary channel inputs, they must be set to the same state as
that of any amplifiers being used.
That is, if the other amplifiers are 64 or 128-ch amplifiers (no mapping),
then the auxiliary channel inputs cannot be mapped. If the other amplifiers
are 16, 24, or 32-ch amplifiers (mapped), then the auxiliary channel inputs
must also be mapped. If only the auxiliary channel inputs are being used,
they can be either mapped or unmapped.

Working with Mapping Configurations

Each LA MONT digital acquisition interface has a different set of inputs.
Auxiliary inputs can be used for DC signals (e.g. trigger output from a photic
stimulator, oximeter, other transducers). In addition to the 32 auxiliary
inputs, the HXAT-32 model can read one Digital Input/Output (DIO) device
(e.g. Push Button device). The HXAT-64 model has no actual auxiliary inputs;
however, it does have a DIO socket that can be used for the Push Button
device. The Cardinal-I includes 32 auxiliary inputs, can read one DIO device
(Push Button), and it also has two digital outputs which can be used either to
trigger external alarms, or to control an external photic stimulator. The 128-ch
WARATAH also enables auxiliary input channels to be used it selected. (For
more information about selecting auxiliary input channels with the 128-ch
WARATAH board, see “Amplifier Settings” on page D-23.
There are the following types of amplifiers: 16, 24, and 32-ch EEG, and 16, 24,
and 30-ch SLEEP.

D-24 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Working with Mapping Configurations

LA MONT 16/24/32-ch EEG

Headbox 1 Headbox 2
Physical Headbox Inputs HARMONIE Physical Auxiliary
Input 16-ch 24-ch 32-ch Input Input

1 - - FT9 FT9-REF 1/33 X31

2 F4 F4 F4 F4-REF 2/34 X14
3 Fp2 Fp2 Fp2 Fp2-REF 3/35 X13
4 F3 F3 F3 F3-REF 4/36 X32
5 Fp1 Fp1 Fp1 Fp1-REF 5/37 X29
6 T6/P8 T6/P8 T6/P8 T6/P8-REF 6/38 X16
7 T5/P7 T5/P7 T5/P7 T5/P7-REF 7/39 X30
8 O2 O2 O2 O2-REF 8/40 X15
9 O1 O1 O1 O1-REF 9/41 X27
10 F7 F7 F7 F7-REF 10/42 X10
11 F8 F8 F8 F8-REF 11/43 X9
12 T3/T7 T3/T7 T3/T7 T3/T7-REF 12/44 X28
13 T4/T8 T4/T8 T4/T8 T4/T8-REF 13/45 X25
14 C4 C4 C4 C4-REF 14/46 X12
15 C3 C3 C3 C3-REF 15/47 X26
16 P4 P4 P4 P4-REF 16/48 X11
17 P3 P3 P3 P3-REF 17/49 X23
18 - - Oz Oz-REF 18/50 X6
19 - Cz Cz Cz-REF 19/51 X5
20 - ECG (2-lead ECG ECG-REF 20/52 X24
bipolar)
21 - Pz Pz Pz-REF 21/53 X21
22 - - T1 T1-REF 22/54 X8
23 - - T2 T2-REF 23/55 X22
24 - Pg1 Pg1 Pg1-REF 24/56 X7
25 - Pg2 Pg2 Pg2-REF 25/57 X19
26 - A1 A1 A1-REF 26/58 X2
27 - A2 A2 A2-REF 27/59 X1
28 - - Fpz Fpz-REF 28/60 X20
29 - Fz Fz Fz-REF 29/61 X17
30 - - AUX AUX-REF 30/62 X4
31 - - ECG-(HX1) a ECGn-REF 31/63 X18
32 - - FT10 FT10-REF 32/64 X3

a. Labelled as X1, X2 on the Patient Amplifier, these are NOT the AUX-IN channels X1 and X2.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-25

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

Input channels from a headbox are read into the data acquisition board
according to the predefined mapping for the headbox type. You cannot
change the mapping itself, but you can change the names of the electrodes
in the mapping configuration.
For example, Input 12 of the 32-ch EEG headbox receives the signal from the
T7 electrode. You cannot select a different electrode for this channel, but you
can rename T7 as T3 if you want.
The name of an input channel (e.g. T3-REF) includes the names of both
electrodes (G1 and G2). The input name is very important because you must use
exactly the same name for the corresponding channel in the recording montage.

D-26 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Working with Mapping Configurations

LA MONT 16/24/32-ch SLP2

Headbox 1 Headbox 2
Physical Headbox Inputs HARMONIE Physical Auxiliary
Input 16-ch 24-ch 32-ch Input Input

1 - - - - 1/33 X31
2 C4 C4 C4 C4-Pz 2/34 X14
3 - - F4 F4-Pz 3/35 X13
4 - - F3 F3-Pz 4/36 X32
5 - Fp1 Fp1 Fp1-Pz 5/37 X29
6 A2 A2 A2 A2-Pz 6/38 X16
7 - T5/P7 T5/P7 T5-Pz/P7-Pz 7/39 X30
8 - - F8 F8-Pz 8/40 X15
9 O1 O1 O1 O1-Pz 9/41 X27
10 - - F7 F7-Pz 10/42 X10
11 - T4/T8 T4/T8 T4-Pz/T8-Pz 11/43 X9
12 - T5/T7 T5/T7 T5-Pz/T7-Pz 12/44 X28
13 - T6/P8 T6/P8 T6-Pz/P8-Pz 13/45 X25
14 - - P4 P4-Pz 14/46 X12
15 C3 C3 C3 C3-Pz 15/47 X26
16 O2 O2 O2 O2-Pz 16/48 X11
17 - - P3 P3-Pz 17/49 X23
18 Rsp4, REF Rsp4, REF Rsp4, REF Rsp4-REF 18/50 X6
19 Rsp2, REF Rsp2, REF Rsp2, REF Rsp2-REF 19/51 X5
20 ECG+, ECG- ECG+, ECG- ECG+, ECG- ECG 20/52 X24
21 EMG1+, EMG1- EMG1+, EMG1- EMG1+, EMG1- EMG1 21/53 X21
22 - - - - 22/54 X8
23 - Cz Cz Cz-Pz 23/55 X22
24 LOC LOC LOC LOC-Pz 24/56 X7
25 ROC ROC ROC ROC-Pz 25/57 X19
26 A1 A1 A1 A1-Pz 26/58 X2
27 - Fz Fz Fz-Pz 27/59 X1
28 Rsp3, REF Rsp3, REF Rsp3, REF Rsp3-REF 28/60 X20
29 Rsp1, REF Rsp1, REF Rsp1, REF Rsp1-REF 29/61 X17
30 EMG2+, EMG2- EMG2+, EMG2- EMG2+, EMG2- EMG2 30/62 X4
31 - Fp2 Fp2 Fp2-Pz 31/63 X18
32 EMG3+, EMG3- EMG3+, EMG3- EMG3+, EMG3- EMG3 32/64 X3

Note that the Pz input is used as the EEG reference.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-27

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

LA MONT 64-ch EEG

Physical Input Group A (1-32) HARMONIE Group B (33-64) HARMONIE

1 A1 A1-REFA B33 B33-REFB
2 A25 A25-REFA B57 B57-REFB
3 A27 A27-REFA B59 B59-REFB
4 A26 A26-REFA B58 B58-REFB
5 A28 A28-REFA B60 B60-REFB
6 A29 A29-REFA B61 B61-REFB
7 A30 A30-REFA B62 B62-REFB
8 A24 A24-REFA B56 B56-REFB
9 A23 A23-REFA B55 B55-REFB
10 A19 A19-REFA B51 B51-REFB
11 A20 A20-REFA B52 B52-REFB
12 A18 A18-REFA B50 B50-REFB
13 A17 A17-REFA B49 B49-REFB
14 A32 A32-REFA B64 B64-REFB
15 A31 A31-REFA B63 B63-REFB
16 A22 A22-REFA B54 B54-REFB
17 A21 A21-REFA B53 B53-REFB
18 A5 A5-REFA B37 B37-REFB
19 A8 A8-REFA B40 B40-REFB
20 A6 A6-REFA B38 B38-REFB
21 A2 A2-REFA B34 B34-REFB
22 A15 A15-REFA B47 B47-REFB
23 A16 A16-REFA B48 B48-REFB
24 A9 A9-REFA B41 B41-REFB
25 A12 A12-REFA B44 B44-REFB
26 A13 A13-REFA B45 B45-REFB
27 A14 A14-REFA B46 B46-REFB
28 A10 A10-REFA B42 B42-REFB
29 A11 A11-REFA B43 B43-REFB
30 A4 A4-REFA B36 B36-REFB
31 A7 A7-REFA B39 B39-REFB
32 A3 A3-REFA B35 B35-REFB

D-28 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Working with Mapping Configurations

LA MONT 2x32 and 4x32 Channel Mapping

LA MONT 2x32-ch

Physical Bank A Bank B

Input
Headbox Snap-On HARMONIE Headbox Snap-On HARMONIE
Inputs Labels Inputs Labels
1 29 FT9 FT9-REF 61 x61 x61-REF
2 2 F4 F4-REF 34 x34 x34-REF
3 1 Fp2 Fp2-REF 33 x33 x33-REF
4 20 F3 F3-REF 52 x52 x52-REF
5 19 Fp1 Fp1-REF 51 x51 x51-REF
6 8 T6/P8 P8-REF 40 x40 x40-REF
7 26 T5/P7 P7-REF 58 x58 x58-REF
8 5 O2 O2-REF 37 x37 x37-REF
9 23 O1 O1-REF 55 x55 x55-REF
10 24 F7 F7-REF 56 x56 x56-REF
11 6 F8 F8-REF 38 x38 x38-REF
12 25 T3/T7 T7-REF 57 x57 x57-REF
13 7 T4/T8 T8-REF 39 x39 x39-REF
14 3 C4 C4-REF 35 x35 x35-REF
15 21 C3 C3-REF 53 x53 x53-REF
16 4 P4 P4-REF 36 x36 x36-REF
17 22 P3 P3-REF 54 x54 x54-REF
18 15 Oz Oz-REF 47 x47 x47-REF
19 13 Cz Cz-REF 45 x45 x45-REF
20 16 ECG+ ECGp-REF 48 x48 x48-REF
21 14 Pz Pz-REF 46 x46 x46-REF
22 28 T1 T1-REF 60 x60 x60-REF
23 10 T2 T2-REF 42 x42 x42-REF
24 31 Pg1 Pg1-REF 63 x63 x63-REF
25 32 Pg2 Pg2-REF 64 x64 x64-REF
26 27 A1 A1-REF 59 x59 x59-REF
27 9 A2 A2-REF 41 x41 x41-REF
28 11 Fpz Fpz-REF 43 x43 x43-REF
29 12 Fz Fz-REF 44 x44 x44-REF
30 18 AUX AUX-REF 50 x50 x50-REF
31 17 ECG- ECGn-REF 49 x49 x49-REF
32 30 FT10 FT10-REF 62 x62 x62-REF

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-29

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

LA MONT 4x32-ch

Physical Bank A Bank B

Inputs
Jackbox Snap-On HARMONIE Jackbox Snap-On HARMONIE
Inputs Labels Inputs Labels
1 29 Sp1 Sp1-REF 61 Iz Iz-REF
2 2 F4 F4-REF 34 AF3 AF3-REF
3 1 Fp2 Fp2-REF 33 AF7 AF7-REF
4 20 F3 F3-REF 52 P5 P5-REF
5 19 Fp1 Fp1-REF 51 P9 P9-REF
6 8 T6/P8 P8-REF 40 FC5 FC5-REF
7 26 T5/P7 P7-REF 58 FCz FCz-REF
8 5 O2 O2-REF 37 F1 F1-REF
9 23 O1 O1-REF 55 PO3 PO3-REF
10 24 F7 F7-REF 56 Nz Nz-REF
11 6 F8 F8-REF 38 FT9 FT9-REF
12 25 T3/T7 T7-REF 57 AFz AFz-REF
13 7 T4/T8 T8-REF 39 FT7 FT7-REF
14 3 C4 C4-REF 35 F9 F9-REF
15 21 C3 C3-REF 53 P1 P1-REF
16 4 P4 P4-REF 36 F5 F5-REF
17 22 P3 P3-REF 54 PO7 PO7-REF
18 15 Oz Oz-REF 47 TP7 TP7-REF
19 13 Cz Cz-REF 45 C1 C1-REF
20 16 ECG+ ECGp-REF 48 CP5 CP5-REF
21 14 Pz Pz-REF 46 TP9 TP9-REF
22 28 T1 T1-REF 60 POz POz-REF
23 10 T2 T2-REF 42 FC1 FC1-REF
24 31 Pg1 Pg1-REF 63 x63 x63-REF
25 32 Pg2 Pg2-REF 64 x64 x64-REF
26 27 A1 A1-REF 59 CPz CPz-REF
27 9 A2 A2-REF 41 FC3 FC3-REF
28 11 Fpz Fpz-REF 43 T9 T9-REF
29 12 Fz Fz-REF 44 C5 C5-REF
30 18 AUX AUX-REF 50 CP1 CP1-REF
31 17 ECG- ECGn-REF 49 CP3 CP3-REF
32 30 Sp2 Sp2-REF 62 x62 x62-REF

D-30 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Working with Mapping Configurations

Physical Bank C Bank D

Inputs Jackbox Snap-On HARMONIE Jackbox Snap-On HARMONIE
Inputs Labels Inputs Labels
1 93 x93 x93-REF 125 x125 x125-REF
2 66 AF8 AF8-REF 98 x98 x98-REF
3 65 AF4 AF4-REF 97 x97 x97-REF
4 84 P6 P6-REF 116 x116 x116-REF
5 83 P2 P2-REF 115 x115 x115-REF
6 72 FC6 FC6-REF 104 x104 x104-REF
7 90 x90 x90-REF 122 x122 x122-REF
8 69 F10 F10-REF 101 x101 x101-REF
9 87 PO8 PO8-REF 119 x119 x119-REF
10 88 x88 x88-REF 120 x120 x120-REF
11 70 FC2 FC2-REF 102 x102 x102-REF
12 89 x89 x89-REF 121 x121 x121-REF
13 71 FC4 FC4-REF 103 x103 x103-REF
14 67 F2 F2-REF 99 x99 x99-REF
15 85 P10 P10-REF 117 x117 x117-REF
16 68 F6 F6-REF 100 x100 x100-REF
17 86 PO4 PO4-REF 118 x118 x118-REF
18 79 CP4 CP4-REF 111 x111 x111-REF
19 77 T10 T10-REF 109 x109 x109-REF
20 80 CP6 CP6-REF 112 x112 x112-REF
21 78 CP2 CP2-REF 110 x110 x110-REF
22 92 x92 x92-REF 124 x124 x124-REF
23 74 FT10 FT10-REF 106 x106 x106-REF
24 95 x95 x95-REF 127 x127 x127-REF
25 96 x96 x96-REF 128 x128 x128-REF
26 91 x91 x91-REF 123 x123 x123-REF
27 73 FT8 FT8-REF 105 x105 x105-REF
28 75 C2 C2-REF 107 x107 x107-REF
29 76 C6 C6-REF 108 x108 x108-REF
30 82 TP10 TP10-REF 114 x114 x114-REF
31 81 TP8 TP8-REF 113 x113 x113-REF
32 94 x94 x94-REF 126 x126 x126-REF

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-31

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

Using Channel Mapping

When using channel mapping, you must configure the headboxes that will be
used with the digital acquisition board. To configure a headbox, you must
map it using the Edit Channel Mapping dialog box.
It is necessary to configure two mappings: one for all of the AC inputs, and
one for the DC inputs. Default mapping configurations are provided for both.
Initially, you must use these default mappings since they are used by the
computer to determine where to get information for a specific channel in your
montage.
Each grid corresponds to an input in your headbox. Once the mapping is
completed, HARMONIE only refers to the labels used in the mapping. You
can modify some labels if the nomenclature you use is slightly different for
some entries.
The default mapping configuration for each of the four headbox types and the 32
auxiliary inputs are listed in Table 1 and Table 2. These five configurations are
available in the Edit Channel Mapping dialog box.
For example, you are using the HXAT-32 model with one 32-ch EEG headbox
and one auxiliary input (for the trigger output from a photic stimulator). You
select the 32-ch EEG mapping configuration for the first headbox (HB1) and
the Auxiliary mapping configuration for HB2.
The Edit Channel Mapping dialog box is also used to edit mapping
configurations. After you edit a mapping configuration, you can save it with
the same name or you can use the Save As button to create a new copy with
the changes.
For example, you are using the first auxiliary input for the trigger output
from a photic stimulator. In the Auxiliary mapping configuration, the first
auxiliary input (X1) is received by Input 27. You change the name of Input 27
to PHOT (in the G1 field) and then click Save to save the change to the
existing Auxiliary mapping configuration.
Stellate Systems sells a cable named the LA MONT Auxiliary Inputs Cable. This
cable includes connectors for the first four auxiliary inputs: X1, X2, X3, and X4. If
you are using this cable, you can rename the inputs by changing Input 27 for X1,
Input 26 for X2, Input 32 for X3, and Input 30 for X4.

D-32 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Working with Mapping Configurations

No Channel Mapping
When there is no channel mapping, the order of channels in the recording
montage must reflect the order/mapping of the physical electrodes on the
EEG device acquiring the EEG data.
For the HXAT-32, the auxiliary inputs are reorganized into sequential order.
Therefore, the first auxiliary input (X1) is received by Input 1, the second
auxiliary input (X2) is received by Input 2, etc.

About the G2 Field

The reference name used in the mapping configurations can also be changed,
but you still must use the correct electrode input on the headbox.
For example, you are using the “32-ch SLEEP” mapping configuration for the
first headbox (HB1). Many of the referential input channels use Pz. This
means that you must connect the reference electrode to the input labelled Pz
on the headbox card (i.e. jackbox card) even if you are not using the name Pz
as the reference. Therefore, changing the G2 field of the input names from Pz
to REF (in the mapping configuration) does not change the electrode that you
must physically use.
You may want to change all of the reference names for a mapping configuration
at the same time. For example, the 32-ch EEG mapping configuration uses REF
for all of the reference names. You can change all of the names to REF1 by
entering REF1 in the Reference field, and then the clicking Set All G2 Inputs
button.

To configure a 1 [HXAT 16/32/64-ch] At the LA MONT HXAT Configuration dialog box,

headbox click the HB1 or HB2 Setup button.
The AC mapping is put in HB1, and the DC mapping is put in HB2.
OR
[128-ch WARATAH] At the LA MONT WARA Configuration dialog box,
select the amplifiers you want to use, and click the corresponding Setup
button.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-33

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

The Edit Channel Mapping dialog box displays.

2 To configure headbox HB1, you must select a mapping configuration from

the Name list.
The type of amplifier (EEG or Sleep) and the amount of channels (16, 24,
30, 32) determine the mapping you choose.
OR
To configure headbox HB2, you must select Auxiliary from the Name list.
(This is the only available mapping for the DC inputs).
3 If you do not want to change the input names, click OK to return to the LA
MONT HXAT Configuration dialog box.
4 Otherwise, click Save As.
The Channel Mapping Name dialog box displays.
5 Enter a name, and click OK.
6 Edit the names in the G1 and G2 fields.
(It is recommended that you do not change the G2 entry).
Electrode names in HARMONIE can use a maximum of four characters.
Avoid using spaces because you may forget to add the space when you
create the electrode set later (e.g. use Fp1 instead of Fp 1).
Remember that you cannot switch channels (e.g. move F4 to where Fp2 is
and vice versa), or add channels to the blank inputs (e.g. add Fpz-REF to
Input 28 of the 24-ch EEG mapping configuration). You can only edit
electrode names (e.g. change Pg1 to Zyg1).
7 After you edit a mapping configuration, click Save.
8 Click OK to exit the dialog box.

D-34 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Working with Mapping Configurations

The displayed mapping configuration is used to configure the chosen

headbox when you click OK.
If you add channels to the blank inputs in a mapping configuration, they will be
ignored. For example, if you add Fpz-REF to Input 28 of the 24-ch EEG mapping
configuration and use the 24-ch EEG headbox, you cannot use Fpz-REF in the
recording montage.
Before you can record using the LA MONT data acquisition board, you must
add an electrode set and recording montage that correspond to the new board
configuration. For more information, see “Creating the Electrode Set and
Recording Montage” below.

Creating the Electrode Set and Recording Montage

For most EEG devices, the recording montage must reflect how EEG data
enters the computer, because the order of the channels cannot be changed by
the software. An exception to this rule are the LA MONT ADC boards. For
these board, you can create a recording montage with channels in any order.
This is only possible when the channel names in the recording montage
exactly match the input names in the selected mapping configurations.
You create a recording montage by selecting electrodes from the electrode set.
Therefore, to add the correct channel names, the electrode names in the
electrode set must exactly match the electrode names in the selected mapping
configurations.
For example, Input 24 of the 32-ch EEG mapping configuration is Pg1-REF.
This means the G1 field is Pg1 and the G2 field is REF. To add the Pg1-REF
channel to the recording montage, the electrode set must include Pg1 and
REF.
For example, Input 20 of the default 32-ch SLEEP mapping configuration is
ECG. In Hardware Setup, you change ECG to EKG (and save the change).
This means the G1 field is EKG and the G2 field is blank. After you add EKG
to the electrode set, you can add the channel to the recording montage. To do
this, select EKG as the first electrode and select Void to clear the second
electrode.

To record using 1 Configure the board as described in this appendix.

the LA MONT 2 In HARMONIE, create an electrode set.
ADC board Add electrodes using names that exactly match the electrode names in the
selected mapping configurations. (The names are not case sensitive. For
example, Zyg1 is the same as ZYG1).
3 Create a recording montage using the electrode set.
Add channels that match the input names in the selected mapping
configurations. That is, the first electrode must be the same as the G1 field
and the second electrode (if used) must be the same as the G2 field.
Remember to select the appropriate channel type (e.g. EEG, EKG, EMG,
PHOT).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-35

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

4 Start the Recorder. (For more information, see “Starting the Recorder” on
page 7-5).
When you record a calibration file, the recording montage is tested. If a
channel name does not have a matching input name, an error message
displays.
For more information on electrode sets and montages, see “Creating
Electrode Sets and Montages” on page 4-16.

Electrode Set Example

You are using the HXAT-32 model with one 32-ch EEG headbox and one
auxiliary input (for the trigger output from a photic stimulator). You select
the 32-ch EEG mapping configuration for the first headbox (HB1) and the
Auxiliary mapping configuration for HB2.
You select the 32-ch EEG mapping configuration without making any
changes. In the Auxiliary mapping configuration, you change the name of
Input 27 from X1 to PHOT and then click Save.
In HARMONIE, you create a new electrode set. You click Add All to add the
27 standard electrodes. Nineteen of these electrodes already match electrodes
in the 32-ch EEG mapping configuration.
In the electrode set, you make the following modifications:
• Change T3 to T7
• Change T4 to T8
• Change T5 to P7
• Change T6 to P8
• Add FT9
• Add FT10
• Add ECGp
• Add ECGn
• Add T1
• Add T2
• Add Pg1
• Add Pg2
• Add AUX
• Add PHOT for the auxiliary input
• Add REF for the reference
• Delete Eogl, Eogr, Sp1, and Sp2
The electrode set now has 34 electrodes. You can use this electrode set to
create the recording montage for any subset of the channels read by the LA
MONT data acquisition board.

D-36 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Working with Mapping Configurations

Gain and Filter Settings

One of the methods for an EEG device calibration is to enter gain (and offset)
values for each channel. The gain values for the LA MONT data acquisition
boards are shown below.

Table D.2 LA MONT HXAT 16/24/32-ch EEG

Channel Type Gain High-Pass Low-Pass
EEG 4000x 0.5 Hz 70 Hz
ECG 1000x 0.5 Hz 70 Hz

Table D.3 LA MONT HXAT 16/24/32-ch SLP2

Channel Type Gain High-Pass Low-Pass
EEG 4000x 0.5 Hz 70 Hz
ECG 1000x 1.0 Hz 100 Hz
EMG 1000x 5.0 Hz 100 Hz
EOG 1000x 0.1 Hz 70 Hz
Resp 1000x 0.1 Hz 70 Hz

The LA MONT Blue Diamond includes an integrated Pulse Oximeter, which

provides two extra channels (SpO2 and Heart Rate).

Table D.4
Channel Type Gain (HXAT 64-ch) Gain 128–ch WARATAH
EEG 4000x 2000x
ECG 1000x 500x
EMG 1000x 500x
EOG 1000x 500x
Resp 1000x 500x

For more information on entering calibration factors, see “Calibrating

Signals” on page 7-10.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide D-37

Appendix D: LA MONT Data Acquisition Boards

D-38 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

APPENDIX E: Photic Stimulator

This appendix describes the two photic stimulator interfaces supported by

HARMONIE.
This appendix includes:
• PCI-6601
• PC-TIO-10
• HPS95
• Programming

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide E-1

Appendix E: Photic Stimulator

PCI-6601 I/O Card

PCI-6601 Specifications
The PCI-6601 interface can be used on machines running Windows 98, NT, or
2000.
Figure E.1 PCI-6601 Connections

A/D Card
Sync Out Monitor
(1' Cable)

PCI-6601 I/O Card Sync Out

(3' Cable)

Computer

PCI-6601Cable

The Sync Out BNC on the 3' cable is used to

control the flashing of the lamp via the Sync In BNC
on the Photic Stimulator. The signal pulse width is
about 1 ms.

The External Monitor BNC on the 1' cable is used

to deliver a pulse coincident with the Sync Out
pulse. The signal pulse width is about 12 ms. This
signal can be connected to one of the inputs on the
A/D card to monitor the triggering of the flash lamp. External
Sync In
Alternatively, the External Monitor BNC on the Monitor
Photic Stimulator can be used for the same
purpose. Photic Stimulator

E-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 PCI-6601 I/O Card

PCI-6601 Installation and Configuration

Applies to Windows 98, Windows NT, and Windows 2000 for NI drivers 6.6 and
6.7.
The NI card should be installed at system restart, after running the NI Drivers
Setup program.

To install the 1 Run the NI Setup program. Use the default destination folder.
PCI-6601 2 Setup will prompt you to restart the computer. Do not remove the driver
CD-ROM.
3 Before the system starts, turn it off. Install the card and turn the system on.
Setup will continue automatically after the system starts.
4 Do not install the NI documentation installation.
5 Setup will run the Measurement & Automation applet. Make sure that
PCI-6934E is present in the list.

To configure the 1 Close all windows.

PCI-6601 2 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Programs > Stellate HARMONIE
> Hardware Setup.
3 From the Photic Device list, select National Instruments PCI-6601.
4 Click Configure to make sure the Device ID is the same as the NI-DAQ
device number used in Step 5 of the PCI-6601 setup.
5 Click OK in both open windows.
6 Finally, test the photic stimulator by clicking the Photic icon in the
Hardware Setup window.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide E-3

Appendix E: Photic Stimulator

PC-TIO-10 I/O Card

The PC-TIO-10 I/O card has been discontinued.

PC-TIO-10 Specifications
The PC-TIO-10 interface can be used with machines running Windows 95/98
or NT. The hardware installation is the same in both cases. However,
installing the accompanying software differs for each operating system.
Figure E.2 PC-TIO-10 Connections

A/D Card
External Monitor
(1' Cable)

PC-TIO-10 I/O Card Sync Out

(3' Cable)

Computer

PC-TIO-10 Cable

The Sync Out BNC on the 3' cable is used to

control the flashing of the lamp via the Sync In BNC
on the Photic Stimulator. The signal pulse width is
about 20 uS.

The External Monitor BNC on the 1' cable is used

to deliver a pulse coincident with the Sync Out
pulse. The signal pulse width is about 12 ms. This
signal can be connected to one of the inputs on the
A/D card to monitor the triggering of the flash lamp. External
Sync In
Alternatively, the External Monitor BNC on the Monitor
Photic Stimulator can be used for the same
purpose. Photic Stimulator

E-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 PC-TIO-10 I/O Card

Windows NT Hardware and Software Installation

Hardware Installation

To install the 1 On the PC-TIO-10 card, change the Interrupt Request (IRQ) setting to use
hardware no IRQ.
For instruction see the DAQ PC-TIO-10 User Manual Chapter Two, pages
4 and 5.
2 No other modifications are required. Use the default settings:

Base Address: 01A0-01A7

DMA: NONE
IRQ: NONE

3 Turn off the computer and install the PC-TIO-10.

Operating Systems
• Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 4

Software Installation
You must install the necessary drivers on your system, and configure the
accompanying utilities before you can use the PC-TIO-10 interface.

To install the 1 You must log on as ADMINISTRATOR to install the NI-DAQ software.
software 2 Insert the NI-DAQ Data Acquisition Driver Software version 6.1
CD-ROM, into the CD-ROM drive (Auto Run Installation).
3 Click Install NI-DAQ.
4 Accept the proposed default directory {NI-DAQ Drivers files (Minimal
install)}, or click Browse to select another directory. Then click Next.
5 Accept the proposed program manager group by clicking Next.
6 Click Next to install the software.
7 Click OK to restart the computer.
When the computer has restarted, you can remove the CD-ROM. Store it in
a secure location.
8 Log on to your system as ADMINISTRATOR to continue with the
configuration.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide E-5

Appendix E: Photic Stimulator

System Configuration
1 Make sure you are logged as ADMINISTRATOR before you start
configuring the photic card.
2 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Programs > National Instruments
DAQ > NI- DAQ Configuration Utility.
3 At the NI-DAQ Configuration Utility window, click Add.
4 Select PC-TIO-10 Hardware from the list.
By default, the Device Number is 1. This is the correct value.
5 Click Modify.
6 At the Edit Input/Output Range window, press the DOWN ARROW key
to select 0x1A0-0x1A7. Click OK.
7 At the System window, click Next.
8 At the Accessory window, select None. Then click Finish.
9 Run the Test Panel.
10 From the Test Panel window, click Start to start the test. There must not be
any errors displayed.
If any errors occur, call Stellate Technical Support.
11 Close all the windows.
The PC-TIO-10 can now be configured using HARMONIE’s Hardware
Setup.

Windows 95/98 Hardware and Software Installation

Hardware Installation

To install the 1 On the PC-TIO-10 card, change the Interrupt Request (IRQ) setting to use
hardware no IRQ.
For instruction see the DAQ PC-TIO-10 User Manual Chapter Two, pages
4 and 5.
2 No other modifications are required. Use the default settings:

Base Address: 01A0-01A7

DMA: NONE
IRQ: NONE

3 Turn off the computer and install the PC-TIO-10.

E-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 PC-TIO-10 I/O Card

Operating Systems
• Windows 95 Version 4.50 950B or higher
• Windows 98 Version 4.10.1998

Software Installation

To install the 1 Insert the NI-DAQ Data Acquisition Driver Software version 6.1 CD-
software ROM, into the CD-ROM drive (Auto Run Installation).
2 Click Install NI-DAQ.
3 Accept the proposed default directory {NI-DAQ Drivers files (Minimal
install)}, or click Browse to select another directory. Then click Next.
4 Accept the proposed program manager group by clicking Next.
5 Click Next to install the software.
6 Click OK to restart the computer.
7 When the computer has restarted, you can remove the CD-ROM. Store it in
a secure location.

System Configuration

To configure the 1 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Settings > Control Panel.
hardware 2 Double-click the Add New Hardware icon.
3 At the two windows that follow, click Next.
4 Select No, I want to select the Hardware from a list. Then click Next.
5 From the list of hardware types, select Data Acquisition Devices. Click
Next.
6 Scroll down the list of modules and select the PC-TIO-10. Click Next.
7 The Add New Hardware Wizard window displays the default settings for
the selected hardware. You will change this setting after you have finished
with the installation wizard. Click Next.
8 Click Next again, and then click No when the program prompts you to
shut down the computer.
9 At the Control Panel window, double-click the System icon.
10 Choose Device Manager Tab > Data Acquisition Device > PC-TIO-10.
Then click Properties.
11 At the PC-TIO-10 Properties window, select from the list the Basic
Configuration that does not use an IRQ (i.e. the list of Resources should
not contain a line starting with “Interrupt Request”).
Note the basic configuration number you have selected. You will need to
enter this number when you configure the HARMONIE hardware setup.
12 Click Change Setting. From the Value list, select 01A0-01A7.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide E-7

Appendix E: Photic Stimulator

13 Click OK on all the windows to accept the change. Then click Yes to shut
down the computer.

To configure the 1 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Programs > National Instruments
interface DAQ > NI-DAQ Configuration Utility.
2 Click Configure. At the next window, click Run Test Panels.
3 At the next window, click Yes.
4 At the Test Panel screen, click Start to begin the test. Nothing will appear
to happen since this is an internal test.
5 Click Close.
6 Click OK to close the Configuration Device 1: PC-TIO-10 window.
7 At the Niconfig.daq NI-DAQ Configuration Utility window, choose File
> Save. Then choose File > Exit.
The PC-TIO-10 can now be configured using HARMONIE’s Hardware
Setup.

PC-TIO-10 Configuration
The HARMONIE configuration is the same for Windows NT and Windows
95/98.

To configure the 1 Close all windows.

PC-TIO-10 2 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Programs > Stellate HARMONIE
> Hardware Setup.
3 From the Photic Device list, select National Instruments PC-TIO-10.
4 Click Configure to make sure the Device ID is the same as the Basic
Configuration number used in Step 10 of the PC-TIO-10 setup.
5 Click OK in both open windows.
6 Finally, test the photic stimulator by clicking the Photic icon in the
Hardware Setup window.

HPS95 I/O Card

The HPS95 I/O card has been discontinued.

Description of the Two Modes

The HPS95 Interface is designed to be used in conjunction with the
HARMONIE digital EEG software package to control an external photic
stimulator during an EEG recording. It can be used in one of two modes.

E-8 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 HPS95 I/O Card

MODE 1: Computer Control of Flash Rate

In this mode, the unit can provide electrical pulses (either 5V, 10V or 15V
amplitude, jumper-selected) compatible with the “Synchronous Input”
available on most commercial flash lamps. The pulse rate is fully
programmable by the user in HARMONIE, from 0 Hz to 63 Hz, in 1 Hz steps.
The computer sends commands to the HPS95, through the computer’s printer
port, or through the 8-bit digital I/O port available on some acquisition
devices. With each flash, the HPS95 generates pulses that are available as
separate analog signals (either 0-5 V or 0-0.5 V) for optional digitizing by the
host system (pulse duration is fixed at 12 ms).

MODE 2: Stimulator Control of Flash Rate

In this mode, the unit can accept the short “Synchronous Output” trigger
pulses provided by an external photic stimulator (TTL levels: 0-5V), and
“stretch” these pulses to a fixed length of 12 ms. The longer pulse length
enables HARMONIE to effectively digitize both the EEG, and the trigger
channels at a rate of 128 Hz or more, without missing any triggers.
Figure E.3 HPS95 Specifications

PHOINP TTL input from photic stimulator

PHOINP PHOTICS DPULSE APULSE RESET PHOTICS Synch output to photic stimulator
(0-5, 10, 15V - jumper selected)
POWER
DPULSE TTL synch output
(0-5V, 12 ms)

APULSE Analog synch output

PARALLEL PORT (0-0.5V, 12 ms)

RESET Push-button to reset interface

POWER Connector for DC power supply

DATA
MUL
DATA LED synchronous with photic
TIM Electromed Inc.
flash
PHOTIC STIMULATOR
INTERFACE

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide E-9

Appendix E: Photic Stimulator

Digital Input from PC 8 bit I/O, using either standard printer port or any
digital I/O port
PHOINP (Input) Input from photic stimulator (TTL 0-5 V)
PHOTICS (Output) Output to photic stimulator (100 µS,
0-5, 10 or 15V, jumper selected)
DPULSE (Output) Digital Output: TTL 0-5 V
APULSE (Output) Analog Output: 0-0.5 V
Pulse Rates 0.5-63.5 Hz, in ½ Hz steps (only 1 Hz steps are used
by HARMONIE)
Power 117 or 235 VAC
Dimensions 20 cm (W) x 6.5 cm (H) x 16 cm (D)
Weight 0.5 Kg (1 lb)

Connections for MODE 1: Computer Control of Flash

Rate
• PHOINP: Not used
• PHOTICS: Connected to “SYNCHRONOUS INPUT” on external photic
stimulator
• DPULSE: Connected to external devices accepting TTL inputs (optional)
• APULSE: Connected to one of the A/D inputs to digitize the trigger pulses
• PARALLEL: Connected to the printer port of the PC (LPT1 or LPT2)

E-10 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 HPS95 I/O Card

Figure E.4 Mode 1

PHOINP PHOTICS DPULSE APULSE RESET

POWER

12 ms, 0-0.5V
A/D Card
PARALLEL PORT analog pulses to one of the A/D inputs

Control of flash rate through

the computer's printer port

Desktop computer
TTL
PHOTIC STIMULATOR
SYNCH
OUT

TTL
SYNCH
IN
To Lamp

MODE 1 - Control of photic flash by the computer

Connections for MODE 2: Stimulator Control of Flash

Rate
• PHOINP: Connected to “SYNCHRONOUS OUTPUT” on external photic
stimulator
• PHOTICS: Not used
• DPULSE: Connected to external devices accepting TTL inputs (optional)
• APULSE: Connected to one of the A/D inputs to digitize the trigger pulse
• PARALLEL: Not used

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide E-11

Appendix E: Photic Stimulator

Figure E.5 Mode 2

PHOINP PHOTICS DPULSE APULSE RESET

POWER

PARALLEL PORT

12 ms, 0 - 0.5V A/D Card

analog pulses to one of the A/D inputs

TTL
PHOTIC STIMULATOR
SYNCH
OUT

TTL
SYNCH
IN
To Lamp
Desktop computer

MODE 2 - Control of photic flash by external stimulator

HPS95 Configuration
To configure the 1 In the Select and Configure Devices dialog box, click the Photic Device
HPS95 Configure button.
The HPS95 Configuration dialog box displays.

2 From the Printer Port list, select the correct port.

If you have a second printer port (e.g. LPT2), you should use it for the
HPS95 Interface. (The first port can be used for the hardware key).
3 Click OK.

E-12 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 HPS95 I/O Card

A warning message displays.

4 Click OK.
A network printer cannot be mapped to the same port as the HPS95 Photic
Stimulator Interface (e.g. LPT1).
Your system may be configured to capture and send output from your printer
port to a network printer (i.e. the network printer is mapped to the port).
However, you cannot use the HPS95 Interface if it is connected to this port. In
this case, you must temporarily disable the mapping before you use the photic
stimulator. To do this, display the Properties window for the printer and then
click End Capture.

Programming
Reset State
In the Reset State, the HPS95 ignores any characters it receives from the 8-bit
parallel port. This is the default state after the HPS95 is:
• Powered on
• Reset, by pressing the RESET button on the HPS95’s back panel
• Reset, after receiving the code “0” on the parallel port (i.e. <bits 7-0> all 0)
The HPS95 switches to Tracking State only when the characters ^P and ^S
(ASCII 16 and 19) are received consecutively.

Tracking State
In the Tracking State, the HPS95 monitors the 8-bit parallel port continuously,
and sets the flash rate according to the values received in bits <6-0>. With 7
bits to encode the rate, 128 values are possible, allowing rates of 0 to 63.5 Hz,
in 0.5 Hz increments. Pulses are produced on the PHOTICS output at the
selected rate only when bit 7 is 1 (PHOTIC ON). To suspend pulse generation
without resetting the HPS95, simply leave bits <6-0> unchanged, and set bit 7
to 0 (PHOTIC OFF). The flash rate can be changed on the fly, regardless of the
state of bit 7.

Compatibility Issues with Commercial Stimulators

Most commercial stimulators include the following connectors:
• SYNC IN permits external driving of the stimulator by the HPS95
• SYNC OUT allows synchronization of other devices with the lamp
flashing.
In MODE 1, the HPS95 can be configured to drive any stimulator with a
SYNC IN connector that accepts trigger pulses with an amplitude of 0-5V, 0-
10V or 0-15 V, lasting 100 µS.
In MODE 2, the HPS95 can accept the SYNCH OUT signal from an external
stimulator, provided it is a 0-5V “TTL” signal. In some devices, the SYNCH
OUT signal is not TTL compatible. For example, GRASS Stimulators produce

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide E-13

Appendix E: Photic Stimulator

a 20 µS, 0-7V pulse that cannot be used directly by the HPS95. To connect
these devices, a special “T” BNC-connector with a 300 Ω terminator is
included. Simply attach this terminated “T” connector to the HPS95's
PHOINP connector, and then connect the other branch of the “T” to the
GRASS Stimulator's SYNCH OUT connector using a coax cable.

E-14 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

APPENDIX F: MULTIM Video Print Screen

This appendix describes the MULTIM Video Print Screen. This device is used
for HARMONIE’s Time Code Generator feature.
This appendix includes:
• Description
• RS-232 Input
• Transmission Protocol During Recording
To configure the time code generator, see “Selecting the Time Code
Generator” on page 2-22.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide F-1

Appendix F: MULTIM Video Print Screen

Description
The MULTIM Video Print Screen is a device designed to operate with the
HARMONIE program. It superimposes on a video image the time of day,
provided by a computer running HARMONIE. This allows perfect
synchronization between the EEG signals recorded on the computer, and the
patient's behavior recorded on the video tape. In addition to the time of day,
the date and the first eight characters of the subject's name (or ID number) are
displayed on the video.
The following video modes are supported:
• NTSC-1 (USA standard)
• NTSC-2
• SECAM1
• SECAM2
• PAL/CCIR (European standard)
• PAL-M
• 524
• 624

RS-232 Input
Control characters received by the time code generator during recording:

Control Character ASCII Decimal Code Character Meaning

^A 1 Push-button event
^B 2 Start of recording
^C 3 End of recording
^D 4 Date information
^E 5 Auto-detection event
^M 13 “Enter”: end of string
^P 16 Subject name information
^T 20 Time of Day information

F-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Transmission Protocol During Recording

Transmission Protocol During Recording

Transmission Time Transmission Sequence

[^B][…200 ms…]
Beginning of recording [^P][subject name:8 characters][^M]
[^D][date:YY,MM,DD][^M]
Every minute, on the 30s mark [^T] or [^A] or [^E][time:HH,MM,SS][^M]
[^P][subject name:8 characters][^M]
Every hour on the hour
[^D][date:YY,MM,DD][^M]
End of recording [^C][time:HH,MM,SS][^M]

Figure F.1 Connections

Dimensions MULTIM Electromed Inc - TIME CODE GENERATOR
Height
2.5 "
6.25 cm
POWER VIDEO RS-232
Width OUT IN
8"
20.5 cm

Depth
6.25 " Desktop computer
16 cm

Video
VIDEO VIDEO
IN OUT IN

VIDEO MONITOR VIDEO CASETTE RECORDER

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide F-3

Appendix F: MULTIM Video Print Screen

Switch Settings
DIP switch U3 on the MULTIM Video Print Screen circuit board sets the
various video synchronization formats. Available settings are:

Standard S1 S2 S3 S4
SECAM1 ON ON ON OFF
SECAM2 ON OFF ON OFF
624 OFF ON ON OFF
PAL/CCIR OFF OFF ON OFF
NTSC1 ON ON OFF OFF
NTSC2 ON OFF OFF OFF
524 OFF ON OFF OFF
PAL-M OFF OFF OFF OFF

F-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

APPENDIX G: Using HARMONIE with the
EEG-2100 System

This appendix includes:

• Installing and Running the NK Configuration Program
• Reviewing EEG Files

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide G-1

Appendix G: Using HARMONIE with the EEG-2100 System

Installing and Running the NK Configuration Program

Before HARMONIE can be used to review EEG files from the EEG-2100
system, the Nihon Kohden Configuration program must be run. This
program is installed if you select the Nihon Kohden Configuration program
component when installing HARMONIE on your workstation.
For more information about installing HARMONIE components, see Chapter
1.

To start the Nihon 1 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Programs > Stellate HARMONIE
Kohden > Nihon Kohden Configuration.
Configuration The Nihon Kohden Configuration dialog box displays.
program

2 In the Electrode Names box, enter the location and name of the CFG file.
By default, it is usually stored as C:\NFX\NKMTG.CFG.
3 Select the Low Level Filter check box to enable HARMONIE to
automatically apply a band-pass filter to the raw, unfiltered EEG data
stored by the EEG-2100 system. This band-pass filter is preset for a 0.3 s
time-constant and a 70 Hz high-frequency cutoff and is applied to all AC
channels (DC channels are not filtered).
When the Low Level Filter check box is cleared, the unfiltered signals are
displayed by HARMONIE. Then, other filters can be defined and applied
to these signals using the appropriate tools in the Reviewer.
4 The Trace Assignments box contains a list of the channel labels and their
input/output relationships for a particular trace type and unit.
• To add a channel, click Add.
• To change the values for a channel, select the channel and click Edit.
• To delete a channel, select it from the list and click Delete.

G-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Reviewing EEG Files

The Trace Assignments dialog box displays.

5 Some channels can be edited using the Trace Assignments dialog box.
Channel types that cannot be edited include: EEG, SEEG, EMG, ESP,
MOV, EOG, and EKG. These channels are pre-set in the EEG-2100
hardware. When one of these channel types is selected, the Calibration
fields appear dimmed.
For all other channel types, the signal can be calibrated by entering the
range of the signal at the input (specified in the signal’s units) and the
corresponding range at the amplifier output (always in volts).
6 Click OK when the NKMTG.CFG file name and path appear in the
window and the appropriate filtering option has been selected.

Reviewing EEG Files

Relabelling Electrode Names Using the NKMTG.CFG
File
The EEG-2100 software enables you to redefine the headbox electrode names
using the Systems Settings function. These settings are saved in a SET file,
that HARMONIE does not read. A special configuration file must be created
to inform HARMONIE of these new electrode names. The text file
NKMTG.CFG in the C:\NFX directory is used for this purpose. This file
contains lines of the form:
XXX=YYY
where “XXX” is the original electrode name (as it appears on the EEG-2100
headbox) and “YYY” is the new electrode name defined in the “System
Settings” of the EEG-2100. The default NKMTG.CFG file that is installed in
the C:\NFX directory initially equates the standard electrode names with
themselves (e.g. “P3=P3”, “T4=T4”, etc.). To relabel specific inputs, open the
NKMTG.CFG file with a text editor such as NOTEPAD and change the name
appearing after the equal sign. The new name can have at most three
characters. The default NKMTG.CFG file supplied, contains the following
lines for the 78 inputs available in the EEG-2100 system. The following is an

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide G-3

Appendix G: Using HARMONIE with the EEG-2100 System

example of an edited NKMTG.CFG file, where items appearing in bold have

been changed to reflect the changes in the SET file:

Part 1: Recording electrodes relabelling

FP1=CHN FP2=CHN F3=F3 F4=F4 C3=C3
C4=C4 P3=P3 P4=P4 O1=O1 O2=O2
F7=F7 F8=F8 T3=LTI T4=RTI T5=LTI
T6=RTI FZ=FZ CZ=CZ PZ=PZ E=E
PG1=LEO PG2=REO A1=A1 A2=A2 T1=SNR
T2=SNR X1=EKG X2=EKG X3=FLO X4=X4
X5=THO X6=X6 X7=ABD X8=X8 X9=X9
X10=X10 X11=X11 ?1?=?1? ?2?=?2? ?3?=?3?
?4?=?4? ?5?=?5? D01=SAT D02=D02 D03=D03
D04=D04 D05=D05 D06=D06 D07=D07 D08=D08
D09=D09 D10=D10 D11=D11 D12=D12 D13=D13
D14=D14 D15=D15 D16=D16 D17=D17 D18=D18
D19=D19 D20=D20 D21=D21 D22=D22 D23=D23
D24=D24 D25=D25 D26=D26 D27=D27 D28=D28
D29=D29 D30=D30 D31=D31 D32=D32 BN1=BN1
BN2=BN2 MK1=MK1 MK2=MK2

Part 2: Bipolar montage definition

sl14bip 05-24 09-24 22-23 21-24
06-23 10-23 01-02 27-28 14-16
13-15 29-20 31-20 33-20 00-43

The second (optional) part of the NKMTG.CFG file contains a description of

the reformatted bipolar montage that will be used when scoring and marking
events. The first line must be of the form:
slnnbip
where “nn” is the number of reformatted channels. The next “nn” lines
contain the electrode pairs to be subtracted from one another to create the
bipolar channel. The format for these lines is:
xx-yy
where “xx” and “yy” are numbers from 01 to 78 referring to the electrode list
in the first part of the NKMTG.CFG file. Exactly two characters must be used
for all numbers (i.e. leading zeros are required for electrode numbers < 10).

G-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Reviewing EEG Files

With V2.01 of the EEG-2100 software, the above NKMTG.CFG file is

automatically created whenever the settings are changed in the “System”
program of the EEG-2100 software. The file is updated when the System
program is exited. Therefore, if a new NKMTG.CFG is to be created, simply
edit the electrode names and settings of Pattern IA, then exit the System
program. Similarly, when a new *.SET file is loaded in the System program,
the NKMTG.CFG file will be updated upon exiting the System program.

Information Imported into the HARMONIE STS File

HARMONIE signal files (with extensions SIG or EEG) always have an
associated “status” file with the extension STS. This latter file contains all
sorts of information about a particular recording, such as the patient
identification, age, sex, etc. It is also used to store the recording annotations,
and the description of recording and reformatting montages. During review,
this file will be used to store events such as sleep stages, apneas,
desaturations, limb movements, etc.
When an EEG-2100 file is opened for the first time, all the user and system
annotations present in the EEG-2100 LOG file are automatically imported into
the STS file. Montage information is also imported, as described below.

“Referential” Montages
HARMONIE automatically determines the number and names of the
electrodes used in an EEG-2100 recording. The number of channels
appearing in an EEG file viewed with HARMONIE is always equal to the
number of inputs that were turned on using the Storage Settings option in
the EEG-2100 software at the time the EEG file is recorded. Since the EEG-
2100 system always records data referentially, a montage called “Referential”
is automatically created, based on the electrode names currently defined in
NKMTG.CFG (see above).

“Sleep” Reformatted Montages

In addition to the “Referential” montage, a special reformatted montage
called “Sleep” is automatically created by HARMONIE, based on the
reformatting information in the current NKMTG.CFG file (see above). This
montage corresponds to “Pattern IA” in the EEG-2100 system. If the
reformatting table is absent from NKMTG.CFG, this “Sleep” montage, as well
as any other reformatting montage, can be defined or edited by choosing
Montage > Edit in the Reviewer.
Montage definitions are always stored in the STS file corresponding to the
EEG file currently being reviewed.
If the bipolar montage definition in MKMTG.CFG includes electrodes that are
not part of the current EEG file, the affected channels in the “Sleep” montage
will either show the data from the original referential recording montage (if
one electrode is missing), or a flat line (if both electrodes are missing).

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide G-5

Appendix G: Using HARMONIE with the EEG-2100 System

The following table illustrates a sample recording condition for a file with 23
inputs and the “Referential” and “Sleep” montages created by HARMONIE.

Channel Number “Recording” “Sleep”

1 C3-ref LEO-A2
2 C4-ref REO-A2
3 LTI-ref CHN-CHN
4 RTI-ref C3-A2
5 O1-ref O1-A2
6 LEO-ref LTI-LTI
7 REO-ref RTI-RTI
8 CHN-ref EKG-EKG
9 CHN-ref THO-E
10 LTI-ref ABD-E
11 RTI-ref SAT-ref
12 E-ref
13 A1-ref
14 A2-ref
15 THO-ref
16 THO-ref
17 ABD-ref
18 ABD-ref
19 X5-ref
20 X6-ref
21 EKG-ref
22 EKG-ref
23 SAT-ref

G-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

APPENDIX H: BCD Time Code Generator
and Reader

This appendix describes how to configure the Recording and Review

workstations to use the HARMONIE Video Synchronization mode.
In addition to the computer, the basic Recording workstation requires a video
camera, microphone, Recording VCR and Time Code Generator (TCG). The
basic configuration is used for day monitoring (on a 6 to 8 hour video tape), so
only one Recording VCR is required. For 24-hour monitoring, three
Recording VCRs, a video distribution amplifier and an audio distribution
amplifier are required.
The TCG used in the Recording workstation configurations is the BCD TC-100
Time Code System.
The configuration for a Review workstation requires the computer and a
computer-controlled PlayBack VCR with an integrated time code reader
(TCR) to read the time code signal from the video.
For NTSC (USA standard) video mode, the PlayBack VCR used in the Review
workstation configuration is the Panasonic AG-2550C with integrated BCD
Control.
If you are using the PAL (European standard) video mode, you require a
computer-controlled PAL VCR and the SB-100 Video Controller. For more
information on PAL, see “Video Modes” on page H-7.
To configure the Time Code Generator and the PlayBack VCR, see “Selecting
the Time Code Generator” on page 2-22 and “Selecting the PlayBack VCR” on
page 2-24.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide H-1

Appendix H: BCD Time Code Generator and Reader

Recording Workstation Configurations

The two Recording workstation configurations differ in the number of VCRs
that are connected. With the basic configuration for day monitoring, you can
record up to 8 hours of patient video (using one VCR).
The configuration for long-term monitoring includes three cascading VCRs,
so you can record up to 24 hours of patient video. With more than one VCR,
you need a video distribution amplifier and an audio distribution amplifier.
Figure H.1 Basic Configuration for Day Monitoring

Video In
TC-100
RS-232C Link
COM 1 Time Code System
Video Out Video Camera
ATI Card: In
Video
Video In
Audio Microphone
Out
Audio In
Consumer Grade
Recording Computer with Recording VCR
Video-in-a-Window
(ATI Multimedia Video Card)

For the RS-232C link, you need to:

• Connect the small DB-9 to RJ-11 adapter on the COM1 port.
• Connect one end of the RJ-11 cable (telephone cable) to the above adapter.
• Connect the other end of RJ-11 cable to the RS-232 outlet on the TC-100.
The Video Camera to TC-100 connection requires a BNC to BNC cable.
The TC-100 to VCR connection requires a BNC to RCA cable.
Other audio and video (AV) connections are made with simple RCA to RCA
cables.
This configuration uses Video-in-a-Window (using the ATI Multimedia
Video Card) to view the video. You can also connect a stand-alone video
monitor to the Recording VCR.

H-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Recording Workstation Configurations

Figure H.2 Hardware Configuration for Long-term Monitoring (24 Hours)

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide H-3

Appendix H: BCD Time Code Generator and Reader

For the RS-232C link, you need to:

• Connect the small DB-9 to RJ-11 adapter on the COM1 port.
• Connect one end of the RJ-11 cable (telephone cable) to the above adapter.
• Connect the other end of RJ-11 cable to the RS-232 outlet on the TC-100.
The Video Camera to TC-100 connection requires a BNC to BNC cable.
The TC-100 to Video Distribution Amplifier connection requires a BNC to
BNC cable.
The Video Distribution Amplifier to VCR connections require BNC to RCA
cables.
Other audio and video (AV) connections are made with simple RCA to RCA
cables.
The diagram shows Video Out 1 (from the Video Distribution Amplifier)
connected to the Video In of the ATI card. To verify that each VCR is
recording the intended video, connect the Video Out from that VCR to the
Video In of the ATI card.
This configuration uses Video-in-a-Window (using the ATI Multimedia
Video Card) to view the video. You can also connect a stand-alone video
monitor to the Video Distribution Amplifier.

Configuring VCRs for 24-hour Recording

To begin Double-click the ATI Player icon in the HARMONIE program group.
When the ATI TV window displays, click OK.
The video screen should appear. (If it does not appear, press button 4 on the
video selector box).
Each VCR must be programmed individually.

To program VCR 1 1 Turn on VCR 1 and insert a tape.

(the top VCR) Press button 1 on the video selector box.
2 On the remote control, press the PROGRAM button once.
The Timer Recording window should appear.
3 Set CH to AV with the (1) CH button.
4 Use the (2) Date button to set Date for a one-time recording, or cycle
through to a weekly recording (either MO to FR or SU to SA).
5 Use the (3) ON button to set the start time.
6 Use the (4) OFF button to set the end time.
7 Press the TIMER REC button to save your settings and quit the recording
window.
Eject the tape and turn off the VCR.

H-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Recording Workstation Configurations

8 Press the TIMER REC button on the VCR to remove the TIMER REC
mode.

To program VCR 2 1 Turn on VCR 2 and insert a tape. On the video selector box, press button 2.
(the middle VCR) 2 Repeat steps 4 through 8.

To program VCR 3 1 Turn on VCR 3 and insert a tape. On the video selector box, press button 3.
(the bottom VCR) 2 Repeat steps 4 through 8.

To verify the 1 Turn on all three VCRs.

programming 2 Press button 1 on the video selector box.
3 Press the PROGRAM button twice.
The Timer Recording information for VCR 1 is displayed.
4 Press button 2 on the video selector box.
The Timer Recording information for VCR 2 is displayed.
5 Press button 3 on the video selector box.
The Timer Recording information for VCR 3 is displayed.
Turn off all three VCRs and press button 4 on the video selector box.

To begin 1 Initiate a recording session in HARM recording. (If necessary, you can stop
recording the VCR by pressing the TIMER REC button).
2 Re-insert the tapes and press the TIMER REC button on each VCR to reset
the Timer Recording mode.
A VCR may begin to record while you are configuring it. This is because your
current time falls within its programmed start time and end time.
Press the TIMER REC button on the VCR to stop recording (and remove the timer
recording mode). Rewind the tape.
Once the end time of the programmed recording interval has passed, press the
TIMER REC button.

To stop a Press the TIMER REC button on the VCR to stop the recording.
recording

To reprogram a Whenever you reprogram a VCR, you must first remove all other recording
VCR cycles that have been programmed on that VCR. If you do not do so, the two
recording cycles will run concurrently.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide H-5

Appendix H: BCD Time Code Generator and Reader

Picture in Picture
To use Picture in Picture, you need two video cameras to record the patient
video (i.e. one camera focused on patient’s body and the other focused on the
patient’s face). If you are using a second video camera, you require a Picture-
in-Picture (PiP) or Split-Screen Device. Connect the device between the video
cameras and the BCD TC-100 Time Code System.
Figure H.3 Picture in Picture

TC-100 PiP or Split-screen

Time Code System Device Video Camera 1

Video Camera 2

Switch Settings: The BCD TC-100 Time Code System DIP switches (on the
Recording workstation) should not be changed from their default settings:
Figure H.4 BCD TC-100 Time Code System DIP Switches

ON OFF OFF OFF

1 2 3 4

Review Workstation Configuration: The configuration for a Review

workstation requires the computer and a computer-controlled PlayBack VCR
with an integrated Time Code Reader to read the time code signal from the
video.
Figure H.5 Review Workstation Configuration

RS-232C Link Video Cassettes

with Time Code

ATI Card: In
Video
Audio
Out

BCD AG-2550C VCR

Review Computer with
Video-in-a-Window
Remote
(ATI Multimedia Video Card)

H-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Recording Workstation Configurations

For the RS-232C link, you need to:

• Connect the small DB-9 to RJ-11 adapter on the COM1 port.
• Connect one end of the RJ-11 cable (telephone cable) to the above adapter.
• Connect the other end of RJ-11 cable to the “RS-232 Serial Comm. Port”
outlet on the PlayBack VCR.
Audio and video (AV) connections are made with simple RCA to RCA cables.
This configuration uses Video-in-a-Window (using the ATI Multimedia Card)
to view the video. You can also connect a stand-alone video monitor to the
PlayBack VCR.

Recording/Reviewing Workstation Configuration

It is possible to use the same workstation for recording and reviewing video.
To do this, you must physically switch the connection to the computer’s
COM1 port each time you want to use the other device.
You should not record on the PlayBack VCR.
If you record on the Panasonic AG-2550C, the video tape will not contain a valid
time code signal so you will not be able to use Video Synchronization mode.
Before recording video, remember to connect the COM1 port to the TCG (e.g.
BCD TC-100 Time Code System). The TCG is always connected to the
Recording VCR, not the PlayBack VCR.
Before reviewing video, remember to connect the COM1 port to the PlayBack
VCR (e.g. Panasonic AG-2550C with integrated BCD Control).

Video Modes
The configurations in this appendix work with the NTSC (USA standard)
video mode. If you are using the PAL (European standard) video mode, a few
changes are required.
The Recording workstation requires PAL Recording VCRs. The Review
workstation cannot use the Panasonic AG-2550C with integrated BCD
Control. Instead, you require a computer-controlled PAL VCR and the SB-100
Video Controller. This device is an external Time Code Reader, which is
connected between the computer and the PlayBack VCR using RS-232C
cables.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide H-7

Appendix H: BCD Time Code Generator and Reader

H-8 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

APPENDIX I: Synthetic Data Generator

The Synthetic Data Generator is not an actual ADC board, but rather a
software program. It creates synthetic waves that can be used with
HARMONIE.
The Synthetic Data Generator is launched each time you start recording. It
appears minimized on the Windows Task Bar (usually along the bottom edge
of the screen). Click it to open the Synthetic Data Generator window.
The Synthetic Data Generator can run one to three generators (G1, G2, and
G3) simultaneously. These generators can be combined to form different
types of waves.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide I-1

Appendix I: Synthetic Data Generator

Configuring the Synthetic Data Generator

To configure the 1 For each generator, select the following:
Synthetic Data • Wave Type: From the list, select one of the available wave types (SIN,
Generator PULSE, SQUARE, RAMP, and NOISE).
• Frequency Range (Hz): From the list, select a frequency range for the
wave. You can also select to use the frequency range selected by one of
the other generators.
• Frequency Value (Hz): From the list, select a frequency value. The
available values correspond to the selected frequency range. You can
also enter a value not included in the list, provided it is less than or
equal to half of the base sampling rate.
• Amplitude (V): From the list, select an amplitude for the wave to be
generated. The range of values available is 0.0 to 10.0. You can also
choose to use the amplitude selected by one of the other generators.
And you can enter a value not included on the list, provided it falls
within the range of available values.
• Offset (V): From the list, select an offset value for the wave to be
generated. The range of available values is –10.0 to 10.0. You can also
enter a value not included on the list, provided it falls within the range
of available values.
2 Under Inputs, select the generators that should be used to create the
waves corresponding to each of eight channels.
Each channel can be composed by one, two, or three generators.
To include a generator in a channel, select its check box.
If no generators are selected for a channel, its corresponding wave will be a
zero line.
If the recording has more than eight channels, the group of eight channels
defined here will repeat until all channels have a generator.
For example, a recording with 12 channels will use the following setup:

1. Channel 1 2. Channel 2 3. Channel 3

4. Channel 4 5. Channel 5 6. Channel 6
7. Channel 7 8. Channel 8 9. Channel 1
10. Channel 2 11. Channel 3 12. Channel 4

3 Click Apply to implement the configuration you have specified.

To erase any changes you have entered and return to the previous
configuration, click Clear Changes before clicking Apply.

I-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

APPENDIX J: Video Boards

The Darim MPEGator MPG1 encoder board and the Matrox G450eTV card
are necessary for recording, monitoring, and reviewing digital video files.
This appendix includes:
• Optibase MovieMaker XPress PCI Board
• Optibase MovieMaker 100S
• Darim MPEGator
• Matrox G450eTV Card

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide J-1

Appendix J: Video Boards

Optibase MovieMaker XPress PCI Board

The Optibase MovieMaker XPress board is an easily installed plug-and-play
PCI device.
Figure J.1 Optibase MovieMaker XPress Connections

Microphone
Unbalanced Balanced
Typical Connections
Audio Out Audio In
F1 XLR = PHONE = SIGNAL
PIN1 SLEEVE GROUND
PIN2 TIP HIGH (+)
PIN3 RING LOW (-)

E1 Optibase Xpress
Note: COMPUTER
Special Unblanced Mono A1 STEREO AUDIO INPUT
to Stereo Audio Cable A2 STEREO AUDIO OUTPUT

A3 COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT

A4 COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT

S-VIDEO INPUT

Sound Card
GX1 or GX200

B1 MICROPHONE

B2 LINE OUT

B3 LINE IN

Matrox G450eTV
A/V OUT

CATV

C1 A/V IN
G1

Camera

Installation and Configuration

To install and 1 Install the board.
configure 2 Make sure the board does not share the IRQ with other system devices.
Optibase 3 Connect all necessary cables according to the wiring diagram above.
MovieMaker 4 Install the Optibase software.
XPress

J-2 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Optibase MovieMaker 100S

In-Process 1 Run MPEG Composer.

Testing 2 Run the TV-Tuner program.
3 Make sure that you can see the video image.
4 Perform a video recording test, including sound.
5 Review the TEST.MPG file.

Optibase MovieMaker 100S

Figure J.2 Optibase MovieMaker 100S Connections

Microphone
Unbalanced Balanced Typical Connections
Audio Out Audio In
F1 XLR = PHONE = SIGNAL
PIN1 SLEEVE GROUND
PIN2 TIP HIGH (+)
PIN3 RING LOW (-)

E1 Optibase 100S
Note: COMPUTER
Special Unblanced Mono A1 STEREO AUDIO INPUT
to Stereo Audio Cable A2 STEREO AUDIO OUTPUT

A4 COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT

A3 COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT

S-VIDEO INPUT

Sound Card
GX1 or GX200

B1 MICROPHONE

B2 LINE OUT

B3 LINE IN

Matrox G450eTV
A/V OUT

CATV

C1 A/V IN
G1

Camera

Installation and Configuration

To install and 1 Install the board.
configure 2 Make sure the board does not share the IRQ with other system devices.
Optibase 3 Connect all necessary cables according to the wiring diagram above.
MovieMaker 100S 4 Install the Optibase software.

In-Process 1 Run MPEG Composer.

Testing 2 Run the TV-Tuner program.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide J-3

Appendix J: Video Boards

3 Make sure that you can see the video image.

4 Perform a video recording test, including sound.
5 Review the TEST.MPG file.

Darim MPEGator MPG1 Encoder Board

Microphone
Unbalanced Balanced
Audio Out Audio In Typical Connections
XLR = PHONE = SIGNAL
IN 1 2 3 4 PIN1 SLEEVE GROUND
PIN2 TIP HIGH (+)
PIN3 RING LOW (-)

Video Distributor

Darim COMPUTER
MPEGator

S-VIDEO INPUT

Time Code COMPOSITE

VIDEO INPUT
Generator
(optional) Note: Special STEREO AUDIO OUTPUT
Mono to Stereo STEREO AUDIO INPUT
Audio Cable

Sound Card
IN OUT TC-100

LINE IN

MICROPHONE

LINE OUT

SPEAKERS OUT

COM1 or COM2 Serial Output

RS-232 ATI
ATI-TV
Line from PC All-In-Wonder
Audio Out
A/V IN
Audio In Left
CATV Audio In Right
Composite
A/V OUT Video Input
CATV

S-Video IN

Video

Installation
The MPEGator MPG1 encoder board is an easily-installed plug-and-play PCI
device.

To install the 1 Shut down the computer and unplug it.

Darim MPEGator 2 Insert the encoder board into a 32-bit PCI slot with bus mastering
MPG1 Encoder capability.
Board 3 Avoid shared ISA/ PCI slots.
4 Start the computer.
5 [Win98] As the system restarts, it will detect a new PCI board and prompt
you for the driver.

J-4 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 Darim MPEGator MPG1 Encoder Board

Insert the Darim CD-ROM and select the driver.

Verify that the hardware has been installed correctly.
[Win98] On the desktop, select the My Computer icon. Right-click the icon
and select Properties from the menu that appears.
The System Properties window displays. Click the Device Manager tab,
then double-click Sound, video and game controllers.
On the list of controllers that appears, double-click MPEGator.
The MPEGator Properties window displays.
In the Device Status box, you should see “The device is working
properly”.
Check the IRQ used by MPEGator. Verify that it is not shared with any
other device on the system (especially the ATI Player).
6 Now the hardware installation is complete.

Configuration
To install and configure the MPEGator software under WinNT, you must log
in to your system as ADMINISTRATOR.

To install the 1 From the Darim CD-ROM, run Setup.exe.

software 2 Select Typical installation.
3 Restart the computer after the installation is complete.

To configure the 1 On the taskbar, click Start, then choose Programs > MPGator > M-Coder.
MPEGator Board 2 You should be in “Capture” mode: the available menus should be File,
Edit, and Capture, and on the left hand side, there should be a Capture
button with red circle on it.
If you are in “Playback” mode (available menus are File, Edit, and
Playback), select Playback, then Capture to switch to the ‘Capture’ mode.
3 Choose Capture > Preview to display the preview window.

To troubleshoot 1 If the error message “Preview can’t be open” appears when you display
MPEGator the preview window, check that the system colors are set to 16-bit color or
greater.
If the problem persists, on the taskbar, click Start, then choose Programs >
MPEGator > MPEGator Control.
2 At the General tab the three check boxes should always be selected
(default).
At the Preview tab, switch to GDI mode if AutoDectection is currently
selected. (Preview should always work in this mode).
3 Choose Capture > Options.
The MPEGator Properties window displays.

HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide J-5

Appendix J: Video Boards

Click Template. Make sure that the three check boxes in the Load only box
are selected. You should see several templates listed, including CD-ROM
(square pixel). Select it and click Load. A confirmation window indicates
that “CD-ROM (square pixel) template is loaded”. Click OK, then Apply.
4 Click the Video tab. Select the Source appropriate for your camera. Then
select the appropriate Video Standard.
The Hue, Sat, Cont, and Bright controls are set at the middle of scale by
default and should not be touched.
OffsetX (OffsetY) can be useful in eliminating bad lines at the bottom
(side) of the image. Changes made here are visible right away in the
Preview window.
5 Click Apply.
6 Click the Audio tab. Use the left hand slider to adjust the input audio. The
MPEGator board requires a nominal level of audio at ‘-10dB’. If audio
input level is too high, sound distortions occur.
Use the right-hand slider to control the audio output (can be muted by
selecting the check box). Usually the output is set with the slider to
maximum volume, and the Mute check box is cleared. After completing
the audio settings, click Apply.
7 Finally, click the Filter tab. Make sure that Enable 3-tap FIR filter is
selected (default).
8 Do not change any of the settings on the remaining tabs (MPEG Base,
MPEG Adv, MPEG audio).
9 Click OK to save the settings.

Matrox G450eTV Card

For installation and configuration instructions, see the “Matrox G450eTV
Installation Guide” provided with the card.

J-6 HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

Index
A B
Access 2-8, 4-2 backing up
access daily 12-2
to drive 4-4 database 12-2
accessing drives 4-4 files 9-4, 9-5
active window 8-10 backup interval 6-25
Adaptec Easy CD Creator 9-27 base address A-5, D-13
ADC board A-4 base frequency 4-24
adding 4-11 baseline 7-5, A-16
airflow channels 8-47 BCD TC-100 Time Code System A-7, H-1
All Files view 3-18 bipolar montages 4-26
amplifier 5-9 BMSI 2-6
amplifiers BMSI-519 board B-2
LA MONT Blue Diamond 5-13 board value 5-13, 8-4
Amplitude-Time cursor 7-24 buffer delay A-5, D-14
analog video burning CD-ROM
at EEG position 8-45 using Adaptec Easy CD Creator 9-27
following video movement 8-45
reviewing 8-43
synchronization mode 8-44
C
calibrating
time code signal 5-27
adjusting sensitivity 5-18
annotations 8-14
free-text 5-20 automatic 5-11, 5-16
by entering factors 5-13
placing 6-15, 8-19
editing 8-4
programming 5-7, 5-20
storing impedance 6-13 entering factors 8-4
external 5-11, 5-20
appended recording 5-29
factors 5-3, 5-9
archiving files 9-10
CD volumes 9-15 HARMONIE methods 5-11
LA MONT Blue Diamond 5-13
changing CD volume descriptions 9-20
LA MONT boards D-37
deleting original files 9-19, 9-31
preparing CDs 9-13 manual 5-11, 5-13, 8-4
min/max tracking 5-18
storage devices 9-12
screen 7-13
to CD-ROM 9-16
to virtual CD-ROMs 9-24 signals 5-9
steps 5-12
Undo Archive feature 9-34
Calibration section 8-14
using DirectCD 9-11
verifying 9-31 CD
changing volume descriptions 9-20
CD-ROM files 9-18
for installation 2-3
without DirectCD 9-11, 9-21
assigning files 9-6 mastering software 9-21
preparing 9-13
ATI All-in-Wonder Pro J-1
volumes 9-15
ATI Player 11-4
audio 8-43 creating 9-23
CD-R software 9-11
automatic calibration 5-11, 5-16
CD-ROM
automatic pagination 8-8
automatic recording 5-26, 6-14, 10-11 buring
setting up 5-7
using Adaptec Easy CD Creator 9-27
naming conventions 9-15, 9-23
auxiliary inputs D-24
average reference montages 4-26, 4-31 reviewing files 8-2
storage capacity 9-22
averaging EEG segments 10-20
verifying files 9-31
virtual 9-32

HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide i

 storage devices 9-22 Duration 7-26
CD-ROM Burner software 9-21 Overlay 7-25
CD-ROM files Statistics 7-27
verifying 9-18 Video Sync 8-44
central database 4-2 , 4-4, 12-2, 12-3
central workstation 4-3
configuring 4-3
D
channel bar 7-10 Darim MPEGator MPG1 J-1
configuring J-5
changing settings 6-8
installing J-4
channels
airflow 8-47 data
exporting as text 8-39
baseline 7-5
printing 8-34
changing settings A-16
digital readout 7-5 saving 8-38
security 6-25
displaying 7-5
data acquisition board
grid lines 7-6
names configuring A-4
selecting A-4
polarity 7-5
testing A-13
resetting 6-14
sensitivity 7-5 database 3-3, 4-2
backing up 12-2
testing A-16
backing up daily 12-2
type 8-46
width 7-6 central 4-2, 12-2, 12-3
compacting 12-14
circle maps 4-21
creating 4-4
Clip Traces 7-14
colors files 9-2
master 12-3
event groups 8-28
merging 12-9
traces 7-10
columns mobile 12-3, 12-5
repairing 12-14
displaying 3-5, 3-8, 9-3
slave 12-3
COM port
PlayBack VCR A-10 date, system setting A-18
delay 5-25
TCG A-8
between pages 8-9
Compact Disk-Recording software 9-11
Compact utility 12-14 buffer A-5, D-14
manual sample 5-7
configuring
Push Button 5-25, 6-5
Darim MPEGator MPG1 J-5
data acquisition board A-4 Push Button samples 5-7
sample 6-5
headbox D-33
deleting files 9-35
LA MONT EMERALD Controller D-20
LA MONT EMERALD PCMCIA Interface Card D-20 desktop shortcuts 3-2
creating 3-2
LA MONT Patient Amplifier D-20
deleting 3-3
recording and reviewing workstations H-7
recording device A-4 Detail format 3-5
Detection Always On 10-13
recording workstations H-2
devices
Synthetic Data Generator I-2
VCR for 24 hour recording H-4 storage 4-7
configuring 4-6
Windows 95/98 installation D-22
digital amplifier 5-9
Connect in LookBack mode 6-21
conventions digital filters 7-16
digital readout
manual 1-3
Observer 7-5
naming 9-15, 9-23
volume naming 4-9, 9-32 Digital Readout toolbar 7-2
digital video 11-2
current time 6-22, 7-3, A-18
ATI Player 11-4
cursors
Amplitude-Time 7-24 file size 11-2
Matrox PC-VCR 11-4
analysis tool 7-24, 7-26
recording 5-7, 5-27, 11-3

HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide ii

 reviewing 11-12 event box 8-15
saving 11-14 event group 10-2
setting up hardware 11-3 adding names 8-23
digital video board A-10 event groups 8-15, 8-19, 10-2
digitizing 5-28 defining 8-26
Direct Memory Access A-5 deleting 8-29
DirectCD 9-11 event line 8-15
discontinuity 8-14 event locator 8-16
disk drive events 8-14
partitions 9-22 deleting 8-25
disk status 7-3 finding 8-18
displaying by event group 8-18
columns 9-3 by group 6-7
DMA channel A-5 by name 6-6, 8-18
document conventions 1-3 hyperventilation 6-16
DOS files marking 8-19, 10-13
converting format 8-49 moving to 8-19
importing calibration factors 8-47 names 8-19
importing events 8-47 predefined names 8-29
importing montage information 8-46 processor 8-15
reviewing 8-46 properties 8-22
DOS programs 9-34 Traces as Observed 7-24, 8-15
drives user defined 8-15
creating volumes 4-9 viewing 8-15
full access 4-4 exporting EEG data as text 8-39
read-only access 4-4 external calibration 5-11, 5-20
Duration cursor 7-26 Extract utility 12-3, 12-5

E F
ECLIPSE 8-46, 9-34 Ferrite Bead D-13
EEG file information 8-42
machine 5-9 File views 3-16, 9-3
synchronizing A-6 customizing 3-18
EEG data files 4-6
exporting as text 8-39 archiving 9-10
printing 8-34 archiving to CD-ROM 9-11, 9-16, 9-21
EEG files, See files assigning for review 9-6
EEG identification number (ID1) 4-11 backing up 9-4, 9-5
EFF channels 8-47 converting format 8-49, 8-50
elapsed time 6-23, 7-14 deleting 4-10, 9-19, 9-31, 9-35
electrical stimulation 6-18 filtering 9-3
electrode sets 3-15, 4-19 importing 9-34, 12-2
copying 4-32, 4-33 maintaining 9-34
creating 4-15, 4-21 opening 8-2
patient-specific 4-33 from Reviewer 8-3
electrodes read-only 8-2, 8-4
10-10 system 4-19 reassigning
10-20 system 4-19 to patients 9-9
body system 4-20 to staff 9-7
locations 4-22 recording 3-3
relabelling names G-3 recovering 6-26
electroencephalogram (EEG) 1-1 renaming 9-9
erasing reviewing 8-2, 8-6
all selected sections 8-33 digital video 11-12
smallest enclosing recording section 8-33 DOS 8-46
event sharing 4-3
annotation 8-14 sorting 3-8, 9-3

HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide iii

 storing 4-8, 4-9, 4-10 groups
verifying 9-18, 9-31 event 8-15
viewing information 8-42 events 8-19
Files to Archive view 3-17, 9-10
Files to Assign view 3-17
Files to Backup view 3-16
H
hard drive, partitions 9-22
Files to Review view 3-17
Files to Verify view 3-17 hardware key 2-2
Hardware Setup A-3
Files/Reports format 3-5
starting A-3
filtering files 9-3
filters hardware setup
digital video 11-3
applying 7-15
hardware, troubleshooting A-18
creating 7-17
digital 7-16 HarmEEG folder 9-2
HARMONIE
editing 7-20
backing up database 12-2
removing 7-16
Traces as Observed 7-23 components 2-6
database 3-3, 4-2
Find feature 6-7, 8-18, 8-34
backing up 12-2
Find in List 8-18
Find in List feature 6-6, 8-18 compacting 12-14
file views 3-16
finding
Files to Archive view 3-17, 9-10
patients 4-13
finding events Files to Assign view 3-17
Files to Backup view 3-16
by event group 8-18
Files to Review view 3-17
by name 8-18
fixed toolbars 3-4 Files to Verify view 3-17
folder 2-4, 2-6, 2-9
flash rate
Global Montages view 3-15
computer control E-9
stimulator control E-9 installing 2-3
options 3-18, 4-9, 12-15
floating toolbars 3-4
overview 3-22
FLOW channels 8-47
folder Patients view
Detail format 3-9
HARMONIE 2-4, 2-6, 2-9
Files/Reports format 3-7
folders
HarmEEG 9-2 List format 3-6
Montages format 3-9
Template 7-23
processors 10-2
formats
HARMONIE views 3-5 repairing database 12-14
Staff view
shortcuts for changing 3-18
Detail format 3-13
formulas 4-29
saving 4-29 Files/Reports format 3-12
List format 3-10
free-text annotations 5-20
starting 3-2
placing 6-15
frequency STS file G-5
toolbars 3-3, 3-4
statistics 7-27
upgrading 2-9
full access 4-4
user defined views 3-17
views 3-5, 3-18
G customizing 3-18
gain 5-9 Volumes view
general settings file 10-3 Files/Reports format 3-14
global montages 4-23, 4-27 List format 3-13
creating 4-24 HARMONIE CD 2-3
Global Montages view 3-5, 3-15, 3-18 HARMONIE database, See database
Go to menu 8-8 HARMONIE window 3-2, 3-3
Go to time 8-8 headbox D-25
grid lines 7-6 configuring D-33
grid maps 4-21 height/weight units 4-12

HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide iv

help system 1-4 LA MONT board A-5
options 1-7 LA MONT EMERALD
starting 1-4 installing D-11
using 1-5 LA MONT EMERALD Controller
high-speed playback 5-28 configuring D-20
hospital file number 4-12 LA MONT EMERALD Interface Card D-12
host PC D-12 LA MONT EMERALD PCMCIA Interface Card
setting up D-21 configuring D-20
HPS95 interface E-8 installing D-12
HPS95 photic stimulator LA MONT HXAT-32 board
testing A-15 jumper settings D-3
hyperlink 1-7 LA MONT HXAT-32/64 boards
hyperventilation installing D-5
marker 5-7 LA MONT Patient Amplifier
marking events 6-16 configuring D-20
Hypnogram toolbar 3-4 installing D-12
LA MONT WARATAH board
amplifiers D-23
I labels, See names
impedance Laplacian montages 4-26
annotation 8-14
Laplacian reformatting montages 4-31
LA MONT amplifier 6-11
license 2-2
measuring 6-11 List format 3-5
importing
load (system resources) 6-22
DOS calibration factors 8-47
logs 8-40
DOS events 8-47 recording 6-22
DOS montage information 8-46
LookBack mode 6-21
files 9-34, 12-2
LookBack window 6-5
inferior temporal 4-19 moving around 6-6
installation CD 2-3
LUNA 1-2, 2-6, 3-4
installing
processors 10-2
LA MONT Amplifier Extension Cable D-12
LA MONT EMERALD D-11
LA MONT EMERALD PCMCIA Interface Card D-12 M
LA MONT HXAT-32/64 boards D-5 macros 4-31
LA MONT Patient Amplifier D-12 creating 4-29
PC-TIO-10 hardware E-5 using 4-31
institution name, changing 4-5 maintaining files 9-34
interval between sections 10-12 manual
IRQ number D-13 calibration 5-11, 5-13, 8-4
recording 5-25
manual sample
J delay 5-7, 6-5
jackbox D-13, D-25
Manual Stop 6-18
jumper settings mapping configurations
BMSI-519 board B-2
LA MONT 24/32-Channel EEG D-25
LA MONT HXAT-32 board D-3 LA MONT boards D-24
maps
K SENSA 4-21
key 2-2 marked sections 8-34
keyboard commands 8-8 erasing 8-33
finding 8-34
marking events 8-19, 10-13
L hyperventilation 6-16
LA MONT Amplifier Extension Cable marking sections 8-30, 11-14
installing D-12 master database 12-3
LA MONT Blue Diamond Matrox PC-VCR 11-4
calibration factors 5-13 maximum output value 5-16

HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide v

memory O
printer A-19
Observer 5-2
virtual A-19
changing options 7-10
Merge utility 12-3, 12-9 exiting 6-28
Microsoft
starting 6-3
Access 2-8, 4-2
toolbars 3-4, 6-10
Office 97 2-8 displaying 6-10
min/max tracking 5-18
offline
minimum board value 5-16
processing 10-3
minutes written 6-23 offset 5-10
mobile database 12-3
online
creating 12-5
processing 10-3
merging 12-9 online help 1-4
MONITOR 2-6 , 8-46, 9-34
options 1-7
montages
starting 1-4
average reference 4-31 using 1-5
copying 4-32, 4-33
Online Low-Pass Filter 5-28
creating 4-15, 4-24, 4-27
options
global 4-23 HARMONIE 3-18, 4-9, 12-15
Laplacian reformatting 4-31
Observer 7-10
patient-specific 4-33
online help 1-7
recording 3-15, 4-23 original value 5-13, 8-4
creating 4-24
Overlay cursor 7-25
referential G-5
reformatting 3-16, 4-26
copying 8-12 P
creating 4-27, 8-12 pages
editing 8-12 delay 8-9
sleep reformatted G-5 PAL video mode H-7
Montages format 3-5 Pane Sync 8-10
MULTIM Video Print Screen starting 8-10
description F-2 panes 8-9
DIP switch settings F-4 active 8-10
RS-232 input F-2 moving around 8-10
transmission protocol during recording F-3 partitions 9-22
MULTIM video print screen patients 4-11, 5-3
configuring A-8 adding 4-11
finding 4-13
height/weight 4-12
N hospital file number 4-12
names selecting 4-14
adding to event group 8-23
sorting 4-14
channels
Patients view 3-5
events 8-19 Detail format 3-9
institution
Files/Reports format 3-7
changing 4-5
List format 3-6
naming Montages format 3-9
conventions for CD-ROMs 9-23
PC-TIO-10 hardware installation E-5
volumes 9-15
PC-TIO-10 interface specifications E-4
NetBEUI network protocol A-20 PC-TIO-10 software installation
network
Windows95/98 E-6
of workstations 4-3
WindowsNT E-5
protocol A-20 photic stimulator
Nihon Kohden 2-6
enabling 5-7
Configuration program G-2
playing protocols 6-17
NKMTG.CFG file G-3 protocols 5-22
Novell Network OS 8-38
selecting A-6
NTSC video mode H-7

vi HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 testing A-15 R
trigger output D-36
range
Picture in Picture H-6
sensitivity A-17
PlayBack VCR 8-43 read-only access 4-4
connecting H-7
read-only files 8-2
selecting A-9
changing 8-4
polarity 7-5, A-16 Real Time Recording window 6-13, 7-10
port
reassigning files 9-7
COM A-8 , A-10
to patients 9-9
portable recording 12-3 , 12-4, 12-5, 12-8, 12-9 to staff 9-7
power failure 6-25
record 6-6
predefined event name 8-29
recorded section 8-14
preprogrammed annotations 5-20 , 6-15 recorded section bar 6-5, 8-16
Print Preview 8-36
recorded time 7-14
printer
Recorder 5-2
memory A-19 exiting 6-28
setting up A-19
starting 5-4
system setting A-18
window 6-22
printing recording 5-2
EEG data 8-34
appending to files 5-29
selected sections 8-30
automatic 5-7, 6-14, 10-11
PrintScreen utility 8-36 backing up files 9-4
processing
connecting to stations 6-20, A-20
offline 10-3
digital video 5-7, 11-3
online 10-3 log 6-22, 8-40
processor event 8-15
manual 5-25
processors
MULTIM Video Print Screen transmission protocol F-3
event groups 10-2 parameters 5-3
HARMONIE, SENSA, LUNA 10-2
portable 12-3, 12-4, 12-5, 12-8, 12-9
Scheduled Section 10-11
Push Button 6-14
parameters 10-12 Restart feature 5-27
setting up 5-7
starting 5-4, 6-13
settings file 10-3
templates 5-5
Signal Averaging 10-20 to disk 6-13
parameters 10-21
wipe bar 6-14
starting 10-4, 10-9
recording device 5-3
using 10-3 configuring A-4
programs
selecting A-4
DOS 8-46
testing A-13
properties recording montages 3-15, 4-23, 5-3
events 8-22
copying 4-32
protocol 5-22, 6-17
creating 4-15, 4-24
Manual Stop 6-18 recording section, erasing smallest enclosing 8-33
NetBEUI A-20
Recording Stations view 3-18
network A-20
recording workstations
setting up 5-23 configuring H-2
Push Button 6-14
records 8-7
connecting D-3
Recover function 6-25, 6-26
delay 5-7, 6-5 recovering volumes 12-16
detection 8-16
Recycle Bin 9-32
device D-24
redrawing mode 8-9
enabling 5-26 referential montages G-5
samples 5-25
reformatting montages 3-16, 4-26
Section 5-26
average reference 4-31
testing A-13, D-3 copying 4-32
Push Button section 8-14
copying to Reviewer 8-12
creating 4-15, 4-27, 8-12

HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide vii

 displaying 8-11 marking 8-30, 11-14
editing 8-12 Push Button 8-14
sleep G-5 recorded 8-14, 8-16
relabelling electrode names G-3 Sample 8-14
remote workstation 4-3 scheduled 8-14
remote workstations 6-28 seizure 8-14
renaming files 9-7, 9-9 spike 8-14
Repair utility 12-14 security
reports 3-5, 9-3 data 6-25
deleting 4-10 Seizure section 8-14
generating 6-24, 8-40 selected section 8-30
viewing 3-5 erasing 8-33
requirements selected sections 8-30
system 1-8 selecting events, See marking events
Reset State E-13 selecting patients 4-14
Restart feature SENSA 1-2, 2-6
digital video 5-27 processors 10-2
Reviewer sensitivity 7-5, A-16
opening files 8-3 range A-17
starting from HARMONIE 8-2 Sensitivity toolbar 7-6
starting from Start menu 8-2 setting
window gain and filter D-37
moving around 8-7 setting up
reviewing host PC D-21
analog video 8-43 settings file 10-3
CD-ROM files 8-2 Setup program 2-4, 2-5, 2-8, 2-9
files 8-6 sharing files 4-3
reviewing digital video files 11-12 shortcuts 3-2
reviewing files 8-2, 9-6 changing formats 3-18
RHYTHM 2-6, 8-46, 9-34 creating 3-2
ruler 7-26 deleting 3-3
Signal Averaging processor 10-20
parameters 10-21
S signal files 9-2
Sample section 5-25, 5-26, 8-14 signal traces
delay 6-5
clipping 7-14
samples
color 7-10
duration 10-12 drawing 8-9
Push Button 5-25
slave database 12-3
sampling rate 4-24
sleep montages G-5
saving slope
data 8-38
gain 5-10
selected sections 8-30
smooth scrolling, See Scroll mode
Scheduled section 5-26, 8-14 software license 2-2
interval 10-12
sorting
Scheduled Section processor 10-11
files 3-8, 9-3
parameters 10-12 patient list 4-14
screen calibration 7-13
specifications
screen savers 9-26
PC-TIO-10 interface E-4
scroll bar 8-7 spectral maps 4-21
Scroll mode 6-4
Speed-Up Factor 5-28
activating 6-4
sphenoidal 4-19
using 6-4 Spike section 8-14
section length 10-12
split window 8-9
sections
staff
calibration 8-14 adding 4-14
erasing 8-33
deleting 4-14
finding 8-34

viii HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

Staff view 3-5 Template folder 7-23
Detail format 3-13 templates
Files/Reports format 3-12 recording parameters 5-5
List format 3-10 viewing 6-24
standard log 8-40 testing
starting channel setting A-16
Hardware Setup A-3 data acquisition board A-13
HARMONIE 3-2 Push Button A-13
Observer 6-3 text jump 1-7
online help 1-4 text pop-up 1-7
Pane Sync 8-10 tick marks 7-26
processors 10-4, 10-9 time
Recorder 5-4 current 6-22, 7-3
recording 6-13 elapsed 6-23, 7-14
Reviewer finding a specific 8-8
from HARMONIE 8-2 Go to 8-8
from Start menu 8-2 recorded 7-14
stations system setting A-18
connecting to 6-20 video 8-45
statistics Time & Status toolbar 7-3
deleting 4-10 time code 8-43
Statistics cursor 7-27 generator 8-43
status signal A-6
of video 8-46 time code generator H-1
status bar 8-12 BCD TC-100 A-7
status files 9-2 connecting H-2
Stellate DOS programs 9-34 selecting A-6
stimulator, See photic stimulator time code reader A-9, H-1
Stop Watch toolbar 7-3 time line 7-10
storage capacity time line interval 7-10
virtual CD-ROM 9-22 time scale 7-10
storage devices for printing 8-34
adding 9-22 changing 8-35
configuring 4-6 setting 7-13
for CD-R drives 9-12 Timecode Generator 5-27
list 4-7 times
storage status types 3-20 finding 8-8
STS file G-5 moving to 8-8
Sweep mode 6-4 timestamp
using 6-4 changing 7-14
sync cursor 8-44 hiding 8-17
synchronizing toolbars 3-4
EEG and video A-6 Digital Readout 7-2
Synthetic Data Generator I-1 displaying 6-10
configuring I-2 HARMONIE 3-3, 3-4
selecting A-4 Hypnogram 3-4
system failure 6-25 Observer 6-10
system requirements 1-8 displaying toolbars 3-4
system setting A-18 Sensitivity 7-6
system time 6-22, 7-3 Stop Watch 7-3
Time & Status 7-3
trace drawing 8-9
T Trace Restore 6-14
TCG 8-43, H-1
Traces as Observed 5-28, 7-21, 7-22
connecting H-2
event 8-15
selecting A-6 events 7-21
TCR 8-43, A-9, H-1
filters 7-23
technicians, See staff

HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide ix

 setting up 5-8 Files/Reports format 3-7
Traces as Observed events 7-24 List format 3-6
Tracking State E-13 Montages format 3-9
trigger output D-36 showing 3-17
troubleshooting Staff
Hardware Setup A-18 Detail format 3-13
volume errors 12-15 Files/Reports format 3-12
type List format 3-10
channels 8-46 user defined 3-17
Volumes
Files/Reports format 3-14
U List format 3-13
Undo Archive feature 9-34
virtual CD-ROM 9-24
upgrading HARMONIE 2-9 creating volumes 9-32
user defined event 8-15
storage devices 9-22
user defined views 3-17
virtual memory A-19
system setting A-18
V voltage maps 4-21
VCR H-1 volume descriptions
selecting A-9 changing 9-20
VCRs Volume view 3-5
configuring for 24 hour recording H-4 Volume.inf file 9-2
verifying files 9-10 volumes 4-6, 4-8, 5-3, 9-2
vertical wipe bar creating 4-9, 4-10, 9-15, 9-23, 9-32
displaying 7-10 deleting 4-10
recording 6-14 information file 9-2
video 8-44 naming conventions 4-9, 9-32
video recovering 12-16
at EEG position 8-45 troubleshooting 12-15
synchronizing A-6 Volumes view
time 8-45 Files/Reports format 3-14
video boards List format 3-13
Darim MPEGator MPG1
configuring J-5 W
installing J-4 width 7-6, A-16
video mode H-7
window
video movement
active 8-10
following 8-45 HARMONIE 3-2, 3-3
video recording device A-10
Observer Real Time Recording 6-13
Video Synchronization mode 8-44
panes 8-9, 8-10
configuring Review stations H-1 Recorder 6-22
hardware A-6, A-9, H-1
Reviewer
Video-in-a-Window H-2
moving around 8-7
View Design wizard 3-4, 3-18 splitting 8-9
views
Windows 95/98
customizing 3-4, 3-18
installing PC-TIO-10 software E-6
files 3-16, 9-3 Windows 95/98 installation
Files to Archive 3-17
configuring D-22
Files to Assign 3-17
Windows Explorer 9-35, 11-17
Files to Backup 3-16 WindowsNT
Files to Review 3-17
installing PC-TIO-10 software E-5
Files to Verify 3-17
wipe bar
formats 3-5 displaying 7-10
Global Montages 3-15
recording 6-14
HARMONIE 3-5, 3-18
video 8-44
Patients workstations
Detail format 3-9
central 4-3

x HARMONIE DVN Reference Guide

 central, configuring 4-3
configuring H-7
connecting to 6-20
networking A-20

HARMONIE Version DVN Reference Guide xi